Servisno Uputstvo Za Massey Ferguson Traktore Serije 6100-6190
Servisno Uputstvo Za Massey Ferguson Traktore Serije 6100-6190
Servisno Uputstvo Za Massey Ferguson Traktore Serije 6100-6190
net
CONTENTS
Introduction - Specifications
1
2
Rear axle
9 - Hydraulics
10 - Electrical equipment
11
Electronics
12
13 - Accessories
14
Service Tools
www.maskinisten.net
mie
I . INTRODUCTION
Contents
1 A01 INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
Ave
1A01.1
1 A01 Introduction
CONTENTS
A . Using the manual
B.
Specifications
C.
16
D.
Safety precautions
17
E.
Practical advice
19
F.
Installation instructions
22
G.
Conversion table
23
H.
Sealants
31
I.
Tightening torques
31
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.2
Page numbering
Example : 7C01-3
This manual is divided into parts and sections. Each
page contains the following information :
7 = Section
C = Part
01 = Sequence number within the Part
3 = Page number within the Part
The issue number and the date are indicated at the
bottom of the page.
0 (..)
[..]
triangle
/..\
Amendments
Amended pages will be issued carrying the same page
number as previous pages : only the issue number and
the date will change.
Old pages should be destroyed.
Special tools
Where the use of a special tool is necessary in an
operation, the tool number is shown following the
instruction requiring its use.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.3
B . Specifications
Engine
MF 6130 MF 6140
MF 6150
MF 6160
MF 6170
MF 6180
MF 6190
Characteristics
MF 6110
MF 6120
PERKINS Model
4.41
4.41
Number of cylinders
yes
yes
yes
Turbocharger
yes
yes
Bore, (mm.)
101.1
101.1
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Stroke, (mm.)
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
4100
4100
4000
4000
4000
6000
6000
6000
6000
51.5
58,9
62,6
66,2
69,9
73,5
81
88,3
95,6
47
53
57
59,8
64
68
74
82,3
88,3
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
265
286
325
359
386
403
440
490
1400
1400
1400
1400
1200
1200
1200
1400
1400
750
750
850
850
850
850
850
1000
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2200
2350
2350
2310
2310
12310
2310
2310
2310
2310
1 750
1530
75
328
Maximum torque
Lubrication
Gear type pump - strainer on suction side and external canister type filter(s).
Valves
0.30 (0.012)
0.20 (0.008)
- Exhaust - mm (in)
0.30 (0.012)
0.45 (0.018)
no
l no
1
yes
yes
no
yes
no
: yes
yes
ACDELCO
Yes
Number of elements
CAV
Injection pump
Injectors and nozzle holders
Cold weather starting
2
Lucas
CAV
Stanadyne
Lucas
CAV
Stanadyne
Thermostart
Air Cleaner: Two-stage air filter with removable elements for servicing, with centrifugal prefilter and clogging indicator (warning lamp).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
1A01.4
Introduction
Electrical system
Voltage:
Batteries:
Safety start:
Headlights:
Sidelights:
Rear/brake lights:
Direction indicators:
Number plate light:
Work lamps:
Instrument panel lighting and warning lights:
Roof light:
Cooling
Operation:
Fan:
Belt deflection:
(on the longest span)
Transmission
Clutch :
6110/6120/6130/6140/6150/6160
6170/6180/6190
Gearbox :
Without Dynashift :
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.5
16 SPEED 30 KPH
Speed
Range
Speedshift
FORWARD
KPH
1
2
L
0
W
3
4
5
6
1*
H
I
G
H
7
8
1116,
MPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
FORWARD
KPH
MPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
1.91
2.45
2.93
3.70
4.05
5.12
5.87
7.42
1.19
1.52
1.82
2.30
2.52
3.18
3.65
4.61
1.86
2.38
2.85
3.59
3.94
4.97
5.70
7.21
1.16
1.48
1.77
2.23
2.45
3.09
3.54
4.48
2.45
3.10
3.70
4.68
5.12
6.48
7.42
9.38
1.52
1.92
2.30
2.91
3.18
4.03
4.61
5.83
2.38
3.01
3.59
4.55
4.97
6.30
7.21
9.12
1.48
1.87
2.23
2.83
3.09
3.91
4.48
5.67
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
7.78
9.83
11.75
14.85
16.26
20.56
23.55
29.76
4.83
6.11
7.30
9.23
10.10
12.79
14.64
18.50
7.56
9.55
11.42
14.43
15.80
19.98
22.89
28.92
4.70
5.94
7.10
8.97
9.82
12.42
14.23
17.97
9.83
12.43
14.86
18.77
20.56
25.98
29.76
37.62
6.11
7.72
9.28
11.67
12.79
16.15
18.50
23.38
9.55
12.08
14.48
18.25
19.98
25.26
28.92
36.57
5.94
7.51
8.97
11.34
12.42
15.70
17.97
22.72
Speed
Range
Speedshift
FORWARD
KPH
1
2
L
0
W
3
4
5
6
H
I
G
H
7
8
direr
MPH
16 SPEED 40 KPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
FORWARD
KPH
MPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
1.92
2.43
2.90
3.67
4.01
5.08
5.81
7.35
1.19
1.51
1.81
2.28
2.50
3.16
3.62
4.57
1.86
2.36
2.81
3.57
3.90
4.94
5.64
7.15
1.16
1.46
1.74
2.21
2.42
3.07
3.50
4.44
2.43
3.07
3.67
4.64
5.08
6.42
7.35
9.29
1.51
1.91
2.28
2.88
3.16
3.99
4.57
5.78
2.36
2.98
3.57
4.51
4.94
6.24
7.15
9.03
1.46
1.85
2.21
2.80
3.07
3.88
4.44
5.61
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
7.71
9.74
11.64
14.72
16.11
20.37
23.33
29.49
4.80
6.06
7.24
9.15
10.02
12.66
14.50
18.33
7.49
9.47
11.31
14.31
15.66
19.80
22.67
28.66
4.66
5.90
7.03
8.89
9.73
12.30
14.09
17.81
9.74
12.31
14.72
18.60
20.37
25.74
29.49
37.27
6.06
7.66
9.15
11.56
12.66
16.00
18.33
23.17
9.47
11.96
14.31
18.08
19.80
25.02
28.66
36.22
5.90
7.43
8.89
11.23
12.30
15.55
17.81
22.51
Issue 1
February,1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
Introduction
1A01.6
Road speeds at 2200 rev/min
6180/6190 - 20.8 - 38 tyres
16 SPEED 30 KPH
Speed
Range
Speedshift
FORWARD
KPH
L
0
W
2
3
4
.A0*
G
H
7
8
111610
MPH
16 SPEED 40 KPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
FORWARD
KPH
MPH
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
2.54
3.22
3.84
4.86
5.32
6.73
7.71
9.74
1.57
2.00
2.38
3.02
3.30
4.18
4.42
6.05
2.53
3.20
3.82
4.83
5.29
6.69
7.66
9.69
1.57
1.99
2.37
3.00
3.28
4.18
4.76
6.02
2.54
3.22
3.84
4.86
5.32
6.73
7.71
9.74
1.57
2.00
2.38
3.02
3.30
4.18
4.42
6.05
2.53
3.20
3.82
4.83
5.29
6.69
7.66
9.69
1.57
1.99
2.37
3.00
3.28
4.15
4.76
6.02
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
10.22
12.91
15.43
19.51
21.36
27.00
30.92
6.35
8.02
9.59
12.12
13.27
16.78
19.21
10.16
12.84
15.34
19.39
21.23
26.84
30.74
6.31
7.98
9.53
12.05
13.19
16.68
19.10
10.22
12.91
15.43
19.51
21.36
27.00
30.92
39.09
6.35
8.02
9.59
12.12
13.27
16.78
19.21
24.29
10.16
12.84
15.34
19.39
21.23
26.84
30.74
38.86
6.31
7.98
9.53
12.05
13.19
16.68
19.10
24.15
RATIO
1
2
.111141
3
4
1
2
3
4
Issue 1
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
KPH
MPH
2.04
2.39
2.82
3.30
3.47
4.06
4.79
5.61
4.57
5.34
6.31
7.38
6.18
7.23
8.54
9.99
1.27
1.49
1.75
2.05
2.16
2.52
2.98
3.49
2.84
3.32
3.92
4.59
3.84
4.49
5.30
6.21
4.76
5.57
6.57
7.69
8.08
9.46
11.16
13.07
10.64
12.45
14.69
17.20
14.39
16.84
19.88
23.27
2.06
2.41
3.10
3.33
3.50
4.10
4.83
5.66
4.61
5.39
6.37
7.45
6.24
7.30
8.62
10.08
7.72
9.05
10.67
12.50
13.13
15.36
18.14
21.23
17.28
20.22
23.88
27.94
23.38
27.37
32.31
37.81
1.28
1.50
1.93
2.07
7.65
8.96
10.57
12.38
13.00
15.22
17.97
21.03
17.12
20.03
23.65
27.68
23.16
27.11
32.00
37.45
February 1995
2.18
2.55
3.00
3.52
2.87
3.35
3.96
4.63
3.88
4.54
5.36
6.27
4.80
5.63
6.64
7.78
8.17
9.55
11.28
13.21
10.75
12.58
14.85
17.38
14.54
17.02
20.10
23.52
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.7
1
2
41411k
3
4
1
2
3
4
REVERSE
FORWARD
RATIO
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
KPH
MPH
KPH
MPH
2.04
2.39
2.82
3.30
3.47
4.06
4.79
5.60
4.56
5.34
6.30
7.38
6.17
7.22
8.53
9.98
7.65
8.95
10.56
12.36
12.99
15.20
17.95
21.00
17.10
20.01
23.62
27.65
23.14
27.08
31.96
37.41
1.27
1.48
1.75
2.05
2.15
2.52
2.98
3.48
2.83
3.32
3.92
4.58
3.84
4.49
5.30
6.20
4.75
5.56
6.56
7.68
2.06
2.41
3.10
3.33
3.50
4.10
4.83
5.65
4.60
5.39
6.36
7.45
6.22
7.29
8.61
10.07
7.72
9.04
10.66
12.48
13.12
15.34
18.12
21.20
17.26
20.20
23.84
27.92
23.36
27.34
32.26
37.77
1.28
1.50
1.93
2.07
2.18
2.55
3.00
3.51
2.86
3.35
3.96
4.63
3.87
4.53
5.36
6.26
4.80
5.62
6.63
7.76
8.07
9.45
11.15
13.05
10.62
12.43
14.68
17.18
14.38
16.83
19.86
23.25
8.16
9.54
11.27
13.19
10.74
12.56
14.83
17.37
14.53
17.01
20.07
23.49
RATIO
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
3
4
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
REVERSE
KPH
MPH
KPH
MPH
2.09
2.45
2.89
3.38
3.55
4.16
4.91
5.75
4.68
5.47
6.46
7.56
6.33
7.41
8.74
10.23
7.84
9.17
10.83
12.67
13.32
15.59
18.50
21.54
17.53
20.52
24.22
28.35
23.72
27.76
32.77
38.36
1.30
1.52
1.80
2.10
2.21
2.58
3.05
3.57
1.97
2.31
2.72
3.19
3.35
3.92
4.63
5.42
4.41
5.16
6.85
7.13
5.97
6.99
8.24
9.65
1.23
1.44
1.69
1.98
2.08
2.44
2.88
3.37
2.74
3.21
4.26
4.43
3.71
4.35
5.13
6.00
4.60
5.38
6.35
7.43
7.81
9.14
10.79
12.63
10.28
12.04
14.21
16.63
13.91
16.28
19.22
22.50
2.91
3.40
4.01
4.70
3.93
4.60
5.43
6.36
4.87
5.70
6.73
7.88
8.28
9.69
11.43
13.38
10.89
12.75
15.05
17.61
14.74
17.25
20.36
23.83
7.39
8.65
10.21
11.95
12.56
14.70
17.35
20.31
16.53
19.35
22.84
26.73
22.37
26.18
30.90
36.17
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Power take-off
Independent power take-off (IPTO)
P.T.O. ratio
Speed changing
(according to model)
Speed : MF 6150/6160/6170
Speed : MF 6180/6190
Introduction
epicyclic, in the rear axle housings.
6110/6120/6130/6140 (normal duty) 4.714 to 1
6150/6160/6170 (heavy duty)
5.077 to 1
6180/6190
5.571 to 1
Ratio
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
nue
Introduction
1A01.9
Hydraulics
Two stage gear pump, driven directly by the engine, supplies :
1st Stage
This circuit supplies 29 1/min (6.4 Imp . gal/min)
(7.6 US gal/min) at maximum engine speed.
Maximum pressure : 17 bar
1. Hydrostatic steering
Hare/Tortoise range gear
Differential lock (rear and front)
I.P.T.O. clutch
P.T.O. brake
Front P.T.O. (if fitted)
Four-wheel drive (if fitted)
Top up of brake master cylinder and clutch master cylinder
Clutch control valve (pressure loaded)
Lubrication of gearbox,P.T.O. and rear axle
Gearbox front unit (Speedshift or Dynashift)
Electro-hydraulical reverse shuttle (if fitted)
2nd Stage
This circuit supplies 50 1/min (11 Imp. gal/min)
(13.2 US gal/min)
Maximum pressure :185 bar
Filtration
Hydraulic lift
Type : 3-point, Category 2or 3, with fixed, telescopic or quick attach hook type ball ends (according to model).
Rams : 2. Lifting force (see charts)
Position
of lift rod
on lower
links
mm (in)
Position
of lift rod
on lower
links
mm (in)
Lower
links
horizontal
Kg (Lb)
Lower
links
fully
raised
Kg (Lb)
565 (22.2)
508 (20) 765 (30.1)
2885 (6360)
3010 (6636)
3825 (8433)
3165 (6977)
,,,
595 (23.4)
550 (, i .u) 827 (3-. -)
2b
3430 (7562)
4190 (9237)
3485 (7683)
Length
of lift
rods
mm (in)
Lower
links
horizontal
Kg (Lb)
Lower
links
fully
raised
Kg (Lb)
4350 (9590)
4276 (9427)
5194 (11451)
4308 (9497)
595 (3...
(23.4)
650 (25.6) 827
. _. 5740 (12654)
2b) 4788 (10556)
5689 (12541)
4703 (10368)
Length
of lift
rods
mm(in)
Position
of lift rod
on lower
links
mm (in)
Lower
links
fully
raised
Kg (Lb)
Position
of lift rod
on lower
links
mm (in)
3812 (8404)
3162 (6971)
550 (21.6)
6510 (14352)
5087 (11215)
4175 (9204)
3452 (7610)
595 (23.4)
650 (25.6) 827
(3 _ _, 8090 (17835)
2.b) 5717 (12604)
7117 (15690)
5595 (12335)
Length
of lift
rods
mm (in)
Lower
links
horizontal
Kg (Lb)
Issue 1
Length
of lift
rods
mm (in)
Lower
links
horizontal
Kg (Lb)
Lower
links
fully
raised
Kg (Lb)
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
1A01.10
Ar
Introduction
Brakes
Type : Oil immersed single disc per wheel, 343 mm (13.50 in), outside diameter. Inside diameter of lining :
6110/6120/6130/6140 : 296 mm (11.65 in)
6150/6160/6170/6180/6190 : 274,5 mm (10.81 in)
Operation : Hydraulic, from two master cylinders, automatic adjustment.
Handbrake : Operates on the rear axle bevel gear.
Trailer brake : According to model by an hydraulic valve.
6150
6110/20/30/40
13.6-24
57
6160
6170/80/90
13.6-28
13.6-28
14.9-28
1,85
55
1,85
55
2,05
55
4,60
4,94
4,94
1,75
55
57
4,37
Wheels
FRONT
REAR
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
Introduction
1A01.11
Tyres
Compatibility of front/rear tyres of 4-wheel drive tractors same make and model.
Tyres
Front
Rear
11.2R28
13.6R38
16.9R34
18.4R30
13.6R38
16.9R30
18.4R30
13.6R38
16.9R34
(1) 12.4R24
13.6R24
Front
Rear
13.6R28
14.9R24
14.9R28
(1) 380-70R24
380-70R28
16.9R38
18.4R34
13.6R38
18.4R34
18.4R38
480-70R34
480-70R38
Front
Rear
420-70R24
440-65R28
420-70R28
480-65R28
520-70R34
540-65R38
520-70R38
520-70R38
600-65R38
NOTE : The data in this table is not binding. Ask your dealer for further information on other possible
choices.
(1) 6110/6120/6130/6140/6150 only
11.2R28
13.6R24
13.6R28
14.9R24
14.9R28
380-70R24
380-70R28
440-65R28
420-70R24
420-70R28
480-65R28
Rear tyres
13.6R38
16.9R30
16.9R34
16.9R38
18.4R30
18.4R34
18.4R38
480-70R34
480-70R38
520-70R34
520-70R38
540-65R38
600-65R38
Rim
W9 x 28
W12 x 24
W11 or W12 x 28
W12 x 24
W12 x 28
W12 x 24
W12 x 28
W12 x 24
W12 x 28
W12 x 28
Rim
W11 or W12 x 38
W14 x 30
W14 or W15 x 34
W14 orW15 orW16 x 38
W14 orW15 orW16 x 30
W15 or W16 x 34
W15 or W16 x 38
W15 x 34
W15 x 38
W15 x 34
W15 x 38
W14,15 or 16 x 38
W15 or W16 x 38
Litre
Imp. gal.
98
139
150
178
200
161
174
202
192
214
255
21.56
30.60
33.00
39.20
44.00
35.40
38.30
44,44
42.20
47.10
56.10
Litre
Imp. gal.
184
260
285
304
304
345
386
349
375
424
452
386
521
40.50
57.20
62.70
66.80
66.80
75.90
84.90
76.70
82.50
93.29
99.45
84.92
115.00
Issue 1
US gal.
25.9
36.7
39.6
47.0
52.8
42.5
45.9
52.52
50.7
56.5
67.3
US gal.
48.6
68.7
75.3
80.3
80.3
91.1
102.0
92.2
99.0
112.0
119.4
100.36
135.46
Kg
lb
98
139
150
178
200
161
174
202
192
214
255
216
306
330
392
440
354
383
444
423
471
561
Kg
lb
184
260
285
304
304
345
386
349
375
424
452
386
521
405
472
627
669
669
760
850
768
826
934
995
849
1146
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.12
Capacities
Fuel tank :
6110/6120/6130/6140 :
6150/6160/6170/6180/6190 :
Cooling system
6110/6120/6130/6140/6150 :
6160/6170/6180/6190 :
Engine sump .
Transmission/rear axle *
6110/6120/6130/6140/6150/6160 :
6170/6180/6190 :
6110/6120/6130/6140/6160/6170/6180 :
6150 :
6190 :
6110/6120/6130/6140 :
6150/6160 :
6170/6180/6190 :
* When working on steep slopes 10 I (2.2 Imp. gal.) (2.7 US gal.) of oil can be added.
Front and rear static axle load limits - Kg (lb) at 1,5 bar (21.77 PSI) pressure
Type
2 WD Normal duty
6110/6120/6130/6140/6150
Heavy duty
6150/6160/6170
6180/6190
Front
Kg (lb)
Rear
mm (in)
mm (in)
Issue 1
Kg (lb)
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.13
2371
(93.34)
3995
(117.9)
2627
(103.4)
2570
D Overall width (1)
(101.2)
E Ground clearance (under drawbar Frame) 385
(15.2)
1971
F Height to steering wheel
(77.6)
Total weight (with full tank, without extra 3565
weight steel wheels)
(7859)
C Height to roof (cab tractor)
6110
2WD
6120/6130/6140
4WD
2WD
4WD
6150
2WD
4WD
2WD
4WD
2WD
4WD
2696 2699
2696 2699
2375 2549
2553 2696 2699
2375 2371
(93,35) (93.34) (93.35) (100.35) (100.51 (106.10)(106.25) (106.10) (106.25) (106.10) (106.25)
4527 4527
4402 4402
4069 4137
4137 4320 4472
4069 3995
(160.2) (117.9) (160.2) (162.87) (162.87 (170) (176) (173.3) (173.3) (178.2) (178.2)
2627
(103.4)
2570
(101.2)
385
(15.2)
1971
(77.6)
3840
(8465)
16.9-34
2627
2627 2724
(103.4) (103.4) (107.2)
2570
2570 2570
(101.2) (101.2) (101.2)
385
385
385
(15.2) (15.2) (15.2)
1971
1971 2023
(77.6) (77.6) (79.6)
3565
3840 4120
(7859) (8465) (9080)
16.9-34
2724
(107.2)
2570
(101.2)
385
(15.2)
2023
(79.6)
4400
(9698)
16.9-34
1774 (69.84)
1835 (72.34)
2230 (87.79)
0 82 shafts (3.23)
203,20 (8.00)
149,35 (5.88)
H Stud distance
L Centring diameter
I Stud length
Wheel with steel hub
Wheel with cast iron hub
41 (1.61)
66 (2.60)
2755
(108.5)
2570
(101.2)
445
(17.5)
2068
(81.4)
4675
(10320)
18.4-38
2768
(109)
2733
(107,6)
442
(17.4)
2110
(83)
4190
(9249)
2768
2908 2908
(109) (114.5) (114.5)
2832 2832
2733
(107,6) (111,5) (111,5)
442
502
502
(17.4) (19.8) (19.8)
2110
2250 2250
(83)
(88.6) (88.6)
4590
4805 5040
(10132) (10607) (11126)
16.9-38
Front axle
AG105
AG125
1669 (67)
1800 (70.86)
1800 (70.86)
43 (1.70)
20.8-38
335 (13.20)
280,8 (11.04)
275 (10.8)
M 18 x 1,5
8
J Stud diameter
K Number of studs
2755
(108.5)
2570
(101.2)
445
(17.5)
2068
(81.4)
4440
(9800)
AG85
Rear axle
2WD
6190
6180
6160/6170
4WD
43 (1.70)
M 18 x 1,5
8
55 (2.16)
M 22 x 1,5
10
(1) These dimensions are applicable for tractors adjusted for max, track
* 6180/6190 only
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.14
6150
6160/6170 6180/6190
1
2
301,50
20,00
301,50
20,00
301,50
20,00
301,50
20,00
61,60
61,60
Ref. 6110/6130
6140
6150
6160/6170
6180/
6190
37
155
155
155
155
38
125
125
125
125
39
40
125
125
125
125
52
52
52
52
41
52
52
52
52
101,60
101,60
44,45
44,45
60,32
60,32
101,60
101,60
481,00
570,00
621,40
621,40
42
79,52
79,52
79,52
96,52
112,40
201,40
49,60
49,60
43
46
46
46
46
25,25
70,00
25,25
6,27
6,27
44
190
190
190
190
10
70,00
101,60
101,60
45
100
100
100
100
46
226
226
226
226
11
44,45
44,45
47
92
92
92
123
60,27
60,27
48
0149,35
0149,35
0149,35
0149,35
13
101,60
101,60
49
371,12
371,12
371,12
371,12
14
698,00
787,00
736,80
736,80
12
15
340,05
429,05
370,60
370,60
50
320
320
320
320
16
17
571,75
571,75
771,50
51
110
110
110
110
896
896
896
771,50
896
52
130
130
130
130
18
890
890
890
890
53
65
65
65
19
567
567
567
567
54
142,75
94
94
55
56
20
817
817
817
817
57
310
310
310
310
20
21
267
267
267
267
22
127,07
127,07
127,07
127,07
23
53
24
25
101,60
31,40
26
27
53
101,60
53
20
65
142,75
142,75
20
20
58
142,75
142,75
142,75
142,75
59
223
223
223
223
101,60
31,40
60
315
315
315
324
53
101,60
31,40
142,75
101,60
31,40
101,60
101,60
101,60
61
100
100
100
100
100
100
161
62
65
65
65
28
260
260
260
280
63
65
29
43
43
43
43
64
40 or 66
30
106
106
106
106
65
323,90
66
76,20
65
40 or 66
65
40 or 66
224
224
224
224
67
120,60
32
128
128
128
68
33
1774
128
1774
1835
69
241,30
3388
1774
36
B
C
D
E
E'
F
:
:
:
:
:
:
3231
3388
2228
35
A :
3056
40 or 66
31
34
155
155
Issue 2
155
G
H
I
J
K
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
2870
70
155
71
December 1997
89
4 WD centerline
: Crankshaft centerline
: Differential centerline
: Trumpet centerline
: PTO centerline
v :
w
x
y
z
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.15
6 CYL.
6160 - 70 - 80 - 90
4CYL.
6110 - 20 - 30 - 40
50 - 60 - 70
70
6110 - 20 - 30 - 40
33
.f.
17
6110 - 20 - 30 - 40
50 - 60 - 70
CV
6150
C)
57
L)
CO
56
6180 - 90
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
25 26
18
www.maskinisten.net
17k
no'
Introduction
1A01.17
D. Safety precautions
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
ii
G.B.
Ai
e
G.B.
WARNING
A
A
CAUTION
WARNING
G.B.
WARNING
CAUTION
t G.B.
G.B.
WARNING
WARNING
Before removing any battery,
disconnect all negative leads
before positive leads.
,,
"F
DO NOT REMOVE OR
OBSCURE DECAL
G.B
a CAUTION
5
TO AVOID POSSIBLE TRACTOR
4'
2752579 M1
7
9
CAUTION
Belt for use only on
tractors with safety
structures.
12
G.B.
WARNING
ii
G.B.
WARNING
If tractor is overturning, hold onto
steering wheel.
Do not leave seat
ii
4'
3617574 M1
CAUTION
13
CAUTION
11
14
IT IS IMPERATIVE TO USE
THE TRANSMISSION OIL
RECOMMENDED IN THE
OPERATING MANUAL
DO NOT REMOVE OR OBSCURE DECAL 3580315 M1
Issue 1
3713699M1
February 1, 995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
V7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.19
E . Practical advice
Safety
Your safety and that of others must always be the first
consideration when working around machines of any
type.
Safety is a matter of thoroughly understanding the job
to be done, the correct use of tools and equipment, and
the application of good common sense.
Trouble-shooting
The following procedure, combined with the information contained in the workshop manual will be helpful in
tracing faults accurately.
It consists of following a number of logical steps to
locate and correct the problem.
1.Determine the problem.
2. List possible causes.
3.Differentiate the causes.
4.Conduct checks in logical order to determine the
exact cause.
5.Consider approximate remaining service life against
cost of parts and labour.
6. Make any necessary repair.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
Cleanliness
To ensure long life of a machine, it is important to keep
dirt and foreign material out of its vital working components. Precautions must be taken to safeguard against
this. Enclosed compartments, seals and filters have
been provided to keep the supply of air, fuel and
lubricant clean. These protective devices must not be
removed.
Whenever hydraulic fluid, fuel, lubricating oil or air lines
are disconnected, clean the point of disconnection and
the surrounding area. As soon as a line has been
disconnected, cap, plug or tape the line or opening to
prevent the ingress of foreign material.
The same cleaning and covering precautions should be
taken when access covers or inspection plates are
removed.
Clean and inspect all parts. Make sure that all passages
and holes are clear. Cover all parts to keep them clean.
Make sure parts are clean when they are reassembled.
Leave new parts in their wrapping until they are actually
needed for reassembly.
Assembly
When reassembling a machine, complete each step in
sequence. Never partially assemble one part then start
to assemble another. Make all recommended adjustments. Always check the job on completion to ensure
that nothing has been overlooked.
Recheck the various adjustments before putting the
machine back into service
Note : Before fitting new parts, remove rust preventative compound from all machined surfaces (usually
epeel-of substances).
Lubrication
Where applicable, fill the compartments of repaired or
renewed components with the quantity, type and grade
of clean lubricant recommended in the routine maintenance section of the Operation Instruction Book.
14r
Gaskets
Make sure that the holes in gaskets line up with
lubricating oil passages in the mating parts. If gaskets
have to be made, use material of the correct type and
thickness. Make sure that holes are punched in the
right places.
Incorrectly punched gaskets can cause serious damage.
Lip type rubber seals.
Lubricate the lips of lip-type seals with oil before fitment. Do not use grease on seals, except for grease
seals. The main parts of a lip-type seal are the case (1),
the sealing element (2) and the ring spring (3). The figure
shows the construction of a simple lip-type seal. The
cross section shows the heel (4) and the toe (5),
used to identify the sides of a single element seal. With
a few exceptions, the toe of a single-lip seal is located
on the lubricant side. Some seals have a second
auxiliary lip which has no spring.
Shims
When shims are removed, tie them together and identify their location. Keep shims clean and take care not
to bend them before refitting them.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.21
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
1A01.22
Introduction
F. Installation instructions
General
In order to ensure regular servicing of the tractor during
the warranty period, the supplying MF Distributor or
Dealer must carry out the 50-hour and 250-hour servicing
operations.
The definition of this operation is designed to provide
the tractor with maximum efficiency during the whole
warranty period, thus ensuring that it gives reliable
service after that period.
Pre-delivery check
The performance of the following operations must be
ensured by the Distributor before delivery to a Dealer
and by the Dealer before delivery to an owner or
operator.
1. General installation
- Clean the tops of batteries and smear the terminals
with petroleum jelly.
- Charge the batteries, if necessary.
- Check all electrical connections, and cable, ducting
and light attachments.
- Check and top up the oil levels in the engine and
transmission housings.
- Lubricate all grease points.
- Check and adjust belt tensions, as required (alternator,
fan, auxiliary pump and air-conditioning compressor).
- Unless it contains an antifreeze compound, flush the
cooling system and refill with soft water.
- Check that the fuel tank contains enough fuel of the
correct type.
- Check that the cylinder head attaching nuts and bolts
are tightened to the required torque. Check that the
inlet pipe and exhaust manifold attaching nuts and bolts
are correctly tightened.
- Check and adjust the clearance between the valves
and rockers and visually check the valve springs.
- Check the injectors, bleed the fuel system and tighten
all fuel line connections.
- Check that the engine air filter hoses are secure.
- Check that the engine control linkages are correctly
adjusted and operate freely.
- Start the engine.
- Check that the instruments and warning lights operate
correctly.
- Check the engine speed on the tachometer with both
the hand and foot-operated throttles.
- Hitch up a mounted implement and check that the
tractor's hydraulic accessories operate correctly.
- Check and adjust the tyre pressures (road or field
work).
Issue 1
February 1995
I!W
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Age
Introduction
1A01.23
Instructions to driver
Instructions on items listed below must be given to
the owner or operator.
G. Conversion tables
Pressure units
1 PSI = 1 Ibf/in2 = 0.0689 bar
1 bar = 14.512 Ibf/in2 = 14.512 PSI
Bar
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
7.5
8
8.5
9
Ibf / in2
7.256
14.51
21.77
29
36.28
43.54
50.8
58
65.3
72.6
79.8
87.1
94.3
101.6
108.8
116.1
123.4
130.6
Bar
9.5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
30
Ibf / in2
Bar
137.9
145
159.6
174
189
203
218
232
247
261
276
290
309
319
334
348
368
435
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ibf / in2
508
588
653
726
871
1029
1161
1306
1451
2903
4354
5805
7257
8708
10160
11611
13235
14514
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mge
1A01.24
Introduction
Torque units
1 Nm = 0.7376 Ibf/ft
1 Ibf/ft = 1.3558 Nm
Ibf/ft
Nm
Nm
Ibf/ft
Nm
Ibf/ft
1.3558
0.7376
46.0972
34
25.0784
90.8396
67
49.4912
2.7116
1.4752
47.4530
35
25.8160
92.1944
68
50.1568
4.0674
2.2128
48.8088
36
26.5536
93.5502
69
50.8944
5.4232
2.9504
50.1646
37
27.2912
94.9060
70
51.6320
6.7790
3.6880
51.5204
38
28.0288
96.2618
71
52.3696
8.1348
4.4256
52.8762
39
28.7664
97.6176
72
53.1072
9.4906
5.1632
54.2320
40
29.5040
98.9734
73
53.8448
10.8464
5.9008
55.5878
41
30.2416
100.329
74
54.5824
12.2022
6.6384
56.9436
42
30.9792
101.685
75
55.3200
13.5580
10
7.3760
58.2994
43
31.7168
103.041
76
56.0576
14.9138
11
8.1136
59.6552
44
32.4544
104.397
77
56.7952
16.2696
12
8.8512
61.0110
45
33.1920
105.752
78
57.5328
17.6254
13
9.5888
62.3668
46
33.9296
107.108
79
58.2704
18.9812
14
10.3264
63.7226
47
34.6672
108.464
80
59.0080
20.3370
15
11.0640
65.0784
48
35.4048
109.820
81
59.7456
21.6928
16
11.8016
66.4342
49
36.1424
111.176
82
60.4832
23.0486
17
12.5392
67.7900
50
36.8800
112.531
83
61.2208
24.4044
18
13.2768
69.1458
51
37.6176
113.887
84
61.9584
25.7602
19
14.0144
70.5016
52
38.3552
115.243
85
62.6960
27.1160
20
14.7520
71.8574
53
39.0928
116.600
86
63.4336
28.4718
21
15.4896
73.2132
54
39.8304
117.955
87
64.1712
29.8276
22
16.2272
74.5690
55
40.5680
119.310
88
64.9088
31.1834
23
16.9648
75.9248
56
41.3056
120.666
89
65.6464
32.5392
24
17.7024
77.2806
57
42.0432
122.022
90
66.3840
33.8950
25
18.4400
78.6364
58
42.7808
123.378
91
67.1216
35.2508
26
19.1776
79.9992
59
43.5184
124.734
92
67.8592
36.6066
27
19.9152
81.3480
60
44.2560
126.089
93
68.5968
37.9624
28
20.6528
82.7038
61
44.9936
127.445
94
69.3344
39.3182
29
21.3904
84.0596
62
45.7312
128.801
95
70.0720
40.6740
30
22.1280
85.4154
63
46.4688
130.157
96
70.8096
42.0298
31
22.8656
86.7712
64
47.2064
131.513
97
71.5472
43.3856
32
23.6032
88.1270
65
47.9440
132.868
98
72.2848
44.7414
33
24.3408
89.4828
66
48.6816
134.224
99
73.0224
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.25
Capacity units
1 litre = 0.2199 imp. gallon
Imp. gal.
Imp. gal.
Litres
Imp. gal.
Litres
0.2199
4.5459
7.4766
34
154.561
14.733
67
304.575
0.4398
9.0918
7.6965
35
159.107
14.9532
68
309.121
0.6597
13.6377
7.9164
36
163.652
15.1731
69
313.667
0.8796
18.1836
8.1363
37
168.198
15.3930
70
318.213
1.0995
22.7295
8.3562
38
172.744
15.6129
71
322.759
1.3194
27.2754
8.5761
39
177.290
15.8328
72
327.305
1.5393
31.8213
8.7960
40
181.836
16.0527
73
331.851
1.7592
36.3672
9.0159
41
186.382
16.2726
74
336.397
1.9791
40.9131
9.2358
42
190.929
16.4925
75
340.943
2.1990
10
45.4590
9.4557
43
195.474
16.7124
76
345.488
2.4189
11
50.0049
9.6756
44
200.019
16.9323
77
350.034
2.6388
12
54.5508
9.8955
45
204.566
17.1522
78
354.580
2.8587
13
59.0967
10.1154
46
209.111
17.3721
79
359.126
3.0786
14
63.6426
10.3353
47
213.657
17.5920
80
363.672
3.2985
15
68.1885
10.5552
48
218.203
17.8119
81
368.218
3.5184
16
72.7344
10.7751
49
222.749
18.0318
82
372.764
3.7383
17
77.2803
10.9950
50
227.295
18.2517
83
377.310
3.9582
18
81.8262
11.2149
51
231.841
18.4716
84
381.856
4.1781
19
86.3721
11.4348
52
236.387
18.6915
85
386.402
4.3980
20
90.9180
11.6547
53
240.933
18.9114
86
390.947
4.6179
21
95.4639
11.8746
54
245.479
19.1313
87
395.493
4.8378
22
100.009
12.0945
55
250.025
19.3512
88
400.039
5.0577
23
104.556
12.3144
56
254.570
19.5711
89
404.585
5.2776
24
109.102
12.5343
57
259.116
19.7910
90
409.131
5.4975
25
113.648
12.7542
58
263.662
20.0109
91
413.677
5.7174
26
118.193
12.9741
59
268.209
20.2308
92
418.223
5.9373
27
122.739
13.1940
60
272.754
20.4507
93
422.769
6.1572
28
127.285
13.4139
61
277.299
20.6706
94
427.315
6.3771
29
131.831
13.6338
62
281.846
20.8905
95
431.861
6.5970
30
136.377
13.8537
63
286.392
21.1104
96
436.406
6.8169
31
140.923
14.0736
64
290.938
21.3303
97
440.952
7.0368
32
145.469
14.2935
65
295.483
21.5502
98
445.498
7.2567
33
150.015
14.5134
66
300.029
21.7701
99
450.044
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.26
Capacity units
1 litre = 1.7599 imp. pints
1 imp. pint = 0.5682 litre
Note:
Litres
Imp. pt.
Litres
Imp. pt.
Litres
1.7599
0.5682
59.8366
34
19.3188
117.913
67
38.0694
3.5198
1.1364
61.5965
35
19.8870
119.673
68
38.6376
5.2797
1.7046
63.3564
36
20.4552
121.433
69
39.2058
7.0396
2.2728
65.1163
37
21.0234
123.193
70
39.7740
8.7995
2.8400
66.8762
38
21.5916
124.953
71
40.3422
10.5594
3.4902
68.6361
39
22.1598
126.713
72
40.9104
12.3193
3.9774
70.3960
40
22.7280
128.473
73
41.4786
14.0792
4.5456
72.1559
41
23.2962
130.233
74
42.0468
15.8391
5.1138
73.9158
42
23.8644
131.993
75
42.6150
17.5990
10
5.6820
75.6757
43
24.4326
133.752
76
43.1832
19.3589
11
6.2502
77.4356
44
25.0008
135.512
77
43.7514
21.1188
12
6.8184
79.1955
45
25.5690
137.272
78
44.3196
22.8787
13
7.3866
80.9554
46
26.1372
139.032
79
44.8878
24.6386
14
7.9548
82.7153
47
26.7054
140.792
80
45.4560
26.3985
15
8.5230
84.4752
48
27.2736
142.552
81
46.0242
28.1854
16
9.0912
86.2351
49
27.8418
144.312
82
46.5924
29.9183
17
9.6594
87.9950
50
28.4100
146.072
83
47.1606
31.6782
18
10.2276
89.7549
51
28.9782
147.832
84
47.7288
33.4381
19
10.7958
91.5148
52
29.5464
149.592
85
48.2970
35.1980
20
11.3640
93.2747
53
30.1146
151.351
86
48.8652
36.9579
21
11.9322
95.0346
54
30.6828
153.111
87
49.4334
38.7178
22
12.5004
96.7945
55
31.2510
154.871
88
50.0016
40.4770
23
13.0686
98.5544
56
31.8192
156.631
89
50.5698
42.2376
24
13.6368
100.314
57
32.3874
158.391
90
51.1380
43.9975
25
14.2050
102.074
58
32.9556
160.151
91
51.7062
45.7574
26
14.7732
103.834
59
33.5238
161.912
92
52.2744
57.5173
27
15.3414
105.594
60
34.0920
163.671
93
52.8426
49.2772
28
15.9096
107.354
61
34.6602
165.431
94
53.4108
51.0371
29
16.4778
109.114
62
35.2284
167.191
95
53.9790
52.7970
30
17.0460
110.874
63
35.7966
168.950
96
54.5472
54.5569
31
17.6142
112.634
64
36.3648
170.710
97
55.1154
56.3168
32
18.1824
114.394
65
36.9330
172.470
98
55.6836
58.0767
33
18.7506
116.153
66
37.5012
174.230
99
56.2518
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
iTr
Introduction
1A01.27
Length units
1 m = 3.2808 ft
1 ft = 0.3048 m
ft
ft
ft
0.3048
3.2808
10.3632
34
111.549
20.4216
67
219.816
0.6096
6.5617
10.6680
35
114.829
20.7264
68
223.097
0.9144
9.8425
10.9728
36
118.110
21.0312
69
226.378
1.2192
13.1234
11.2776
37
121.391
21.3360
70
229.659
1.5240
16.4042
11.5824
38
124.672
21.6408
71
232.940
1.8288
19.6850
11.8872
39
127.953
21.9456
72
236.220
2.1336
22.9659
12.1920
40
131.234
22.2504
73
239.501
2.4384
26.2467
12.4968
41
134.514
22.5552
74
242.782
2.7432
29.5276
12.8016
42
137.795
22.8600
75
246.063
3.0480
10
32.8084
13.1064
43
141.076
23.1648
76
249.344
3.3528
11
36.0892
13.4112
44
144.357
23.4696
77
252.625
3.6576
12
39.3701
13.7160
45
147.638
23.7744
78
255.906
3.9624
13
42.6509
14.0208
46
150.919
24.0792
79
259.186
4.2672
14
45.9318
14.3256
47
154.199
24.3840
80
262.467
4.5720
15
49.2126
14.6304
48
157.480
24.6888
81
265.748
4.8768
16
52.4934
14.9352
49
160.761
24.9936
82
269.029
5.1816
17
55.7743
15.2400
50
164.042
25.2984
83
272.310
5.4864
18
59.0551
15.5448
51
167.323
25.6032
84
275.591
5.7912
19
62.3360
15.8496
52
170.604
25.9080
85
278.871
6.0960
20
65.6168
16.1544
53
173.885
26.2128
86
282.152
6.4008
21
68.8976
16.4592
54
177.165
26.5176
87
285.433
6.7056
22
72.1785
16.7640
55
180.446
26.8224
88
288.714
7.0104
23
75.4593
17.0688
56
183.727
27.1272
89
291.995
7.3152
24
78.7402
17.3736
57
187.008
27.4320
90
295.276
7.6200
25
82.0210
17.6784
58
190.289
27.7368
91
298.556
7.9248
26
85.3018
17.9832
59
193.570
28.0416
92
301.837
8.2296
27
88.5827
18.2880
60
196.850
28.3464
93
305.118
8.5344
28
91.8635
18.5928
61
200.131
28.6512
94
308.399
8.8392
29
95.1444
18.8976
61
203.412
28.9560
95
311.680
9.1440
30
98.4252
19.2024
63
206.693
29.2608
96
314.961
9.4488
31
101.7060
19.5072
64
209.974
29.5656
97
318.241
9.7536
32
104.9870
19.8120
65
213.255
29.8704
98
321.522
10.0584
33
108.2680
20.1168
66
216.535
30.1752
99
324.803
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.28
Weight units
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
1 lb = 0.4536 kg
kg
lb
kg
lb
kg
lb
0.4536
2.2046
15.4224
34
74.9564
30.3912
67
147.708
0.9072
4.4092
15.8760
35
77.1610
30.8448
68
149.913
1.3608
6.6138
16.3296
36
79.3656
31.2984
69
152.117
1.8144
8.8184
16.7832
37
81.5702
31.7520
70
154.322
2.2680
11.0230
17.2368
38
83.7748
32.2056
71
156.527
2.7216
13.2276
17.6904
39
85.9794
32.6592
72
158.731
3.1752
15.4322
18.1440
40
88.1840
33.1128
73
160.936
3.6288
17.6368
18.5976
41
90.3886
33.5664
74
163.140
4.0824
19.8414
19.0512
42
92.5932
34.0200
75
165.345
4.5360
10
22.0460
19.5048
43
94.7978
34.4736
76
167.549
4.9896
11
24.2506
19.9584
44
97.0024
34.9272
77
169.754
5.4432
12
26.4552
20.4120
45
99.207
35.3808
78
171.958
5.8968
13
28.6598
20.8656
46
101.412
35.8344
79
174.163
6.3504
14
30.8644
21.3192
47
103.616
36.2880
80
176.368
6.8040
15
33.0690
21.7728
48
105.821
36.7416
81
178.573
7.2576
16
35.2736
22.2264
49
108.025
37.1952
82
180.777
7.7112
17
37.4782
22.6800
50
110.230
37.6488
83
182.982
8.1648
18
39.6828
23.1336
51
112.435
38.1024
84
185.186
8.6184
19
41.8874
23.5872
52
114.639
38.5560
85
187.391
9.0720
20
44.0920
24.0408
53
116.844
39.0096
86
189.596
9.5256
21
46.2966
24.4944
54
119.048
39.4632
87
191.800
9.9792
22
48.5012
24.9489
55
121.253
39.9168
88
194.005
10.4328
23
50.7058
25.4016
56
123.458
40.3704
89
196.209
10.8864
24
52.9104
25.8552
57
125.662
40.8240
90
198.414
11.3400
25
55.1150
26.3088
58
127.867
41.2776
91
200.619
11.7936
26
57.3196
26.7624
59
130.071
41.7312
92
202.823
12.2472
27
59.5242
27.2160
60
132.276
42.1848
93
205.028
12.7008
28
61.7288
27.6696
61
134.481
42.6384
94
207.232
13.1544
29
63.9334
28.1232
62
136.685
43.0920
95
209.437
13.6080
30
66.1380
28.5768
63
138.889
43.5456
96
211.642
14.0616
31
68.3426
29.0304
64
141.094
43.9992
97
213.846
14.5152
32
70.5472
29.4840
65
143.299
44.4528
98
216.051
16.9688
33
72.7518
29.9376
66
145.504
44.9064
99
218.255
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.29
Conversion table
LENGTHS
1 inch = 25.4 mm
TEMPERATURE
mm to inches
Inches to mm
Fahrenheit to Celsius
Fractions
of inches
Decimals
1/64
.015625
0.3969
- 20
- 28.9
- 30
- 22
1/32
.031250
0.7937
- 15
- 26.1
- 28
- 18.4
3/64
.468750
1.1906
- 10
- 23.3
- 26
- 14.8
1/16
.062500
1.5875
0.0001
0.00254
0.004
0.00015
- 5
- 20.6
- 24
- 11.2
5/64
.078125
1.9844
.0002
.00508
0.005
.00019
- 17.8
- 22
- 7.6
3/32
.093750
2.3812
.0003
.00762
0.006
.00023
-17.2
- 20
- 4
7/64
.109375
2.7781
.0004
.01016
0.007
.00027
- 16.7
- 18
- 0.4
1/8
.125000
3.1750
.0005
.01270
0.008
.00031
- 16.1
- 16
3.2
9/64
.140625
3.5719
.0006
.01524
0.009
.00035
- 15.6
- 14
6.8
5/32
.156250
3.9687
.0007
.01778
0.01
.00039
- 15.0
- 12
10.4
11/64
.171875
4.3656
.0008
.02032
0.02
.00079
10
- 12.2
- 10
14
3/16
.187500
4.7625
.0009
.02286
0.03
.00118
15
- 9.4
- 8
17.6
13/64
.203125
5.1594
.001
.0254
0.04
.00157
20
- 6.7
- 6
21.2
7/32
.218750
5.5562
.002
.0508
0.05
.00197
25
- 3.9
- 4
24.8
15/64
.234375
5.9531
.003
.0762
0.06
.00236
30
- 1.1
- 2
28.4
1/4
.250000
6.3500
.004
.1016
0.07
.00276
35
1.7
32
17/64
.265625
6.7469
.005
.1270
0.08
.00315
40
4.4
35.6
9/32
.281250
7.1437
.006
.1524
0.09
.00354
45
7.2
39.2
19/64
.296875
7.5406
.007
.1778
0.10
.00394
50
10.0
42.8
5/16
.312500
7.9375
.008
.2032
0.20
.0078
55
12.8
46.4
21/64
.328125
8.3344
.009
.2286
0.30
.01181
60
15.6
10
50
11/32
.343750
8.7312
.01
.254
0.40
.01575
65
18.3
12
53.6
23/64
.359375
9.1281
.02
.508
0.50
.01969
70
21.1
14
57.2
3/8
.375000
9.5250
.03
.762
0.60
.02362
75
23.9
16
60.8
25/64
.390625
9.9219
.04
1.016
0.70
.02756
80
26.7
18
64.4
13/32
.406250
10.3187
.05
1.270
0.80
.03149
85
29.4
20
68
27/64
.421875
10.7156
.06
1.524
0.90
.03543
90
32.2
22
71.6
7/16
.437500
11.1125
.07
1.778
.03937
95
35.0
24
75.2
29/64
.453125
11.5094
.08
2.032
.07874
100
37.8
26
78.8
15.32
.468750
11.9062
.09
2.286
.11811
105
40.6
28
82.4
31/64
.484375
12.3031
.10
2.540
.15748
110
43.3
30
86
1/2
.500000
12.7000
.20
5.080
.19685
115
46.1
32
89.6
33/64
.515625
13.0969
.30
7.620
.23622
120
48.9
34
93.2
17/32
.53125
13.4937
.40
10.160
.27559
125
51.7
36
96.8
mm
Inches
mm
mm
Inches
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.30
LENGTHS
1 inch = 25.4 mm
Fractions
of inches
Decimals
mm
Inches to mm
Inches
mm
TEMPERATURE
mm to inches
mm
Inches
Fahrenheit to Celsius
F
35/64
.546875
13.8906
0.5
12.70
0.31496
130
54.4
38
100.4
9/16
.562500
14.2875
.6
15.24
.35433
135
57.2
40
104
37/64
.578125
14.6844
.7
17.78
10
.39370
140
60.0
42
107.6
19/32
.593750
15.0812
.8
20.32
11
.43307
145
62.8
44
112.2
39/64
.609375
15.4781
.9
22.86
12
.47244
150
65.6
46
114.8
5/8
.6250
15.8750
25.4
13
.51181
155
68.3
48
118.4
41/64
.640625
16.2719
50.8
14
.55118
160
71.1
50
122
21/32
.656250
16.6687
76.2
15
.59055
165
73.9
52
125.6
43/64
.671875
17.0656
101.6
16
.62992
170
76.7
54
129.2
11/16
.687500
17.4625
127
17
.66929
175
79.4
56
132.8
45/64
.703125
17.8594
152.4
18
.70866
180
82.2
58
136.4
23/32
.718750
18.2562
177.8
19
.74803
185
85.0
60
140
47/64
.734375
18.6531
203.2
20
.78740
190
87.8
62
143.6
.7500
19.05
228.6
21
.82677
195
90.6
64
147.2
49/64
.765625
19.4469
10
254
22
.86614
200
93.3
66
150.8
25/32
.781250
19.8437
11
279.4
23
.90551
205
96.1
68
154.4
51/64
.796875
20.2406
12
304.8
24
.94480
210
98.9
70
158
13/16
.812500
20.6375
13
330.2
25
.98425
212
100.0
75
167
53/64
.828125
21.0344
14
355.6
26
1.02362
215
101.7
80
176
27/32
.843750
21.4312
15
381
27
1.06299
220
104.4
85
185
55/64
.859375
21.8281
16
406.4
28
1.10236
225
107.2
90
194
7/8
.875000
22.2250
17
431.8
29
1.14173
230
110.0
95
203
57/64
.890625
22.6219
18
457.2
30
1.18110
235
112.8
100
212
29/32
.906250
23.0187
19
482.6
31
1.22047
240
115.6
105
221
59/64
.921875
23.4156
20
508
32
1.25984
245
118.3
110
230
15/16
.937500
23.8125
21
533.4
33
1.29921
250
121.1
115
239
61/64
.953125
24.2094
22
558.8
34
1.33858
31/32
.968750
24.6062
23
584.2
34
1.37795
63/64
.984375
25.0031
24
609.6
36
1.41732
1.00
25.40
25
635
37
1.45669
26
660.4
38
1.49606
39
1.53543
40
1.57480
3/4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
Commercial
MF reference
1 633 266 M1
270
Stud lock
1 633 267 M1
510 - 221
Instant Gasket
Retainer
1 633 270 M2
638 - 648
Silicomet
R.T.V. silicone
sealant (clear)
3 405 423 M1
1A01.31
I. Tightening torques
When tightening nuts and bolts, use the
recommended tightening torques as per the charts:
- 1 and 2 : for metric threads,
- 3 and 4 : for inch threads.
When a specific torque is required, it is mentioned in
the text.
Charts 1 and 3 specify the standard tightening torque
values applicable to zinc-plated threaded elements
with standard nuts with coarse or fine thread, with or
without flat washers or lockwashers, and weld nuts
deeper than 0.8 d.
Charts 2 and 4 specify the reduced tightening torque
values applicable to threaded fasteners in assemblies
with self-locking zinc-plated nuts, phosphated nuts or
bolts, shallow nuts and weld nuts shallower than 0.8 d.
These values are applicable to dry assemblies. If the
threads are oiled, reduce the tightening torques.
Note: Read the strength classification on the bolt
head and determine the required torque loading.
Example:
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
1A01.32
Introduction
Chart 1
Tightening torque values: zinc-plated metric threads
Nominal
dimension d.
Strength classification
Strength classification
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max.
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
Min.
1.7
4.1
8
14
35
70
120
260
560
960
1800
3300
1.3
3.1
6
10
25
50
90
200
420
720
1400
2500
Min.
Max.
1
4
8
14
36
72
120
300
600
1000
2100
3600
2.4
5.7
11.5
20
46
96
160
400
800
1300
2800
4800
Chart 2
Reduced tightening torque values: metric threads
Nominal
dimension d.
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
M30
M36
Issue 1
Strength classification
Strength classification
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max.
Min.
Max.
1.4
3.3
6.4
11
28
56
96
210
450
770
1400
2600
1
2.5
4.8
8
20
40
72
160
340
570
1100
2000
1.9
4.6
9.2
16
37
77
130
320
640
1040
2200
3800
February 1995
Min.
1
3
6
12
29
57
100
240
480
800
1700
2900
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Introduction
1A01.33
Chart 3
Tightening torque values: zinc-plated threads in inches
Nominal
dimension d.
Strength classification
Strength classification
Torque Nm
Torque Nm
Max.
#6
#8
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
11/8
1 1/4
1 1/2
2.4
4.4
6.3
15
30
53
86
130
260
460
760
1120
1390
2000
3400
Min.
Max.
1.8
3.4
4.7
11
22
39
64
100
200
350
560
840
1050
1500
2600
3.3
6.3
8.9
22
43
75
120
180
370
660
1060
1600
2200
3200
5400
Min.
2
4
6
16
31
55
90
140
280
490
800
1200
1700
2400
4100
Chart 4
Reduced tightening torque values: zinc-plated threads in inches
Nominal
dimension d.
Strength classification
Strength classification
Couple Nm
Couple Nm
Max.
#6
#8
#10
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
11/8
11/4
1 1/2
1.9
3.5
5
12
24
42
69
104
210
370
610
900
1100
1600
2700
Min.
Max.
1.5
2.7
3.8
8.8
18
31
51
80
160
280
450
670
840
1200
2100
Issue 1
2.6
5
7.1
18
34
60
96
140
300
530
850
1280
1760
2560
4320
Min.
2
3
5
13
25
44
72
110
220
390
640
960
1360
1920
3280
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Contents
2 A01 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE ENGINE AND THE GEARBOX
2 B01 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE GEARBOX AND THE REAR AXLE
2C01 SPLITTING THE TRACTOR BETWEEN THE FRONT SUPPORT AND THE ENGINE
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
2A01.1
CONTENTS
A.
Uncoupling
B.
Recoupling
C.
Service tool
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. Uncoupling
1. Disconnect the two front differential lock (4WD)
control hoses. Plug the pipe connections.
2. Remove the guard and the 4WD drive shaft.
3. Remove the sheet metal panels.
4. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batteries.
5. Remove the hood rear bracket.
6. Disconnect and plug:
- the two Orbitrol steering ram hoses (and mark
their position),
- the two air conditioning connections using plugs
No. 3376935M91 (Section C), (according to option
fitted), and remove the bracket,
- the diesel fuel return hose,
- the two cooler hoses on the 17-bar valve (and
mark their positions),
- the accelerator control on the injection pump,
- the flowmeter harness (if fitted),
- the main wiring harness connections above the
engine,
- the heating hoses (plug the openings to avoid
draining the cooling system completely),
- the 7.5 A and 10 A fuse harness (to release this
harness, slightly loosen the right-hand bar above
the radiator),
- the diesel fuel supply hose.
7. Immobilise the tractor:
- apply the handbrake,
- fit wedges between the frame and the front axle
(Fig. 1).
8. Support the tractor under the gearbox using a
stand.
9. Support the tractor under the sump using a stand.
10. Remove the toolbox and take out the two bolts (1)
from the shock absorbers on the right-hand and lefthand cab supports. Slightly raise the cab and fit
wedges (4-cylinder engine). (See Fig. 2).
1 1 . Loosen the bolts attaching the engine to the
gearbox.
12. Separate the gearbox from the engine.
Note: As a safety measure, remove the front
weights.
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ate
2A01.3
B . Recoupling
Note: Tractors of types 6170 to 6180 from serial
number F058049 onwards and 6190 tractors (pressure-loaded clutch) are equipped with a damper (6)
(Fig. 3B) different from the one fitted on the version
with a spring-loaded clutch (Fig. 3A).
13.Screw two dowels (locally manufactured) in
diametrically opposite positions on the gearbox
(except for 6150 series tractors).
14. Lightly grease the splines on the shaft (7) (Fig. 3A
and 3B) (grease of type GN + Molykote) and slide
the bush (9) onto the shaft as shown in Fig. 3A
(tractor with spring-loaded clutch and spacer
between engine and gearbox).
15. Check that the two locating pins are fitted on the
engine.
Fig. 3A
4 cyl.
co
Issue 2
Fig. 4
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mw'
2A01.4
C . Service tool
3376935M91 - Set of plugs for air conditioning
couplings
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Imo
2E301.1
CONTENTS
A. Uncoupling
B.
Recoupling
C.
Service tool
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. Uncoupling
1. Immobilise the tractor. Apply the handbrake. Fit
wedges between the frame and the axle (Fig. 1).
2.Disconnect the front differential lock (4WD)
control hoses and plug the pipe connections.
3. Remove the guard and the 4WD drive.
4. Remove the sheet metal panels and the exhaust
pipe.
5. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batteries.
6. Remove the hood rear bracket.
7. Disconnect and plug:
the two Orbitrol steering ram hoses (and mark
their position),
- the two air conditioning connections using
plugs No. 3376935M91 (Section C), (according
to option fitted), and remove the bracket,
- the diesel fuel return hose,
- the two cooler hoses on the 17-bar valve (and
mark their positions),
the accelerator control on the injection pump,
the flowmeter harness (if fitted),
the main wiring harness connections above the
engine,
- the diesel fuel supply hose,
- the heating hoses.
8. Plug the openings to avoid draining the cooling
system completely.
9. Drain the oil from the gearbox and the rear axle.
10. Disconnect and plug the following tubes or hoses:
- the power take-off clutch lubricating tube,
- the gearbox lubricating hose,
- the return hose,
- the engine clutch lubricating hose from the
master cylinder to the control valve (pressureloaded type) or to the gearbox (spring-loaded
type).
11. Remove the earth braid from the right-hand cab
support.
12. Remove the right-hand guard protecting the
controls and solenoid valves.
Issue 1
April 1995
13. Disconnect:
- the wire from the radar (Datatronic),
- the harness on the solenoid valve or valves on
the Speedshift or Dynashift unit (according to
version),
- the solenoid valves harness on the right-hand
hydraulic cover (brake and clutch, PTO,
differential lock, 4WD and Hare/Tortoise),
14. Remove the gear and reversing levers (if fitted)
from the selector cover and remove the
harnesses (earth, electrohydraulically controlled
reverse shuttle solenoid valves (according to option), temperature probe (if fitted) and Hare/
Tortoise).
15. Remove the main filter (15 micrometres).
16. Remove the engine clutch lubricating tube
mounted on the lower covers of the centre
housing and on the gearbox.
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
2B01.3
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
B. Recoupling
22. Clean the mating faces on the gearbox and the
rear axle housing.
On the rear axle
23. Position:
- the shaft (1) assembled with the sleeves (2) and
(7) by means of double pins (5) and (6) (for
gearbox without creeper gears) on the drive
gear (3) (Fig. 5a),
- the shaft (1) assembled with the sleeve (2) by
means of the double pin (5) (for gearbox with
creeper gears) on the drive gear (3) (Fig. 5b).
Note: Groove A in the sleeve (2) must be
directed towards the differential ring gear (4)
(Fig. 5).
24. Check that the spring (1) is in place in the power
take-off clutch and that the locating pins (2) are
fitted (Fig. 6).
25. Check that the control finger DD is in the forward
direction (for gearbox with creeper gears) (Fig. 7).
26. Coat the mating face on the axle housing with
Loctite 510 or an equivalent sealing compound.
27. Screw the two guide studs aGn on the housing
(Fig. 6).
a
."-: e
e s,
giv0.....
A .....frW.
_, IMINNI
AMIEU aft
LI ,IV ;=__
A IHIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIPIIRII
Pr1114%. l. Ng
0 0 e 0
,;,;;;;,,.
tri
, MOM
:MINI'
ommo,I
ME Ian
urimmuilipplj.11
J
A
, N.
0 0 0
Fig. 5
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
2B01.5
On the gearbox
28. Replace the 0-rings (1) on the Hare/Tortoise lines
(Fig. 8).
29. Check that the PTO shaft is installed (see section
7 E01). Recouple the tractor between the gearbox
and the rear axle. Tighten the bolts to a torque of
155 to 195 Nm.
30. Lower the cab, fit the bolts on the shock
absorbers (1) (Fig. 3) and tighten them to a torque
of 200 to 270 Nm.
31. Remove the stand.
32. Turn and push the rod (2) in order to engage the
finger in the fork. Tighten the bolt (1) after coating
it with Loctite 241 (Fig. 2).
33. Check that the rod operates correctly. Reconnect
and adjust the creeper gear control cable (see
Section 5H01).
34. Reconnect the controls, harnesses, hoses, tubes
and flexible couplings.
35. Top up the centre housing with oil.
36. Fit the 4WD drive shaft and the guard.
37. Reconnectthe front differential lock control hoses
(4WD).
38. Reconnect the batteries.
39. Reset the reverse shuttle electrohydraulic control
system (if fitted). (See Section 5CO2).
40. Bleed the clutch (see Section 4B01) or the control
valve (Section 4A01), (according to version).
41. Check the hydraulic unions for leaks and the
C. Service tool
3376935M91 - Set of plugs for air conditioning
couplings
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
2C01.1
CONTENTS
A. Uncoupling
B.
Recoupling
C.
Service tool
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. Uncoupling
1. Disconnect the two 4WD front axle control hoses.
2. Remove the guard and the 4WD drive shaft
3. Remove the sheet metal panels and the exhaust
pipe.
4. Disconnect the earth cables only from the batteries.
5. Disconnect and mark the positions of hoses and
flexible connections, as follows:
- the two Orbitrol steering hoses,
- the hose from the cooler on the 17-bar valve,
- the harness for the flowmeter and its three
hoses located to the left of the fuel filter,
- the connectors for the main harness above the
engine,
- the positive cable on the starter,
- the inlet sleeve between the turbocharger (if
fitted) and the air filter,
- the suction pipe between the air filter and the
exhaust pipe (6180 and 6190).
6. Drain the cooling system. Disconnect the lower
and upper hoses from the radiator.
7. Remove the upper attachment on the radiator.
8. Remove the air conditioning compressor and
bracket assembly and tilt it forwards with its two
hoses (according to option fitted).
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
2C01.3
B. Recoupling
C. Service tool
3376935M91 - Set of plugs for air conditioning
couplings
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
3 .
we
ENGINE
Contents
3 A01 GENERAL
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ir
irr
Engine - General
3A01.1
3 A01 General
CONTENTS
A.
Introduction
B.
Main specifications
C. Viscostatic fan
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - General
A. Introduction
The purpose of this section is to provide general information about the engines used for the 6100 range.
For all information on: technical data, adjustments and
removal and fitting procedures, refer to one or other of
the publication listed opposite :
1. Workshop manual for all types of Perkins engines
manufactured for MF tractors, published by Massey
Ferguson under reference 1856562 Ml.
2. Workshop manual specifically for the 1000 series
engines published by Massey Ferguson under the
reference 1646906 Ml.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - General
3A01.3
B. Main specifications
MF 6120
MF 6110
Engine type
Perkins list n
No of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (liter)
Compression ratio
Power at 2200 rpm (kW) (DIN 70020)
Max. torque (Nm)
at engine speed of (rpm)
Idling speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
Max. speed no load (rpm)
Fuel injection pump :
Make and type
Boost control
F.I.P.
Perkins code
Fuel pump code letters
Governor spring position code
Rotation
No 1 cylinder output
Static timing angle (degrees)
Engine position
Engine check angle (degrees)
Pump check angle (degrees)
Static timing piston position (mm)
Injectors :
Make
Code
Holder
Nozzle
Set and reset pressure (atmospheres)
Aspiration system
Mini boost pressure at 2200 rpm
full load
(mm Hg)
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Valve inserts (In / Ex)
Valve angle (degrees - In / Ex)
Valve adjustment (mm - In / Ex)
Engine oil cooler
No of thermostats
Opening temperature
Fan
Piston cooling jets
Oil filters
Fuel filters
MF 6130
4.41
LM 31282
4
101
127
4,06
16:1
52
269
1400
750
2200
2350
4.41
LM 31283
4
101
127
4,06
16:1
58,9
286
1400
750
2200
2350
1004-4TLR
AH 31279
4
100
127
4
16:1
62,6
325
1400
750
2200
2310
CAV DPA
No
3340 F 090 T
2643 C 307
AD
3
Clockwise
W
TDC
280,5
292
Not applicable
CAV DPA
No
3340 F 080 T
2643 C 308
BD
3
Clockwise
W
TDC
280,5
293
N/A
LUCAS DP200
No
8920 A 030 T
2644 C 104
DC
2
Clockwise
W
13
100 before No 1 TDC
No check angle
336,5
N/A
Lucas
HL
2645 A 302
2645 K 602
230
Naturaly aspirated
Lucas
HU
2645 A 302
2645 A 604
220
Naturaly aspirated
Lucas
JK
2645 A 302
2645 A 613
220
Turbo Garret
558
-
Single
Exh
45 / 45
0,20 / 0,45*"5 hot or cold
No
1
82 C
No
1
1
Single
Exh
45 / 45
0,20 / 0,45*.5 hot or cold
No
1
82 C
No
1
1
Issue 2
Double
Yes / Yes
30 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
Yes
1
82CC
Standard
Yes
1
1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - General
MF 6140
Engine type
Perkins list No
No of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (liter)
Compression ratio
1104-4T2
AH 31278
4
100
127
4
16:1
66,2
359
1400
850
2200
2310
MF 6150
1004-4TH R2
AH 31277
4
100
127
4
16:1
69,9
386
1200
850
2200
2310
MF 6160
1006-6H R4
YA 31251
6
100
127
6
16.5:1
73,5
403
1200
850
2200
2310
Lucas DP200
Yes
8920 A 022 T
Lucas DP200
Yes
8920 A 002 T
2644 C 101
BC
2
Clockwise
W
2644 C 102
CC
1
Clockwise
W
13
100 before No 1 TDC
No checking angle
338,5 Locking angle
Not applicable
CAV DPA
No
3369 F 170 T
2643 D 629 / LK
LK
5
Clockwise
Y
22
TDC
326,5
337,5
5,92
CAV
JU
LRB 67014
JB 6801 106
220
Naturaly aspirated
Injectors
Make
Code
Holder
Nozzle
Set andf reset pressure (atmosphere)
Aspiration system
Mini boost pressure at 2200 rpm
full loac
(mm Hg)
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Lucas
NR
2645 L 303
2645 L 614
230
Turbo Garret
Lucas
JY
2645 A 302
2645 A 621
250
Turbo Wastegate
914
21.86
17.67
813
108.34
15.72
Valve spring
Valve inserts (In / Ex)
Valve angle (degrees - In / Ex)
Valve adjustment (mm - In / Ex)
Engine oil cooler
No of thermostats
Opening temperature
Fan
Piston cooling jets
Oil filters
Fuel filters
Double
Yes / Yes
30 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
Yes
1
82 C
Standard
Yes
1
1
Double
Yes / Yes
30 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
Yes
1
82 C
Viscostatic
Yes
1
1
Issue 2
December 1997
Single
No
45 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
No
2
82 C
Viscostatic
No
1
2
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - General
MF 6180
MF 6170
Engine type
Perkins list No
No of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Capacity (liter)
Compression ratio
Power at 2200 rpm (kW) (DIN 70020)
Max. torque (Nm)
at engine speed of (rpm)
Idling speed (rpm)
Nominal speed (rpm)
Max. speed no load (rpm)
Fuel injection pump :
Make and type
Boost control
F.I.P.
Perkins code
Fuel pump code letters
Governor spring position code
Rotation
No 1 cylinder output
Static timing angle (degrees)
Engine position
Engine check angle (degrees)
Pump check angle (degrees)
Static timing piston position (mm)
Injectors
Make
Code
Holder
Nozzle
Set and reset pressure (atmosphere)
Aspiration system
Mini boost pressure at 2200 rpm
full load
(mm Hg)
(Kpa)
(PSI)
Valve spring
Valve inserts (In / Ex)
Valve angle (degrees - In / Ex)
Valve adjustment (mm - In / Ex)
Engine oil cooler
No of thermostats
Opening temperature
Fan
Piston cooling jets
Oil filters
Fuel filters
3A01.5
MF 6190
1006-6HR3
YA 31250
6
100
127
6
16.5/1
78,5
440
1200
850
2200
2310
1006-6TLR2
YB 31265
6
100
127
6
16.0/1
88,3
490
1400
850
2200
2310
1006-6T7
YB 31245
6
100
127
6
16.0/1
95,7
474
1200
850
2200
2350
CAV DPA
No
3369 F 100
2643 D 804
UK
2
Clockwise
Y
17
TDC
325,5
334
3,56
Stanadyne
No
DB 2635 5110
2643 U 608
DL
CAV DPA
No
3363 F 850
2643 D 615 / KK
KK
Clockwise
12
TDC
332
338
Not applicable
7
Clockwise
Y
18
TDC
325
334
3,99
CAV
JU
LRB 67014
JB 6801 106
220
Naturaly aspirated
Stanadyne
NV
2645 L 307
2645 L 616
230
Turbo Garret
CAV
JT
LRB 67032
JB 6801 104
250
Turbo Schwitzer S 2B
508
67,7
9,8
450,04
60
8,7
Single
No
45 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
No
2
82 C
Viscostatic
No
1
2
Single
Yes / Yes
30 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
Yes
2
82 C
Viscostatic
Yes
1
2
Single
No
30 / 45
0,20 / 0,45
Yes
2
82 C
Viscostatic
Yes
1
2
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - General
The speed of the fan varies continually over the whole
regulatory range depending on the temperature.
C. Viscostatic fan
Description
The 1000 series engines can be fitted with a cooling fan
with an Eaton viscous coupling. This device increases
power by 2 to 3hp.
The viscous coupling is made up of three main parts:
-The driving part powered by the engine and composed
of shaft (1) integral with plate (2) with annular grooves.
- The driven part composed of hub (6) on which are
mounted the fan and body (7) also with annular
grooves.
- The regulating part composed of thermostatic spring
(3) controlling valve (4).
The centre of the device has a reservoir (5) filled with a
viscous silicone fluid.
Method of operation
When the temperature of the air going through the
radiator reaches a predetermined value, thermostatic
spring (3) acts on valve (4) which opens orifice a. The
liquid is driven towards the annular grooves on hub (2)
and body (7) by centrifugal force. The torque is transmitted by the internal friction of the very viscous fluid and
its adhesion to the walls. The fan is thus driven, thereby
increasing airflow and overall cooling efficiency.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6100
w
S
iTir
SERIES TRACTORS
"se
3801.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
Service tool
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
10
3801.2
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
3801.3
Spring-loaded clutch
6-cylinder engine (6160)
11.
11114111110"
)1
A
\\ .f.......1% III
.
or
lips;.;,r ----,,,,,,,
.,....
.....0,,
1====
..,.x..,......9, ..7.,
V.
,
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
.-. ".=',
... 4. ".
.,:<.
";*..1.B......._--.f.i-N
Ul
ill'
0 ,-,........1k
IMMI
i
6.%%
0 ilk
is
All
no
kiir.
S
a
a
.....
ILA
Engine flywheel
Flywheel ring gear
Spacer
Bolt
Washer
../....,.. ..N..
.
li:
.4 fC' , 51,,i
!hip
'El
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Shock absorber
Bolt
Bush
Washer
Fig. 1
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
3B01.4
List of parts
Fig. 2
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
3B01.5
6-cylinder engine
Pressure-loaded clutch
6170 to 6180, from serial number F058049, and 6190
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
Engine flywheel
Flywheel ring gear
Bolt
Washer
(6 Shock absorber
(8) Bolt
(11) Ball bearing
Fig. 3
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Removal
1. Uncouple the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox (see Section 2A01).
2. Remove the bolts (8) and washers (5).
3. Remove the shock absorber. If necessary, use a
suitable tool to extract the bearing (11) (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4
Refitting
4. Lightly coat the splines on the shock absorber (6)
with grease of type GN + Molykote and refit it. Coat
the washers and bolts with Loctite 270 and, then, fit
them and tighten them to a torque of between 29
and 37 Nm.
Note: On tractors of types 6170 to 6180, according
to the serial number, and 6190 tractors:
If the bearing (11) (Fig. 4) is removed, it must be
fitted using a suitable fixture pressing on the
bearing's outer housing.
Centre the shock absorber (6) on the flywheel
using service tool 3378112M1 (Fig. 5), with the
longer section of the shock absorber facing the
flywheel (see Fig. 3). Fit the washers (5) and bolts
(8) after coating them with Loctite 270, and tighten
them to a torque of between 40 and 56 Nm.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
3801.7
Refitting
4. Screw the two guide studs into the flywheel
attachment holes on the crankshaft.
5. Refitthe engine flywheel with the bush (3) (according
to the type). Take out the guide studs. Lightly coat
the bolts with Loctite 270 and tighten them a torque
of between 110 and 140 Nm.
Refit
and centre the shock absorber (6). Fit the
6.
washers (5). Lightly coat the bolts (8) with Lotite 270
and tighten them a torque of between 29 and 37 Nm.
On tractors 6170 to 6190, see Part A, operation 4.
D . Service tool
Tool available through MF network
3378112M1 - Shock absorber centring tool (Fig. 7)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Motor
Spacers
use
3C01.1
CONTENTS
A.
B.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Motor - Spacers
Refitting
Tightening torque
(1) to (15) = 100 to 130 Nm
Length of studs
(3)
= 145
55) (S) = 155
(6) (7) = 130
Fig. 1
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Motor - Spacers
B. Spacer (6 cyl. engine)
Ave
3C01.3
Refitting
7. Clean the mating faces on the spacer and gearbox.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
i
!fr
Engine - Spacer
ale
3CO2.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
Service tool
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - Spacer
General
6100 series tractors fitted with the pressure-loaded
clutch are equipped with a spacer (16) mounted
between the engine and the gearbox.
This spacer acts as a partition between the engine
flywheel and the wet clutch. Tight sealing is provided by
a lip seal.
The contact face of the spacer against the gearbox is
coated with Loctite 510.
Note: On 6170 - 6180 series tractors as from serial
number F058049 and on 6190 series tractors: fitting
of an input shaft (7) (Fig. 2) centred in the
crankshaft.
Fig. 1
Disassembly
1 . Split the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox (Section 2 A01).
2. Drain the oil from the gearbox.
3. Remove two attaching bolts from the spacer and
screw two guide studs in their place, diametrically
opposite on the gearbox.
4. Remove the remaining bolts. Place the protector
3378012M1 ( C) on the input shaft. Detach and
remove the spacer.
Reassembly
5. Clean the mating faces on the spacer and gearbox.
6. Smear the mating face on the gearbox with Loctite
510 or equivalent.
7. Position the locating pins.
8. Screw two guide studs on the gearbox.
9. Position the protector on the input shaft.
10. Check that the shims (9) are installed (Fig. 1).
Issue 2
Refitting
15. Clean the seating for the seal on the spacer.
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine - Spacer
*'
3CO2.3
C . Service tool
Tool supplied by the MF network
3378012M1 - Oil seal protector
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
APY
Ine
4 . CLUTCH
Contents
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch - Pressure-loaded
4A01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Service tools
H.
Speedshift version
Issue 2
10
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
General
Description
The new engine clutch system of the pressure-loaded type
fitted on tractors in series 6170 to 6190 is of the oil bath
multiple-disc type.
The system's construction and operating principle are
identical to those of the system fitted on 8100 tractors.
The hydraulic clutch which transmits movement is similar to
a PTO clutch but on a larger scale.
This clutch is controlled by a hydraulic valve fitted on the righthand side of the gearbox which is, itself, operated by the
clutch master cylinder.
To avoid problems with reliability, the oil used for this clutch
must, imperatively, comply with standard MF M1143 or
M1144.
Compared with the dry clutch, the wet clutch (oil bath) has the
following advantages:
- enhanced reliability and longer service life,
- smaller load on pedal.
Construction
The wet clutch assembly is installed between the engine
flywheel and the primary shaft of the Dynashift gearbox.
The input shaft (7) crosses through the spacer (16) which
separates the engine flywheel from the transmission oil. The
shaft (7) is constantly meshed with the fixed hub on the
engine flywheel.
It rotates with the clutch housing (23) through splining. The
clutch housing is equipped with friction plates (45) and the
piston (46) moves inside it.
The drive hub (37) comprising discs (44) is engaged on the
primary shaft (33).
List of parts
(1) 0-ring
(2) Anti-extrusion rings
(3) Splined ring
(4) Locking ring
(5) Bolt
(6) Washer
(7) Input shaft
(8) Seal
(9) Shim (s)
(10) Pipe
(11) Pump cover
(12) Pump body
(13) Dynashift cover
(14) 0-ring
(15) 0-rings
(16) Spacer
(17) Pipe
(18) Bolt
(19) Flange
(20) Pipe
Issue 2
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
TiW
Spacer housing
Bolt
Clutch housing
Dowel
Flange
Bolt
Dust guard
0-ring
0-ring
Suction unit
Bolt
PTO shaft
Primary shaft
Circlip
Washer
Bearing
Drive hub
Bolt
Cover
Bearing
Support
Operation
Clutch engagement
When the clutch pedal is released, the hydraulic valve located
on the right-hand side of the gearbox supplies a 17-bar
pressure which moves the piston (46) which, in turn, presses
the plates (45) against the discs (44) and the progressivity
washer (77) in order to drive the primary shaft (33).
The valve controls the smooth action of clutch engagement
and modulates the pressure applied on the piston. The
washer (77) ensures the progressivity of the clutch.
Clutch release
When pressure is no longer applied, the piston (46) is pushed
back by the spring (42) and the plates (45) are no longer in
contact with the discs and the washer (77) is released.
The lubricating and cooling flowrate for the discs is cut off in
the released position in order to avoid driving the discs by the
odrag effect. For the same reason, the discs have a bulged
face to allow easier disengagement.
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
Spring
Circlip
Discs
Plates
Piston
Clutch assembly
Seal
Seal
Bearing
Bush
Oil seals
Lubricating pump
Bolt
Bearing
Circlip
Oil seal
Circlip
Circlip
Bolt
Cover
Strainer
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(78)
0-ring
Union
Pipe
Union
Diagnostic
connector
Valve, 1.5 bar
0-ring
Pipe
0-ring
Union
Clutch supply pipe
Plug
Bolt
Dynashift supply
pipe
Progressivity
washer
Spacers
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AP-
Clutch - Pressure-loaded
Overall view
SPEEDSHIFT
F
6170 - 6180
As from serial No F058049
and 6190
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
Explosed view
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
4A01.5
Removal
Remova I
15. Remove the pipes (73) and (76), detach the cover
(61), remove the flange (19) and the pipe (17).
1 6. Remove the clutch assembly (47) using a locally
manufactured tool (Fig. 2).
1 7. Remove the PTO shaft (32).
Refitting
6. Fit the oil seal (57) with a suitable fixture.
7. Place the 0-ring (1) between bushes (2). Reinstall
the splined bush (3). Replace the circlip (58) and
position it correctly in the recess.
8. Check that the shims (9) are in place.
Refitting
1 8. Replace 0-rings (14) and (69).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch - Pressure-loaded
1117 AV-7
IBM
01/
'
0:01,
30. Fit the pipe (17), the flange (19) and the cover (61).
Tighten bolts (31) to between 200 and 260 Nm.
31. Tighten bolts (38) to between 41 and 53 Nm and
bolts (26).
32. Reconnect the pipes on the unions (73) and (76).
Disassembly
Nota : An input shaft (7) with its end supported by
a bearing fitted in the crankshaft has been
introduced on tractors 6170 - 6180 as from serial
number F058049 following the fitting of the LUK
damper (see section engine flywheel 3801) and on
6190 tractors.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
4A01.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch - Pressure-loaded
71. Refit the pump cover (11). Fit the bearing (55).
Position the circlip (56). Tighten the bolts (54) to a
torque of 25 to 35 Nm.
72. Fit 0-ring (1) and bushes (2). Repeat procedure 7.
Refitting
76. Fit the support and the valve. Tighten the bolts:
- (5): 25 to 35 Nm,
- (7): 50 to 70 Nm.
77. Reconnect the pipes, hose and connectors.
78. Bleed the clutch control valve (see Part E).
Removal
Fig. 6
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
4A01.9
85. Loosen the bleed screw and slowly press the clutch
pedal.
86.Check the adjustment of the clutch pedal (see
Part F).
87. Carry out a road test.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
4A01.10
Pressure-loaded
88. With the clutch pedal (1) at the stop (2), adjust in
order to obtain a clearance of 0.5 to 1 mm between
the push-rod (3) and the master cylinder piston.
Tighten the locknut (4) to a torque of 15 to 20 Nm.
89. Check that the pedal operates freely.
zz-
!Int'
:rre
G. Service tools
.
:
--,Y\
e7
80
23
\\\
\\
'
100
\4
165
248
286
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Clutch
Pressure-loaded
4A01.11
Special points
The sealed side of the bearings (36) and (40) faces the
Speedshift:
- on cover (76) align the connection holes between the
clutch and the gearbox housing.
- tighten the bolts (77) to between 25 and 35 Nm,
- C: with 0-ring,
- pipe (73) (clutch supply) (Fig. 11).
Fig. 12
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4801.1
CONTENTS
A.
B.
C.
General
D.
10
E.
10
F.
Service tools
11
G.
Speedshift version
12
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The 6100 Series tractors with not exceding than 100 HP are fitted with
an oil-bathed multi-disc spring loaded clutch (Belleville springs).
This system has the following advantages:
- Improved reliability
- good progressivity
- possibility of hauling a trailer
- no swivelling joints
The clutch is moved by Belleville springs. This mechanical action
permits the clutch to remain engaged, even when the engine is
stopped and there is no hydraulic pressure.
The hydraulic pressure is only used to disengage the clutch. Given
that this pressure is generated directly by the clutch master cylinder,
the clutch can be disengaged even when the engine is stopped.
Construction
The wet clutch is set between the flywheel and the Speedshift or
Engagement
When the pedal is released, the housing (39) moves forward and
comes into contact with the discs. The contact between the discs and
the intermediate plates is absorbed by the progressive washer (6).
The clutch can then transmit a low drive ensuring the progressivity of
the engagement. The entire engagement is carried out by the two
Belleville springs (4).
Issue 2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(67)
(72)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
'0' Ring
Housing
'0' Rings
Belleville spring
Screw
Progressive washer
Input shaft
'0' Ring
Cover
Tube
Pump cover
Stud
Cover
'0' Ring
'0' Ring
'0' Ring
Tube
Screw
Flange
Tube
Spacer
Screw
Clutch cover
Lock pin
Flange
Screw
Dust guard
'0' Ring
'0' Ring
Suction block
Screw
PTO shaft
Primary shaft
Circlip
Washer
Roller bearing
Driving hub
Screw
Housing
Roller bearing
Pressure plate
Tube
Circlip
Discs
Intermediate plates
Release bearing
Clutch assembly
Quadring seal
Quadring seal
Nut
Tube
Shims
Lubrication pump
Screw
Roller bearing
Fitting
Oil seal
Grommet
Spacer
Screw
Cover
Strainer
'0' Ring
Fitting
Tube
Bleeding port
Fitting
Plug
Screw
Dynashift feed tube
Screw
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4B01.3
General view
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Emission 1
Fevrier 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
4801.5
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW'
4801.6
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
iTr
4B01.7
Refitting
12. Refitting the PTO shaft (if it had been removed).
13. Replace the 0-rings (3) (8) (14) (29).
14. Refitting the tube (42) (Fig. 4).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Refitting
On the clutch cover
Fig. 8
(41).
ED
1000 daN
0 0
111
, Ariw
\N.
Asi%
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4E301.9
On the casing
56.Clean and check the parts, replacing any which may
be defective.
57.Check that the grooves in the housing (2) are not
blocked.
Izet..........
neunrArAirouralm
h
il711:111,1
IR Ill
\IIIIIRk 1
--%,..13-
si h,
mx :ki
:"., _ _ 7
. zz
: i:
sI ]i
ktk
lI
I
i 1.5
...1..:''''''
,wilm
Nel'-'411
vo;
Ma
rligoe,
gatl
i
(41).
67. Mount the input shaft in the housing (2). Place the
0-ring and the protector (No. 3378052M1) (1).
Mount the cover (9) with its oil seal (57).
Torqu screws (54) to 10 -14 Nm with a torque
wrench.
Fig. 12
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4B01.11
F. Service tools
1. Tools available through the MF Network
3378052M1 - Protector (Fig.17).
3378053M1 - Progressive washer compression tool
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Points of interest
The sealed side of the bearings (36) (40) must face the
Speedshift.
Align holes providing for communication between clutch
and transmission case on clutch cover (13) .
- Tighten the screws (77) to 25 - 35 Nm.
- Place an 0 ring on C
- Apply Loctite 510 on D
- Cover (61), Speedshift version (Fig. 19)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
I0
5 . GEARBOX
Contents
STANDARD GEARBOX
5A01
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
5A02
MAIN GEARBOX
5B01
INPUT UNIT
5B02
SPEEDSHIFT
5B03
DYNASHIFT
5B03
DYNASHIFT
5B04
REVERSE SHUTTLE
5B04
REVERSE SHUTTLE
5C01
SELECTOR COVER
ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL
5C01
SELECTOR COVER
ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL
5CO2
SELECTOR COVER
MECHANICAL CONTROL
5CO2
SELECTOR COVER
MECHANICAL CONTROL
5D01
5D01
5E01
OUTPUT SHAFT
5E02
OUTPUT SHAFT
5F01
LAYSHAFT
5F02
LAYSHAFT
5G01
MAINSHAFT
5G02
MAINSHAFT
5H01
CREEPER GEARS
5H01
CREEPER GEARS
5H02
5H02
s
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
i
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
Gearbox
Transmission assembly
5A01.1
CONTENTS
A. Description
B.
Gearbox assembly
C.
Main gearbox
D.
E.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox
Transmission assembly
A. General description
6100 series tractors are equipped with a transmission
consisting of five main housings:
- the gearbox assembly which also serves as a clutch
housing;
- the centre housing which includes the differential
assembly, the power take-off line and the 4WD
clutch, and which also holds the side hydraulic
covers;
- the right and left hand axle housings;
- the lift cover.
These five parts are common to the whole range of
tractors. Models fitted with 6-cylinder engines are
equipped with an adaptor plate located between the
engine and the gearbox.
Clutch
The clutch is of the wet type and is either spring-loaded
(tractors in series 6110 to 6160) or pressure-loaded
(tractors in series 6170 to 6190).
The clutch lubrication is ensured by a pump which inlet
is connected to the centre housing via a 500 micron
strainer and a tube fitted under the transmission and a
second tube connected to the clutch.
A shaft driven by the engine clutch input shaft passes
through the gearbox assembly and transmits rotation to
the power take-off clutch.
The power take-off clutch unit drives the hydraulic
pump driving gear.
B. Gearbox assembly
Main gearbox
The main gearbox has eight basic speeds. It consists of
a train of four gears to which a set of two gears is added
so that a slow range (Tortoise) and a fast range (Hare)
can be obtained.
All the gears are in constant mesh and the speeds are
selected by synchromesh units. These eight speeds
can be selected with a single lever.
Speedshift
In addition to the main box and to the reverse gear
assembly, a hydraulic device with an epicyclic gear train
located to the front of the reversing gear and operated
by a solenoid valve provides another two input speeds,
so increasing the possible number of speeds to 16.
Dynashift
As an alternative to the Speedshift version, the
Dynashift allows four extra input ratios to be added on
the main box, bringing the possible number of speeds
up to 32. This function is provided by a hydraulically
operated system with two epicyclic gear trains and two
hydraulic pressure-loaded clutches.
Creeper gear unit
A range of greatly reduced tractor speeds can be
obtained by means of a unit fitted on the output shaft,
to the rear of the main box.
This unit consists of an epicyclic-type reduction gear
with a mechanically driven ratio of 4:1, and which
should be engaged only if the main box is in the slow
position (Tortoise).
Lubrication
Lubrication is ensured by means of the 1.5 bar valve
located on the left-hand side of the gearbox. The oil flow
circulates through the Speedshift or Dynashift
assembly, the reverse shuttle and the layshaft bearings
as well as in the gears, bearings and bushes of the
mainshaft and output shaft.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6700 SERIES TRACTORS
Transmission assembly
5A01.3
(Longitudinal section)
f/A
1
. .7
" " '
. 1
VINO. NA. N
AA*
Issue 1
,oft-4
February 1995
. el A
" l": " ":" 1 /1
.###
IIs:t_
' 1r
i
it, .4 "At
ii
r
fr---
A.'
, ..
www.maskinisten.net
aye
5A01.4
C. Main gearbox
General
The gearbox housing comprises the following major
components, in this order:
- the engine clutch operating device,
- the input unit containing the Speedshift or Dynashift
and the reverse shuttle,
- the main gearbox,
- the creeper gear unit (if fitted).
Construction
The main gearbox has four synchromesh speeds. The
initial four speeds can be doubled to obtain the basic
eight speeds by means of a gear fitted to rotate freely
on the output shaft and which can be locked to the shaft
by the coupler. The main shaft and the layshaft are
supported by taper roller bearings. The output shaft is
fitted in two taper roller bearings and one needle roller
bearing. All the gears are helical and in constant mesh.
The lubricating oil for the lower shafting comes from the
front housing and passes through an oilway drilled
along the centreline of the mainshaft and the output
shaft. Radial oilways direct oil to the various lubrication
points of the gears, bearings and synchromesh devices.
The top shafts are lubricated by the film of oil circulating
between the PTO shaft and the layshaft. This film
lubricates the end taper roller bearings and the needle
roller bearings (62). Radial oilways drilled in the shaft
(54) and radial grooves on the driven gears provide an
oil flow between all the gears. The contact area
between the teeth on the shaft (54) and the gear (36)
is also lubricated by a radial hole drilled in the shaft. To
ensure correct operation, according to the loads placed
on the transmission, the bearings are fitted preloaded in
the case of the mainshaft or with end float in the case
of the layshaft. The output shaft can be shimmed with
either a small amount of play or a slight preload.
Operation
Low range (Tortoise)
A speed in the Tortoise range is engaged when one of
the couplers of the synchromesh devices (11) or (23) is
moved to couple the mainshaft (69) in rotation with one
of the four free-running gears. Whatever speed is.
selected, the motion is transmitted to the layshaft (54).
The output shaft (44) is driven by the machined teeth on
the layshaft which are in constant mesh with the idler
gear (36) fitted on the output shaft by moving the
coupler of the synchromesh device (31) rearwards.
High range (Hare)
This range is selected when the coupler of the
synchromesh device (31) is moved forwards. This
places the driving gear (29) in direct mesh with the
output shaft. As a result, the layshaft (54) remains nonfonctional in 3rd gear. The other speeds are obtained by
movement of the couplers of the synchromesh devices
(11) or (23), in the same way as for the Tortoise range.
The motion is transmitted to the output shaft (44) by the
driven gears (55) and (29).
Description
The main gearbox drive is provided by the input gear
(67) which is in constant mesh with the rear gear of the
reverse shuttle.
The input gear (67) is fitted on the main shaft (69) by
means of splines.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
APT
5A01.5
Vir
NI
117
NaL
lall
,1,11E-ri4-15
,V,.
-4,7
Ltiov...VNI
lik fio.m
it..
IN-
'
:
hi
erc yl
,
, t.ior'
,I,
tiAr
4,1,4
t Nw !
iw
1" 1
0117. ..
A, lo.e.-Arf
..."'' 4
Ate
4.\\ '
AWA
AA.,Ni
.
Frivir
:
;...+
8
d
N
111
1
,
- ---, Air oni
.,.. ,,Na
_weA..74
14461
_
.4kikmi
_ ,4442-air
...,_
_A=mm
W- \k
ito
,,, .ir
_.........
10' .._ ,oor
wr
..- .....,
igiw
OrAW4
,Ali40"
z4" r
%%CI'
1
1.41
. \
..
-,,
,,,,..7, 77,,
-4,,, .fter.." Ar
. 0. - -
417Fwzdi
, 0 1. -,.
---A
1% .,&1/4',1/41/4,-..1/4,11/41/4. -r, AY
4 rg A 0 FO
ter."5s.
k.
(di
/
-1
40.%k
iglAil.*
....-1.=..._:..._ __ lib_ 0, _ _,. . .
7 z . =4r .
5.._
re:" .
4
.N"awitati-_,
il
-,J1-,j7 . .;,=__,
.40.11111KN1/4 NV
%N. , rillir
b
:_l
N:r--1ir , _0..........
`14.,...W.../.....
lh. 4:.1111:
, ArrAfr,,, 1.---..m.
EliL
iiffillyir
12---W.
A
.x.
10101
OmA
'
:'"' 7
$0,
..-
.--20;i-dei!.
-fr-41r.f7
s ,--'''
-ir --:
111111111
ido
pl .....,..,..,..
r
I. ..r:
....=
1111i
_,__
La=1=1=1=11:1=4=11,
.....
- --.m,
...-7
IMIVAPArAr4"---01
. . _. . . . . ......,..
214/
1 /
6.,..A
.-;L._*-1,... _,j
1,b, womi!iim-,
.. , dig
!-
-" 1- liir
-t" 411
A....6
labl
RI
4.
_
n
awri
Mr
41Wv
.
N,
,.,,,,....-,,7,-_
,.,:.,1
;-- 411.1
rAzm.
,1411' 1i:4..,
4 rez,;,1 ,,.,,,. Ii=1=
r
s."'s........"" " Ar,,.
N N\..,
1:111".: ''.."..
/ 1.1:. P444:
..--..-.0-
I.
:f02'10
'6' oe, s.`
r
r" frpSloN
,.074.17711
iim.,
4r
.1
. \ \,_
P4
AN
_../
\ MI.
.
.1
.:
:.
..
. N.4,
1!
.:,
It . . .7..
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
..
.,:
j
%1,10
.
.41....._... N, 12 "- INk N.. \MI\ V NN
Pr
February 1995
,,
A_
; Aror As......1mii
!X\.\.....:216
zb.....
:407
.........
=1.
..`.
. X\
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Ate
Gearbox
Transmission assembly
5A01.7
J o 0,50/0,701
M10
7CD. 45-60 Nm
lar.31-35 Nm I
liar M8
2S-37 Nm
Aryr
0 AI/
111%,
*
dr
A 'N
04....
.,......,,,
..
*****
Neeliiir ., 411
mom.
(4/,
''
N
'--"t , 1.111$'
.:
.11rWrt
"
I
irr -.'' d
nok"..r,,,
il .:
11V4,! egt,:l V
-7
, VIM'
,1A10,*11.
r...7,1...
r...,...7...,,. _4'24,-",,,,,
,
M.5.,%.*IT
,,,,,.,%
,-...! ,,,,,
".'""
N'N,NNNNNNNO.0.,,,,NNNNNNNN.
IITEK44
4' 4.t
/A-,FN
Mi
....'.
.1
,.e
/7%,
Iiree'r'"ZiNSX
.V7Ick
rti141/1
Z/
Ac. 1
tr=i
I Al
,:.,.,7 1.\.- i
%.,_ ,
All 11
1= 0'8
. ", dro, = 1
i
llr:7
4
iir
.
d'Arare
, A
" , ,12
i
\
N
..."'
r",
4 ''S
i.... s
la, 130-170 Nm
var 200-260 Nm
(MI 270
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
voirJ
7 1 7 t17::
k1-:
tL
;
:71
",;:,:
,e0:,b7.11r ,,;1.1"1.1,.1.14,6 -N74
. . T-'"" *
iNx.
J = 0,20/0,40
www.maskinisten.net
ail
241 I
II.
M8
25-35 Nm
IP. 50-r740Nm
'Or 72-96 Nm
25-35
Nm
.1 r 0,05/0.20
F = 7,35/7.55
J 0/0,25
lirP. 25-35 Nm
MOM
vats 14-20 Nm
tipar
J r 0.04/0.12
25-32 Nm
, 41
-
-4
II
I
242
AV/
min
Al%
40.,\
Abri,,,
11111
4.1
1
"vor / / ///
ror pr
e
. i
7,0
1%. "`k
?7;!- .011110.7P'
A MAis .
L.
41;=:
Ntk
J/P 0,05
11111.
ht
,A
1
.1
Sr
\ 400-27S,I
:111111,
.
k,,-te, /
Lif
w
A
NW!.
AK
viIn
i
do
;50,
4's
''Eq.i.o
, Nte.
Nks
.310. 29-37 Nm
1/4
iii
toA4
14w,
vire 27-32 Nm
.20. 2.2-3,0 Nm
IP.130-170 Nm
"Or 25-35 Nm
yar200-260 Nm
Issue 2
CD 10-14 Nm
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
P 0.14/0.20
J = 0.20/0.40
www.maskinisten.net
Ai
AV
5A02
5A02.1
Main gearbox
CONTENTS
General
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
A heavy duty gearbox has been introduced as from the
following serial numbers:
- F008020 on 6170 tractors, France,
- F008029 on 6180 tractors, France.
Subsequent introduction for other countries.
The main improvements provided by the new gearbox
are reinforced gears and the introduction of dual-cone
synchronisers.
The design of the heavy duty gearbox is identical to that
of the main gearbox (see Section 5A01).
This gearbox can be equipped with a Dynashift or
Speedshift input unit and with a standard creeper
gearbox (according to option).
The operation and principle of the gears remain similar
to those of the standard gearbox.
Depending on the load exerted on the Hare / Tortoise
synchroniser, the splines in the synchro hub are
lubricated by means of a radial bore in the output shaft.
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(14)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(23)
(24)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(35)
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Splined washers
1st drive gear
Bush
1st and 2nd gear dual-cone synchro
2nd drive gear
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
4th drive gear
3rd and 4th gear dual-cone synchro
Needle-roller bearing
Circlip
Washer
Needle-roller bearing
3rd drive gear (Hare)
Needle-roller bearing
Hare / Tortoise dual-cone synchro
Washer
Bush
Issue 2
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
(71)
(72)
(77)
(78)
(79)
(80)
(81)
(82)
Tortoise gear
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Bearing cone
Bearing cone
Bolt
Shim(s)
Thickness shim
Output shaft
Circlip
Lock plate
Bearing cup
Circlip
Deflector
Shim(s)
Cup
Bearing cone
Layshaft
3rd driven gear
4th driven gear
Spacer
Shim(s)
2nd driven gear
1st driven gear
Circlip
Needle-roller bearing
Bearing cone
Cup
Gearbox housing
Reverse gear housing
Input gear
Nut
Mainshaft
Retaining ring
Oil feed pipe
Spring
Washer with flats
Tab washer
Needle-roller bearing
Spacer
Needle-roller bearing
Spacer
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5A02.3
0 0 00000000000000000000
dr
vor ,
ail,A0Vftre
i"" .';'W
1411.
MEM.
iiiiiiiiiiiia.alTIP
AV ArM:MwAr Ar
ic*44,
Ay AWArrAr AI ,-;or
WILFITM
A
N
th
i
ra
fi
,.
z.7 , - 7- - -
KN E
r V
Sarr
N
6
-2
'4 /LtIm-p-,
"" 1%N l
eli
dfriA
1
11A \lb),
I-3...44C1;.
1
Art'.1
- \ EVA'
dP Ar
r
r
Au
AGM/
frze ,ffe,
...viii_
4 EI
qv
Id PA)
=NI
1.1
V
A;
e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
Ar
4r /'
Ar ATV Ar
4.1010221v
0 0 000
4#/
000
www.maskinisten.net
=0'
5A02.4
Issue 2
Ar
December 1997
al, 270
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Joe
5B01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
Removal
B.
Refitting
C.
Service tool
D.
Speedshift version
Issue 2
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AP-
General
The input unit is in the form of an interchangeable
module fitted at the input end of the gearbox. It is made
up of two completely separate parts: the Speedshift or
Dynashift unit and the reverse shuttle. The input unit
transmits the motion to the transmission via the wet
clutch.
The Speedshift: This is an independent function which
allows the input speed on the main unit to be doubled.
It is located on the front of the input unit and comprises
a hydraulic pressure-loaded clutch linked to an epicyclic
reduction unit. For its operation, see Section 5 B02.
The Dynashift: This is an independent device which
allows four ratios to be selected while running, without
declutching, using a lever located under the steering
wheel. The Dynashift assembly is secured to the front
of the input unit. It is a hydraulically controlled gear
change device providing for ratios on input to the
gearbox.
This function is ensured by two epicyclic gear trains
associated with two hydraulic pressure-loaded
clutches. For its operation, see Section 5 B03.
The reverse shuttle: This is housed in the enclosure to
the rear of the input gearbox and consists of a set of two
gears operated via a synchromesh mechanism. A pair
of idler gears allows the direction of rotation to be
reversed. For its operation, see Section 5 B04.
A. Removal
When the input gearbox is replaced, the layshaft
shimming must be adjusted.
To allow the bearings to be shimmed correctly, the
gearbox must be removed from the tractor.
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle, see Section 2 B01.
2. Remove the selector cover, see Section 5 CO1 or
5 CO2 according to the version.
3. Separate the gearbox from the engine, see Section
2 A01.
4. Remove the reverse shuttle, see Section 5 B04.
5. Remove the wet clutch, see Section 4 A01 or 4 B01
according to the version, and use the type of sling
suitable for the input unit (Fig. 1 or 8) with bolts "A"
of the correct length. Remove the PTO shaft.
6. Remove the eight bolts (30) (Fig. 2). Do not remove
the bolts (66) with a dimension of 13 mm across
flats.
Issue 2
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5E301.3
B. Refitting
C. Service tools
1. Tools available through MF network
3376883M1 - Sling for front unit (Fig. 5)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
Gearbox
5801.4
Input unit
2500
5, 07
/
/
Issue 2
75
75
75
180
80
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Gearbox
Input unit
no
5801.5
D. Speedshift version
On Speedshift version input units, use sling
3376883M1 (Fig. 8) when removing them. The
operating procedure is identical to that for the Dynashift
version.
Special points
Before removing the unit, check that the bolts "A"
(Fig. 8) are of the required length and are properly
tightened.
When the sling has been removed, fit the original bolts
"A" after coating them with Loctite 542.
Refit the housing supporting the clutch (see Sections
4 A01 Part H and 4 B01 Part G).
Issue 2
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
PT
Ine
Gearbox - Speedshift
5802.1
5 B02 Speedshift
CONTENTS
General
- Operation
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
10
I.
10
J.
11
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
5B02.2
Gearbox - Speedshift
General
The Speedshift unit is mounted at the front of the gearbox
input . It is a hydraulically operated gearchange device which
provides two different input ratios to the main gearbox. It does
this by means of:
- a multidisc hydraulic clutch,
- an epicylic gear train consisting of a planetary carrier with
three twin planetary gears, an input sun gear and an output
sun gear,
- a system for braking the planetary carrier hydraulically.
The design of the Speedshift allows the ratios to be changed
on the move, even under full load, without declutching.
Different versions
The following versions can be obtained as a function of the
number of teeth on sun gears /6% and /7\ and the order in
which they are fitted:
- 30 km/h or 40 km/h version (Fig.1)
- version with super creeper gears (Fig.2).
Fig. 1
Operation
30 Kph and super creeper version : stepdown
40 Kph version : stepup (Fig. 3)
In this mode (Fig. 3), there is no supply to the hydraulic
components and the Speedshift operates as a purely
mechanical transmission . Oil in chamber of pistons (28) and
(48) returns to the housing via the gallery C and the solenoid.
The drive from the hollow primary shaft (36) is transmitted to
the input sun gear rAby the splines which secure the gearto
the shaft. Sun gear /-A drives the compound planetary gears
/12\ which are mounted to rotate freely on spindles /8\.
Theplanetary gears in turn drive the output sun gear /6A,
which is splined to the hollow secondary shaft (5), in one of
the following ratios: 30 km/h 1.26 stepdown - 40 km/h 1.26
stepup - super creeper 7.8 stepdown. Since no hydraulic
pressure is applied, the planetary carrier assembly (50) is
locked against rotation by a Belleville spring disc (18) which
applies pressure to pressure plate (20) and thus stops disc
(21) from turning, the latter being locked to the planetary
carrier assembly in rotation by splines.
List of parts
(1) 0-ring
(2) 0-ring
(3) Bolt
(4) Bush
(5) Secondary shaft
/6\ Output sun gear
/7\ Input sun gear
/8\ Planetary gear spindles
/9\ Planetary carrier cover
(10) Thrust washer
(11) Needle-roller bearing
/12\ Compound planetary
gears
Issue 1
(13) Housing
(14) Spacer
(15) Hub
(16) Needle-roller bearing
(17) Thrust washer
(18) Belleville spring disc
(19) 0-ring
(20) Pressure plate
(21) Disc
(22) 0-ring
(23) 0-ring
(24) Bolt
/25\ Hydraulic cover
(26) 0-ring
February 1995
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
Spring washer
Pressure plate
Disc
Spring washer
Pressure plate
Piston
Bolt
(50) Planetary carrier assembly
(51) O'ring
(40) Ball
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me'
Gearbox - Speedshift
5802.3
.31
NI.4401
11101~11WIMmirAr
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
plates (41), (44), (47) and the discs (42), (45) which are
driven by hub (15). Since the pressure plates are
secured to the planetary carrier by three lugs, drive is
transmitted from the primary input shaft (36) to the hub
(15) and from there to the clutch assembly which
transmits it to the planetary carrier (50). The primary
shaft (36) and the planetary gear and sun gear assembly
turn at the same speed as the secondary shaft (5) thus
giving direct transmission in the ratio of 1/1.
`
..maumigeir4
zymmtemorz:A
Nworr
Are
v.
II\
1140,,
\si I
\41
o,
Issue 1
February 1995
-1
1111L-
rlaw4,
Aviv A
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
Issue 1
'se
5802.5
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
vAr
(50).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
5802.7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5802.8
Gearbox - Speedshift
32. Fit the 39 tooth sun gear /6\ into the planetary
carrier cover (Fig.12).
40 km/h version
33. Fit the 36 tooth sun gear /7\ into the planetary
carrier cover (Fig.12).
Super creeper version
34. Fit the 39 tooth sun gear /6\ into the planetary
carrier cover (Fig.12).
N.B. : In all versions, fit the gear so that the
lubricating grooves in it are facing towards face
F of the planetary carrier cover (Fig.12).
35. Fit a needle-roller bearing (11), a spacer (14) and a
needle-roller bearing (16) into a planetary gear/12V
36. Fit an assembled planetary gear into the cover, with
the following gears closer to face F in the respective cases (Fig.13) :
- 21 tooth : 30 km/h version
-18 tooth : 40 km/h version
- 27 tooth : super creeper version.
N.B. : The planetary gear is marked with three
punch marks made in a single face. Each punch
mark indicates two teeth which line up.
In the case of the 40 km/h version, mark the
unpunched face with three paint lines in the
same positions as the punch marks made in the
factory.
37. Fit washers (10) and (17).
38. Line up the planetary gear and washers with a
locating rod made up locally : diameter = 16 mm,
length = 80 mm (Fig.13).
39. Insert spindle /8\ into the unobstructed bore in face
F and drive it home with a mallet until it is slightly
recessed below the face (Fig.14).
N.B. : The oilway opening onto the circumference of spindle /81 must face outwards.
The oilway opening onto the endface of spindle
/81 must face towards face F of the planetary
carrier cover (Fig.13).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
NW
5802.9
42. Clean and check the parts and replace any which
are faulty.
43. Make sure that the three openings into the 17 bar
passage in the hydraulic cover /25\ are not blocked
(Fig. 16).
44. Lubricate 0-rings (26) and (29) and fit them to
piston (28).
45. Lubricate the faces against which the piston seals
bear in the hydraulic cover.
46. Place the piston in the cover with the grooves
facing towards the operator.
47. Tap the piston (28) gradually home into the cover by
working progressively round its face with a plasticfaced mallet (Fig.17).
N.B.: Once the piston is fitted, check that no
pieces have been detached from the 0-rings.
48. Refit the splined hub (15) making sure it is correctly
orientated.
49. Refit pressure plate (47), spring washer (46), disc
(45), pressure plate (44), spring washer (43), disc
(42) and pressure plate (41).
N.B. : Place the gaps in spring washers (43) and
(46) in diametrically opposed positions.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Speedshift
5802.11
78. Fit bolts (49) and tighten them to a torque of 25 35 Nm. Refit the housing, support and the clutch,
see section 4 A01 or 4 B01 according to version.
79. Re-unite the tractor between engine and gearbox
(section 2 A01).
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
Gearbox - Dynashift
5803.1
CONTENTS
General
Theoretical operation
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
12
I.
13
J.
Service tools
14
Issue 1
10
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Dynashift
General
The Dynashift assembly is mounted at the front of the
gearbox input unit. It is a hydraulically operated gear
change device which provides four different input ratios
to the gearbox.
This function is ensured by means of two epicyclic gear
trains and two pressure-loaded clutches.
The design of the Dynashift allows the four ratios to be
selected on the move, without declutching, using a
lever located under the steering wheel.
The Dynashift unit is controlled by two solenoid valves
installed on the low-flow hydraulic system. The two
solenoid valves are controlled by the tractor's
Autotronic system.
Theoretical operation
The Dynashift input unit comprises two epicyclic gear
trains:
the primary epicyclic gear train, which is the main
component of the input unit, used to transmit drive
from the engine to the gearbox,
the secondary epicyclic gear train which controls the
speed of the primary sun gear.
Primary epicyclic gear train
Drive is input via the primary ring gear (31) which is
splined onto the primary shaft (7). The primary ring gear
rotates at the same speed as the engine.
Drive is output via the planetary carrier (28) which is
splined onto the secondary shaft (53). The primary sun
gear (64) is driven by the secondary epicyclic gear train.
The speed of this sun gear determines the speed
reduction ratio of the unit.
vAr
Service tools
Secondary epicyclic gear train
This epicyclic gear train is controlled by pressure-loaded
clutches and brakes.
The secondary ring gear (34) is:
either locked on the primary shaft (7) by the three
clutch driving plates (3) and the Belleville washer /4\
located in the front section of the unit,
or immobilised with respect to the unit by three brake
discs (15) and a piston (22).
Issue 1
- Handling bar
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Dynashift
List
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
/42\
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
of parts (Fig. 1)
Secondary ring gear carrier
Clutch driven plates
Clutch driving plates
Belleville washer
Splined hub
Primary shaft
Friction washer
Front cover
Clutch housing
Front brake discs
Backing plate (clutch - brake)
Pressure plate
Bolt
0-ring
Springs
Spacer housing
Front piston
Blanking plug
0-ring
Bolt
0-ring
Ball bearing
Primary planetary carrier
Blanking plug
Screw
Primary ring gear
0-ring
Bolt
Secondary ring gear
0-ring
0-ring
Rear piston
Pressure plate
Secondary planetary carrier
Reverse shuttle housing
Rear brake disc
Secondary brake housing
Bolt
Pressure plate
Backing plate (clutch - brake)
Bolt
Cover
Driven plate
Retaining ring
(50)
(51)
/52\
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
(66)
(67)
(68)
(69)
(70)
[71]
(72)
(73)
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)
(78)
mge
5603.3
0000000000000000000
0
kaim11,.. -41
`:rvd,--ir'ililri`,4/
Al%
Nr..11,11.:,
kla
smilow
AP
Na,
/Aml
ban,
11111.1V
lilioritiAl
i:.iro,N,;
7,uni
_ , , X\1
'4,fn IV- 41;&,
-..
VX
,
:0 41
rya
0111.1541" T-
/
/
v.,.
00 0 0.000:900CD
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
NIKENIM
CD 0000
www.maskinisten.net
=W.
5803.4
Gearbox - Dynashift
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Gearbox - Dynashift
Nio
0101%.0.1.16.
5803.5
ovpipy,
Ns.NNI ;;::!;;:;;.!;:;;;;;;;:
1k xxv-'41,
WA' I U'ii; 433333
..,....,...,..i.g.",;,...,.,,,,.. ..........._._....
t,...
.k.:::::.::.:,,, ,.....
ilill
....,..x.. 'I'll
..............
err/7;r
Fig. 3
/iv A 0-2:2;200
Fig. 4
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Dynashift
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ay
ale
Gearbox - Dynashift
5803. 7
N.W\S. . _1",04(Gr
\NIv7;e71,C. pze32,'':
'77a:21ml
Awe'
4Weff
, effA
iv Ir
X
rr,(.x-2
/47- A
4777..,a.coaco
-7 ,
4697.67051715
.412
;r
4:4W/: 7
Azor
ee774
F
/A
111
1- -
MLA.
Fig. 6
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
5803.8
Gearbox - Dynashift
A. Preliminary operations
1. Split the tractor between the engine and the
gearbox.
2. Drain the oil from the gearbox and from the rear
axle.
3. Remove the clutch, see Section 4A01 or 4B01
according to the type of clutch.
4. Remove the input unit, see Section 5B01.
5. Place the input unit in the vertical position.
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
Gearbox - Dynashift
5803.9
18. Remove the circlip (55). Remove the bearing (57) and
the spacer (56).
19. Separate the secondary planetary carrier (39) from the
primary planetary carrier (28).
20. Remove the retaining ring (60) and the bearing (58).
21. Place the secondary planetary carrier in the vertical
position. Extract the needles (63) (Fig. 10) by lightly
tapping on a wooden block. Separate the planetary
carrier from the primary sun gear (64) fitted with the
retaining ring (62) and the deflector (75).
26. Clean and check the parts, and replace any that are
faulty.
27. Check that the lubricating panels in the pins of the
planetary carriers are not blocked.
28. Manually check the end play and rotation of each
planetary pinion.
29. Fit the primary sun gear (64) along with the retaining
ring (62) and oil deflector (75) on the secondary
planetary carrier (39).
30. Slide the three needles (63) to each hole in the primary
sun gear, fully home in the groove on the secondary
planetary carrier.
31. Position the bearing (58) and fit the retaining ring (60).
32. Assemble the secondary planetary carrier on the
primary planetary carrier (28). Turn the planetary
pinions to facilitate meshing.
33. Position the spacer (56) and the bearing (57), and fit the
circlip (55).
34. Manually check the backlash on the primary planetary
pinions.
35. Fit the retaining ring (49) on the secondary sun gear (61)
(if it was removed).
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
5803.10
Gearbox - Dynashift
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ay
Gearbox - Dynashift
Ate
5 803.11
57. Remove the guide studs. Fit the bolts (18) and
tighten them to a torque of 25 to 35 Nm.
Connect a pressure gauge equipped with a valve on
the port on the front piston. Supply the system with
a compressed air pressure of 0.3 bar Close the
valve and check that no pressure drop occurs for
one minute.
58. Refit the bearing (27) on the ring gear (31), and
install it in the ring gear carrier (1) with the spring
washer (77). Fit ring gear (34). Tighten the bolts
(33) to a torque of 12 to 16 Nm, after coating them
with Loctite 241.
Fit the assembled ring gears on the primary shaft.
Immobilise ring gear (34) as shown in Fig. 8.
Tighten the bolts (25) to a torque of 31 to 35 Nm,
after applying Loctite 241.
59. Compress the spring washer (77) by pressing on
ring gear (31). Fit the circlip (69) and the thrust
washer (70), coated with miscible grease.
60. Lubricate and fit the seals (35) and (36). Position the
piston in the housing and fit it by knocking it
gradually around the edge with a plastic-tipped
mallet. Hold the piston with a suitable fixture.
Check for leaks on seals, as for the front piston.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Gearbox - Dynashift
:1
:. , .,, 19 .:7=111
reir
,0-.
ma
ngsler
1VMM ''ii r-
4r
;or in
' q ,1110
-N.,
CII7' i 4
qb..1a III.
, 4 tt",..
I '-. . - :
. i ...
- ,.
.- -
IiII1
liLo
gik
. ---.17-1 '
I ki
4 -
01.
OSCOMERAMMOMQ I I.
IV1$
114. 1P
.1.1.4
=Ewe
AIM
si
o,,====1,
Pr AA,
Air
Issue 2 3
az
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lAr
Imo
Gearbox - Dynashift
5803.13
ION
MINIM&
o I
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Dynashift
J. Service tools
1. Tools available to the MF network
- Sling for front housing, ref. 3376883M1 (Fig. 21)
- Centring tool, ref. 3376887M1 (Fig. 22)
- Secondary ring gear holding tool, ref. 3376888M1
(Fig. 23)
- Secondary planetary carrier holding tool, ref.
3376920M1 (Fig. 24)
- Sleeve, ref. 3378004M1 (Fig. 25)
- Adapter plate for sling, ref. 3378013M1 (Fig. 25)
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Dynashift
5E303.15
2500
5,07
7
IC 75
75
180
75
0 32
"me 80
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
5804.1
CONTENTS
2
- General
- Operation
F. Service tool
10
H. Speedshift version
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Operation
Forward motion
When the synchromesh pusher is moved rearwards, it
couples gear (5) with the secondary shaft (19) and gear
(67) with mainshaft (69). Gear (5) drives gear (67) with
which it is in constant mesh.
Synchro ring
Synchro cone
Gear
Front bearing cone
Locking plate
Housing
Locking plunger
Spring
Plug
Fork
Selector rail
Adjusting screw
Selector
Adjusting screw
/35\ Friction washer
(36) Bolt
(37) Front cup
(38) Rear cup
(39) Ball
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
List of parts
[1] Shims
(2) Synchro hub
(3) Synchro ring
(4) Synchro cone
(5) Gear
(6) Needle-roller bearing
/7\ Bush
/8\ Friction washer
(9) Rear bearing cone
(10) Set screw
(11) Spacer
(12) Friction washer
(13) Reverse gear pin
(14) Needle-roller bearing
(15) Reverse compound gear
(16) Needle-roller bearing
(18) Synchromesh and gears assembly
(19) Secondary shaft
(20) Needle-roller
Issue 2
Reverse
When the pusher is moved forwards, it couples gear
(23) and the secondary shaft (19). Drive is transmitted
via gear (23), the teeth on gear (15), gear (67) and the
mainshaft (69).
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5804.3
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
5804.4
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ise
5E304.5
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5B04.6
-14P-
P1 = 0.05 / 0.15
33. Place the dial gauge on the end of the secondary
shaft (19) (Fig. 6).
34. Pull the shaft while turning it alternately to the left
and right in order to seat the cones correctly in the
cups.
35. Reset the dial gauge.
36. Repeat procedure 34, while pushing on the shaft.
Note: In order to obtain correct preloading,
reduce the end play to obtain a value of
between 0.10 and 0.75.
ram
- Aar
gt, 311
17-
%,,
,,
;*L
/kINI \N. Ny -Z
g
-;
'
)
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5804.7
(37).
40. Fit the locking plate (25). Fit the bolts (36) after
coating them with Loctite 241, and tighten to a
torque of 36 to 46 Nm.
41. Check the end play and rotation of the gears (5) (23). Manually check the rotation of the secondary
shaft (19).
42. Fit the reverse double gear (15). Carry out
procedure 14 in reverse order.
43. Coat the set screw (10) with Loctite 241 and
tighten it to a torque of 28 to 43 Nm.
44. Manually check the end play and the backlash on
the reverse double gear.
Principle
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5B04.8
51. Fit the fork (30), the locking pin (27), the spring
(28) and the plug (29). Tighten the plug to a torque
of 50 to 70 Nm. Fit the screws (32) coated with
Loctite 221.
52. Position the fork locked in the forward direction.
Keep the synchromesh pusher pressed against
the gear.
53. After adjustment, check that the front shoes on
the fork are not in contact with the synchromesh
pusher.
54. Repeat the operation (with the fork locked in the
rearward direction). After adjusting, check that
the rear shoes are not in contact with the
synchromesh pusher.
55. Tighten the screws to a torque of 35 Nm without
modifying the adjustment.
56. Refit the input unit, see Section 5B01.
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5804.9
F.Service tool
3378054M1 - Adjusting template
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(19)
(25)
(26)
(35)
(36)
E
Shims
Pusher
Ring
Cone
Cone
Coupling plate
Hub
Washer
Secondary shaft
Locking plate
Coupling plate
Washer
Bolt
Shoulder
Preliminary operations
68. Remove the input unit (See Part A)
69. Disassemble the Dynashift unit (See Part B).
Disassembly
70. Remove the reverse shuttle (Fig. 12).
The work procedure on the electrohydraulically
controlled reverse shuttle housing is identical to
that on the housing with single cone
synchromesh (Dynashift).
The shimming procedure for the shaft (19)
(Fig. 12), the adjustment of the fork (30) (Fig. 13)
and tightening torques are unchanged.
Issue 1
May '1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
5804.10
Reassembly
71. Carry out the disassembly and refitting operations
in the reverse order.
Adjusting the reverse selector (Fig. 13).
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox
5001.1
CONTENTS
General
Operation
A.
Removal
B.
Disassembly
C.
Reassembly
D.
Refitting
E.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5C01.2
Gearbox
General
The mechanical control selector cover fitted on the
right-hand side of the gearbox housing has two separate
levers each of which performs one of two different
functions :
- Front lever : This lever controls the reverse shuttle.
- Rear lever : This lever selects the four basic speeds
and the two Hare/Tortoise (Hi-Lo) ratios.
Operation
Forward/Reverse lever
The forward/reverse shuttle is operated when the lever
(23) is pushed forwards (reverse) or backwards (forward).
When the lever (23) is moved forwards or backwards,
it turns the shaft (53) which is secured to the U-arm
(54). The index on the U-arm moves the selector (S).
Hare/Tortoise function
The Hare/Tortoise position (Hi-Lo) is obtained in the
neutral position by pulling the lever (12). The arm (36)
moves the lock (V) which applies pressure on switch (1)
controlling the Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve via the
Autotronic system.
List of parts
(1) Switch
(2) Seal
(3) Temperature gauge
(4) Bolt
(5) Bolt
(6) Support bracket
(7) Pin
(8) Ball
(9) Dust cover
(10) Link
(11) Pin
(12) Gear lever
(13) Pin
(14) Ball
(15) Set screw
(16) Dust cover
(17) Washer
(18) Cotter pin
(19) Elbow union
Issue 1
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
/37\
(38)
(39)
Pin
Ball
Pin
Reverse lever
Lug
Cotter pin
Washer
Ball
Pin
Bolt
Bolt
Support bracket
Link
Bolt
Bolt
Rack
Arm
Seal
Cup
Spring
February 1995
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
/50\
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
Cup
Cup
Spring
Dowel pin
Bolt
Bolt
Bracket
Bolt
Dowel pin
Dust cover
Seal
Dust cover
Set screw
Shaft
Arm
Set screw
Cover
Nut
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-4k
mve
Mechanical control selector cover
6100 SERIES TRACTORS
Gearbox
5C01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox
42
co
co
19
VOA
0
00
0
Fig. 2
issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5C01.5
Tortoise position
Switch (1) is again actuated via the gear lever and this
causes the solenoid valve to close and the pressure in
chamber (a) to drop. Piston (13) moves back under the
prompting of the 17 bar pressure applied to its annular
face.
The oil contained in chamber (a) is returned to the
housing via the Hare duct and solenoid valve E.
Fig. 3
Hare/Tortoise locking
Slider (18) secured to fork (20) is facing lock (22), which
prevents any accidental movement of fork (20) both in
the Hare position (Fig. 4) and in the Tortoise position
(Fig. 5).
The configuration of lock (22) is such that the slider and
fork assembly is only released if the gear lever is pulled
to select either the Hare position or the Tortoise position.
Fig. 5
Fig. 4
0CD
t
k
.,1
P:21%
iv .s[ rim=
.43 IOW r
M'
411.
\\
\WI 11.116. .
ima.
11101111
11111111
0000
Fig. 6
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A . Removal
1. Immobilise the tractor. Fit wedging block under the
left-hand rear wheel.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Fit chock between the frame and the front axle.
4. Drain the oil from the gearbox only.
5. Raise the rear right-hand side of the tractor with a
trolley jack.
6. Install an axle stand and remove the wheel.
7. Remove the footstep (if necessary).
Remove the guard, the Dynashift guard and the wet
clutch valve support (if fitted).
8. Take out the cotter pins (18) and (25), washers (17)
and (26). Remove pins (11) and (20). Lift the dust
covers (49) (51) and (9) (16). Remove the reversing
lever (23) and gear lever (12) and mark their
positions (Fig. 3).
9. Disconnect the wiring harnesses from the switch
(1) and temperature gauge (3) (if fitted) (Fig. 7).
10. Disconnect the control linkage on gearboxes
equipped with creeper gears.
11. Remove the nut (57) and bolts (33) and mark the
position of the earth wire lug (24). On creeper-type
gearboxes, remove the control cable support
bracket (1) (Fig. 8).
12. Remove the cover (56).
B . Removal
13. Install the cover in a vice.
14. Take out bolts (29) (30) and (4) (5). remove the
supports (6) and (31).
15. Remove set screws (15) and (52). Remove the
links (10) and (32).
16. Remove bolt (55). Withdraw shaft (53) and remove
the reversing control U-arm (54).
17. Remove bolts (44) (45) and (47).
18. Remove the bracket (46).
19. Extract the dowel pins (43) (48) from the cover.
20. Remove bolt (34). Remove the gear control cover.
21. Remove the cups (38) and (40), and spring (39).
22. Separate the arm (36) from rack (35). Remove the
cup (41) and spring (42) from the arm (36).
23. Remove the Hare/Tortoise switch (1), seal (2),
union (19) and temperature gauge (3) (if fitted).
24. Remove seals /37\ and /50\.
Issue 1
February 1995
C . Reassembly
25. Clean the mating face on the cover (56). Apply
Loctite 542 on the outer circumference of seals
/37kand /50\ and fit them fully home in the shoulder
of the cover.
26. Fit the dowel pins (43) and (58) in the cover. Install
the bracket (46).
Reinstall the bolts (44) (45) and (47), and tighten
them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
Refit the U-arm (54) and refit the shaft (53) from the
inside of the cover. Be careful not to damage the lip
of seal /50k.
Install the set screw (55) and tighten it to a torque
of 28 - 43 Nm.
27. Refit the cup (41) and spring (42) on arm (36).
Assemble the arm with the rack (35).
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
30. Reinstall the union (19), the temperature probe (3) fitted
with its seal, the Hare/Tortoise switch (1) and its seal (2).
31. Refit links (10) and (32). Fit the set screws (15) and (52).
32. Refit the support brackets (6) and (31). Fit bolts (29) (30)
and (4) (5).
5C01.7
49. Set the reversing and gear levers to the neutral position.
50. Unlock nuts (1). Adjust the sleeves (2) so as to obtain a
dimension X between the base of the sleeve and
shoulder "E" on each lever (see Fig. 10).
Tighten the nuts to a torque of 50 Nm and position the
dust cover (3).
X = 40 mm for all types except MF 6190 tractors
= 70 mm for MF 6190 tractors.
D . Refitting
33. Clean the mating face on the cover (56).
34. Set the reversing selector, and the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th
gear forks to the neutral position. Move the lock V
towards the opening of the selector cover. Check that bolt
(1) is present (see Fig. 9).
35. Apply a sealing compound on the mating face of the
gearbox housing.
36. Position the gear lever pointing towards the right. Set the
reversing lever to the neutral position.
37. Position the cover on the gearbox, making sure that the
levers are correctly positioned in the selector
mechanisms.
38. Fit the earth wire lug (24), bolts (33) and nut (57). Tighten
to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
Note: For gearboxes equipped with creeper gears, fit
the cable support (1) (Fig. 8).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
5CO2.1
CONTENTS
General - Operation
A.
Removal - Refitting
B.
Disassembly - Reassembly
C.
D.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'
no
5CO2.2
14r
General
Operation
Forward motion
The front solenoid valve is power-supplied and pressure
is applied on the front face of the piston. The piston
moves rearwards to engage the synchro with the
forward motion gear. When the piston reaches the
engaged position, the solenoid valve is no longer
supplied with power and the piston chamber is
connected to the return pipe.
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(56)
(57)
List of parts
(1) Switch
(2) Seals
(3) Reverse solenoid valve
(4) Bolt
(5) Position sensor
(6) Support bracket
(7) Plug
(8) Bolt
(9) Coupling
(10) Link
(11) Forward motion solenoid valve
(12) Lever
(13) Temperature probe
(14) Circlip
(15) Bolt
(16) 0-ring
(17) Plug
(18) 0-rings
Issue 2
Rearward motion
The rear solenoid valve is supplied with power and
pressure is applied on the rear face of the piston which
moves forwards to engage the synchromesh with the
reverse motion gear.
Piston
Link
Seal
Retaining ring
Coupling
Lug
Bolt
Bolt
Rack
Finger
Seal
Cup
Spring
Cup
Cup
Spring
Cover
Nut
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5CO2.3
111111
1111111Mil
t
lk,
a
Nwvi\
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox
Electrohydraulic selector
no'
5CO2.5
A. Removal - Refitting
Note: To avoid immobilising the tractor in the event
of any failure of the hydraulic system (low or no
pressure) or electrical failure, the reverse shuttle
can be engaged via the inspection port oT (Fig. 2)
using a screwdriver placed in the grooves on the
piston (19).
Removal
1 . Remove the guard.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
B. Disassembly - Reassembly
Disassembly
21 Remove the bolts (8). Remove the position
sensor (5) and its seal. Remove the solenoid
valves (3) and (11), and the couplings (9) and (23).
Dismantle the Hare/Tortoise contactor (1) and
remove the seals (2) and temperature probe (13)
(if fitted) (Fig. 3).
22. If necessary, remove the retaining ring (22).
Remove link (20) and the seal (21). Remove link
(10) (Fig. 3).
23. Remove the bolt (34) (Fig. 4). Remove the
gearshift control assembly.
24. Remove the cups (38) and (40), and the spring
(39).
25. Separate the finger (36) from the rack (35).
Remove the cup (41) and the spring (42).
26. Extract the seal (37).
27. Remove the circlip (14) and the plug (17). Take out
the piston (19) (Fig. 4).
Reassembly
28. Clean the mating face on the cover.
29. Check that the channels in the cover are not
blocked.
30. Fit the lubricated seals (18) on the piston (19) and
position it in the cover. Remove the plug (17)
equipped with the 0-ring (16). Position the circlip
(14) (Fig. 5).
31. Check that the piston moves correctly.
Fig. 5
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
5CO2.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Disassembly
45. Remove the circlip (50). Remove the plug (51)
fitted with its seal, the spring (52) and the piston
(53).
Reassembly
46. Clean the parts and replace any that are faulty.
Check that the piston (53) slides freely in the
cover.
47. Carry out procedure 45 in the reverse order.
Check that the circlip (50) is correctly positioned.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5D01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
Hare/Tortoise range fork - Mechanical lock assembly 1st/2nd/3rd/4th forks - Selector rail
C.
Service tools
11
D.
12
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The selector rail (7) which supports the various forks and the
mechanical latch assembly is fitted on the right-hand side of
the gearbox, on the selector cover side. It crosses the gearbox
housing and the Hare/Tortoise range control piston (13). It is
secured by means of a setscrew (8). A recess plug (9) blanks
the opening at the front end of the rail and a cover (15) blanks
the rear end.
The forks for 1st - 2nd gears (5), 3rd - 4th gears (6) and the
creeper gears (28) cannot be adjusted (except for locking
pressure in the case of creeper gears). The Hare/Tortoise
range fork (20) is adjustable.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AP-
List
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
of parts
Plug
Spring
Locking pin
1st - 2nd gear fork
3rd - 4th gear fork
Selector rail
Setscrew
Recess plug
Cylinder
0-ring
0-ring
Hare/Tortoise range piston
0-ring
Cover
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
me
5D01.3
Bolt
Bolt
Slider
Adjusting screw
Hare/Tortoise fork
Castellated nut
Latch
Taper bearing
Cone
Latch assembly
Nut
Locking screw
Creeper gear fork
Dowel
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
On 4WD tractors
16. Remove the fork (28) from the selector rail (7)
(Fig. 8).
17. Remove the rod (3) (Fig. 1).
18. To remove the creeper gear control shaft (1), turn
it so that it goes under the selector rail (7) (Fig. 9).
Discard the 0-ring (3).
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5D01.5
Reassembly
19. Check the parts and replace any that are faulty.
20. Refit the control rod. Pull the rod as far as possible
to the right. Fit a new lubricated 0-ring (Fig. 10).
21. Refit the rod (3) (Fig. 11).
Coat the bolt with Loctite 241 and tighten it.
22. Fit the fork on the selector rail.
Note: Make sure that the finger (1) of the
creeper gear control rod is pointing towards
the front of the tractor (Fig. 11).
23. Engage the sleeve, connecting shaft and coupler
assembly on the left-hand outer edge and, then, fit
it in the fork.
Note: The machined groove on the sleeve (2)
must be pointing towards the rear of the
tractor (Fig. 12).
24. Slide the sleeve and the coupler onto the
connecting shaft.
25. Fit a new pin (1) in the sleeve (2) (Fig. 4).
26. Remove the setscrew (8).
27. Fit a new dowel (29) and turn the selector rail (7)
(Fig. 2 and 3).
Clean
the setscrew (8), coat it with Loctite 542
28.
and tighten it to a torque of 28 to 43 Nm.
29. Position the fork (28) and the locking screw (27)
on flat M on the selector rail (7) (between the two
detent notches) (Fig. 5).
Tighten the screw to compress the ball. Loosen
the screw by a quarter turn. Clean the nut (26) and
coat it with Loctite 241, then tighten it to a torque
of 15 to 20 Nm.
Check that the fork locks correctly.
30. Turn and push the rod (2) to engage the finger in
the fork. Fit the bolt (1) after coating it with Loctite
241 (Fig. 1).
31. Check that the rod operates correctly.
32. Prepare for the refitting of the right-hand hydraulic
cover. Carry out procedures 15 to 17, in Section
9101.
33. Check that the transfer tube 0-rings are in good
condition and insert the tube into the left-hand
cover. (See Fig. 2 - Section 9101).
34. Carry out procedures 20 and 18, in Section 9101.
35. Refit the right-hand cover and the bolts. Tighten to
a torque of 72 to 96 Nm.
36. Carry out procedures 7 to 11 in reverse order
(Section 9101). Fit the wiring harnesses and
secure with a clip.
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
37. Refit the trailer brake valve (if fitted). Check that the firings are in good condition.
Tighten to a torque of 25 to 35 Nm.
38. Carry out the operations in procedure 6 (Section 9101)
in reverse order.
39. RY
e trailer brake valve type (if fitted), the strainer,
,er and the filter.
th,
40. C.
it procedures 9 to 12 in reverse order.
41. RE , -LaII the selector cover (see Section 5C01 or 5CO2
according to version). Reconnect and adjust the
creeper gear control cable (see Section 5H01).
42. Refit the wheel. Remove the stand and the jack.
43. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 to 450 Nm.
44. Top up the oil in the gearbox and the rear axle housing.
45. Start the engine. Carry out procedure 32 in Section
9101, and check for leaks on the cover mating face and
hydraulic couplings.
46. Carry out road tests on the creeper gear control, the 1st,
2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, the Hare/Tortoise range and the
electrohydraulically controlled reverse shuttle (if fitted).
GEC
issue 1
April 1995
0
0
co
Fig. 15
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ase
5D01.7
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Reassembly
71. Check the parts and replace any that are faulty.
72. Clean the threads on the cone (24) and the tapping
on nut (21).
73. Refit the latch assembly.
74. Fit the selector rail through the opening on the
selector cover and the Hare/Tortoise cylinder bore
(Fig. 18).
75. Refit the forks and the latch assembly.
76. Check that the hydraulic ports of the Hare/
Tortoise cylinder (10) are not blocked.
Fit the cylinder equipped with the 0-ring (11).
77. Slide the selector rail forwards into the Hare/
Tortoise fork, the latch assembly and the 1st, 2nd,
3rd and 4th gear forks.
Note: For gearboxes with creeper gears, the
selector rail must be moved far enough
forwards to allow fitting of the fork (28)
(Fig. 19).
78. Fit the seals (12) to (14) on the piston (13), and
then insert it into the cylinder bore.
Note: The locations for the adjusting screws
must be positioned facing the tapped holes in
the fork. Immobilise the piston with a screw
(19).
79. Fit the cover (15) with the bolts (16) and tighten to
a torque of 27 to 32 Nm.
80* Engage the pads of the creeper gear fork in the
coupler.
Note: The fork control finger (1) must be facing
forwards (Fig. 11).
81*Slide the selector rail rearwards into the creeper
gearbox.
82* Fit a new dowel (Fig. 3), turning the selector rail to
make installation easier (Fig. 2).
83. Clean the setscrew (8), coat it with Loctite 542
and tighten it to a torque of 38 to 43 Nm.
84. Coat the recess plug (9) with loctite 542 and fit it
flush with the housing.
85* Fit the locking screw (27) on the fork (28) and the
nut (26) on the bolt (Fig. 5).
86* Repeat procedure 29.
87*Turn and push the rod (2) to engage the finger in
the fork. Fit the bolt (1) after coating it with Loctite
241 (Fig. 1). Check that the rod operates correctly.
88. Fit the locking pins, the springs and the locking
plugs.
Tighten the plugs to a torque of 50 to 70 Nm.
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5D01.9
ALI
MI% MI 0'
ArArAKIPLIst11%
,..n.,
re
d
0
J1 =+0.3
J5=+0.3 mini
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
April 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5D01.11
C. Service tools
Tool available through the MF network
3615334M1 - Pin wrench (Fig. 29)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Issue 2
0 0 0 0
LI
--/,
.71111111111V,
------
\.
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5E01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
11
H.
Final operations
11
I.
Service tools
12
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The output shaft transmits the drive provided by the
various gear ratios to the rear axle transfer shaft. It is
mounted on the lower transmission drive line at the rear
of the gearbox.
At the front end, it is supported by a needle-roller
bearing located in the bore in the mainshaft and, at the
rear end, in two taper bearings fitted with their tapers in
opposition.
The shaft (44) carries:
- the driving gear (29) which is mounted to rotate freely
on combination bearings (28) and (30),
- the gear (36) and bush (35) assembly which are
mounted to rotate freely,
- the Hare/Tortoise (Hi/Lo) coupler (31) and its hub
which are splined to rotate together.
Issue 1
14r
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5E01.3
Issue 1
February T995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
5E01.4
A . Preliminary operations
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Arr
Gearbox
Output shaft
'se
5E01.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Setting J3
al&
.
111
42
Fig. 8
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
age
5E01.7
Setting J4
39. Remove the circlip (45).
40. Remove the packing shim /43\ and the adjusting
shims [42].
41. Measure the thickness Y of the set of shims [42]
and /43k. (This measurement will be useful for
setting J5.)
42. Remove the bolts (41) and the locking ring (46).
43. Remove the cup (48), cones (40) and (39), and the
shaft (44).
Fit
the following in the housing: the Tortoise gear
44.
(36), the synchromesh and its rings (33) and (74),
the thrust washer (32), the gear (29) with its
needle-roller bearings (30) and (28) and its
synchromesh cones (75) and (76), thrust washer
(27) and synchromesh ring (25).
Note: If bush (35) shows signs of wear, replace
the complete gear assembly. (The bush is
reamed after fitting),If the combination bearings
(30) and (28) are worn, replace the complete
gear assembly. (Bearings are fitted in the
factory).
45. Insert the output shaft (44) while holding the gear
assembly in position (see Fig. 13).
46. Pull the shaft slightly back in order to expose the
groove for the snap ring (34).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
47. Fit the snap ring (34) with tool MF 459 (Fig. 14).
Setting J5
57. Perform the setting (Fig. 16) to obtain :
J5 = no end play
47 X
CD
lb, *
IlidSkira
.7-A4
cr)
J4 = 0,20 / 0,40
.11011.
38
Fig. 15
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar.
W'
5E01.9
71. Fit the bearing (15) and tighten the bolts (16) to a
torque of 27 - 32 Nm.
72. Clean the set screw (8) with a solvent. Coat it with
Loctite 542 and tighten to a torque of 28 - 43 Nm.
73. Fit he locking plungers (3) and springs (2), and
tighten the plugs (1) to a torque of 50 - 70 Nm.
Note : Gearboxes equipped with creeper gears
(Fig. 3).
- Fit sleeve (5), fork (4) and pin (1).
- Position the fork so that locking screw (3) is
over the flat on the guide rail (6) (between the
two locking recesses).
- Tighten the screw fully in so that the ball is
compressed.
- Loosen the screw by one quarter turn.
- Apply Loctite 241 to nut (2) after cleaning it
with solvent.
- Tighten to a torque of 15 - 20 Nm.
- Check that the fork locks correctly.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
5E01.10
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81. Slightly loosen the castellated nut (21). Apply a moderate coat of Loctite 270 on the thread of cone
(24).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5E01.11 .
J 4 = 0.3 mini
Fig. 22
H . Final operations
91. Recouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
woe
5E01.12
I . Service tools
a) Tools available from the MF network
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
IP
Igr
Heavy duty gearbox - Output shaft
me'
5E02.1
CONTENTS
-
General
A. Preliminary operations
H. Final operations
Service tools
I.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
5E02.2
General
The characteristics of the heavy duty gearbox are
similar to those of the standard gearbox.
The front end of the reinforced gearbox is supported by
a bearing (24) with needle rollers with a larger cross
section.
Bearings (28) and (30), separated by a spacer (80),
allow the driving gear (29) to rotate on the output shaft.
Bearings (79) and (81) act as end stops.
A dual cone synchromesh is used to change the speed
range between the Hare and Tortoise (Hi/Lo) gears,
(29) and (36) respectively.
For shim setting J3, the preloading or play between the
cones and their respective cups is adjusted according
to the thickness of the circlip (49).
Shim settings J4 and J5 are the same as for the version
used on standard gearboxes.
List of parts
(24)
(27)
(28)
Needle-roller bearing
Washer
Needle-roller bearing
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(48)
(49)
(79)
(80)
(81)
Overall view
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
5E02.3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
da
5E02.4
A . Preliminary operations
1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle (as per Section 2B01).
shims (42).
9. Remove the bearing cone (40).
10. Remove the cone (39).
1
15. Remove the needle-roller bearing
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5E02.5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Setting J3
23. Position the pointer of a dial gauge on the end of the
shaft (44) (Fig. 7).
31. Remove cup (48), cones (40) and (39), keeping the
cups and cones in pairs, cup (37), the circlip (49) and
the shaft (44).
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
5E02.7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Setting J5
41. Perform the shimming (Fig. 1) to obtain:
J5 = no end play
42. Use the thickness of shims Y (42) and (43),
measured in procedure 21, to deduce the thickness
of shims Z (38) to obtain:
J5 = Y - Z.
43. Fit the cup (48) and the locking ring (46).
Tighten the bolts (41) to a torque of 27 to 32 Nm.
44. Slide the thickness of shims selected in procedure
42 onto the shaft.
45. Fit the circlip (45).
Note : Position the packing shim (43) on the circlip side.
The circlip must be a slightly tight fit in its groove.
Check that it is correctly positioned.
Note : Refit the creeper gearbox (if fitted).
46. Check by hand that the shaft and its gears turn
freely.
47. Check that the 3rd - 4th and Hare/Tortoise
synchromeshes operate normally.
H . Final operations
49. Recouple the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (as per Section 2B01).
50. Check:
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ay
5E02.9
I . Service tools
1. Tool available from the MF network
3615334M1 - Slotted nut wrench for Hare /
Tortoise latch
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Layshaft
5F01.1
5 F01 Layshaft
CONTENTS
General
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
Disassembly
C.
Reassembly
D.
E.
Service tool
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
I NO
Gearbox - Layshaft
5F01.2
General
The layshaft and its gears make up the upper drive line
of the gearbox. The shaft (54) carries the driven gears
for 1st speed (60), 2nd speed (59) 3rd speed (55) and
4th speed (56). The rear set of teeth is constantly
meshed with the Tortoise (Lo) gear.
Overall view
0 0
0 D0
58
52
gal
CD
OA
4
AV,
NMXNIMSide
1XXXXXNI/XXi
'-k-XN.
' -
Aymmw-
11*_= rjaezeireerz
."CC\%
.
`CWW1
76X,.',$7
MA'1_
1Mes
7Geeeib
0 4
I
/
.11 = 0/0.25
51
Fig. 1
Exploded view
Fig. 2
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Layshaft
AIO
5F01.3
A. Preliminary operations
To allow the bearings to be correctly shimmed when
replacing the laysahft the gearbox must be removed.
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle (see Section 2 B01).
2. Separate the gearbox from the engine, section
2 A01.
3. Remove the clutch, see section 4 A01 or 4 B01
according to version.
4. Remove the selector cover, see section 5 CO1 or 5
CO2 according to version.
B. Disassembly
6. Remove the deflector (50), the shims [51] and the
cup (52). Withdraw the shaft assembly (Fig. 3).
7. Extract the bearing cones (53) and (63).
Note: Keep the cones and cups in pairs if they are
to be re-used.
8. Remove the circlip (61).
9. Remove the 2nd gear (59), the shims [58], the 1st
gear (60) and the spacer (57).
10. Remove the 4th gear (56) and the 3rd gear (55).
C. Reassembly
12. Clean and check the parts, and replace any that are
defective.
13. Fit the needle-roller bearing (62) fully home on the
shoulder of the shaft (54), using a press.
Note: After this fitting operation, check that the
needle-rollers turn normally in the cage.
14. Reinstall the 3rd gear (55) and the 4th gear (56).
15. Slide the spacer (57) into position. Install the 1st
gear (60) and the 2nd gear (59).
16. Fit the circlip (61).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Layshaft
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ige
Gearbox - Layshaft
5F01.5
gp AIMMIMN NI 1.16,
E. Service tool
Layshaft holding tool, to be manufactured locally.
Washer MF 33833113 M2 to
tool
Washer LL 12U
0 int. : 125
0 ext. : 40
th.:2$
Nut HM10
Welding bead
L : 1000
Washer MF 3383113 M2
to tool
Fig. 7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'NO
Ar
w
5F02.1
5F02 Layshaft
CONTENTS
General
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
Disassembly
C.
Reassembly
D.
E.
Service tool
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
5F02.2
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
General
The layshaft gears of the Heavy Duty gearbox have a
different profile from those of the standard gearbox.
The width of gears (55), (56) and (60) is greater.
The rear teeth that are constantly meshed with the
Tortoise gear are strengthened.
The flange on gears (55) and (56) has been replaced by
a spacer (82).
The shimming of the layshaft gears remains
unchanged.
Layshaft
3rd driven gear
4th driven gear
Spacer
Shim(s)
2nd driven gear
1 st driven gear
Circlip
Needle-roller bearing
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
List of parts
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
Deflector
Shims
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Overall view
00 0
57
CD CD
54
53
./
r0-'
411
A*,
01/
Aofr A. wire,
af,"'
0
J1 = 0/0,25
0 0
Fig. 1
Exploded iew
57
CD
0:.'
0
0
Oz.A
4,7
i f r"0/
Afrqe, -
../
i;
-..,-.!
4
,,..-
&/.
Arj
dr
#'
0
-4%
..
1.1.--
.`rrA
co 0
..)))
Fig. 2
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5F02.3
A . Preliminary operations
In order to ensure that the bearings are correctly
shimmed when replacing the layshaft, the gearbox
must be removed.
1. Split the tractor between the gearbox and the
rear axle (see Section 2 B01).
2. Separate the gearbox from the engine (see
Section 2 A01).
3. Remove the clutch (see Section 4 A01).
4. Remove the selector cover (see Section 5 CO1 or
B . Disassembly
6. Remove the deflector (50), the shims (51) and
the cup (52). Withdraw the shaft assembly
(Fig. 3).
7. Extract the bearing cones (53) and (63).
Note : Keep the cones and cups in pairs if they
are to be re-used.
8. Remove the circlip (61).
C . Reassembly
12 Clean and check the parts, and replace any that
are defective.
13 Fit the needle-roller bearing (62) fully home on
the shoulder of the shaft (54), using a press.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
TAr
5F02.5
E . Service tool
Layshaft holding tool, to be manufactured locally.
Washer MF 3383113 M2
to be machined
Washer LL 12U
Inside dia.: 12.5
Outside dia.: 40
2.5 thk
Nut HM10
Nut HM10
Weld
bead
Washer MF 3383113 M2
to be machined
Fig. 7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5G01.1
5 GO1 Mainshaft
CONTENTS
General
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
C.
Final operations
D.
Service tools
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5G01.2
General
A. Preliminary operations
Service tools
See part D.
N: =-,v./. '`
.c 1
Z-f. :_J L 4 L*-- -
iIr4 ---
ir 4.
MIMI p.'01111
'F
- -"r-
pl
. _: 4 ,4
117.
- -- ' 7 S. 1
- - r :---
NMI
.V..... - : 1 &
V
Aw IrAPAP7 1 Zekinl
II Zid FA, _ .I. :r '''
arINS11411r4r
:=
11
Adr,
111111t
11Mill=
_
r/r21PAKIVArear
vsis x maw
AM/4/AI
, %, IhS0..i' 1
,I
. ....,-
AI so
411r
a,
)."
.
..7141
--
,,,,,,
__
Ns
,,
NS.
,,. I
1111=., ,...,,,24,
j
lt
Ill
i
r
4-J7
,,
v
,,--4-!`'
-NI ' '/Vt ;ft 111
re
."77.:1 A
..
lo.
1 I.
ap
-w
o
i
t
14
V
J
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
Issue 1
Nye
5G01.3
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5G01.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5G01.6
Gearbox - Mainshaft
C. Final operations
58. Refit and shim the output shaft, see section 5 E01.
59. Refit the layshaft, see section 5 F01.
60. Refit the input gearbox assembly, see section
5 B01.
61. Shim the layshaft, see section 5 F01..
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Gearbox - Mainshaft
5G01. 7
D. Service tools
1. Tools available from the MF network
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1APT
5 GO2
5G02.1
Mainshaft
CONTENTS
General
A.
Preliminary operations
B.
C.
Final operations
D.
Service tools
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5G02.2
List of parts
General
The design of the mainshaft for the heavy duty gearbox
is identical to that of mainshaft for the standard
gearbox.
The following differences should be noted, however:
- The mainshaft (69) is fitted on two taper roller
bearings (1) and (17) with shouldered cups (2) and
(16) .
Similarly to the standard mainshaft, preloading of the
taper roller bearing is obtained by means of shims (3)
located between splined washers (6) fitted against
the input gear (67) and bush (8) .
A washer (77) with flats acts as a stop for the 1st
driving gear (7) .
The length of the thread to the front of the shaft has
been modified to allow the fitting of a thicker nut (68) .
To the rear end, the shaft is reinforced and the bore for
the 4th gear (18) is larger.
The double-cone, 3rd - 4th gear synchromesh hub (23)
is held onto the mainshaft by means of 14 splines.
Service tools
See Part D.
\ I .
II-1
FA __
Al
, 1111111Etrilli1j#1,..gli
iA A
N i I Am -;.-_
muli
e---04E
0
M
tirN
\, i
.I.............
10111101134 . I 4r ciN
,n. ,
im, nimk
if;
N ',r
=7" ,,
Issue 1
r
pA
1'
.o
111-11
itilitiftt,
maid !Wm
11.
114.
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
5G02.3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ise
5G02.4
A . Preliminary operations
The gearbox must be removed in order to
disassemble the mainshaft.
1 . Split the tractor between the gearbox and the rear
axle (as per Section 2B01).
2. Separate the gearbox from the engine (as per
Section 2A01).
3. Remove the selector cover. (as per Section 5C01 or
5CO2 according to the version).
4. Remove the input gearbox assembly (as per Section
5B01).
5. Remove the layshaft (as per Section 5F02).
6. Remove the forks and the selector rail (as per
Section 5D02). Remove the output shaft (as per
Section 5E02).
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1- 4p-
5G02.5
Reassembly
18. Clean the housing and the mating faces.
19. Using a jet of compressed air, check that all the
oilways in the gearbox and the shaft are free of
obstructions. Clean and check the parts, and replace
any that are faulty.
20. Lubricate the cones, the cups, the bearing bores
and the bush.
21. Using a press, fit the bearing cone (17) onto the
shaft (69), (if it was removed).
22. Fit the retaining ring (70).
P1 = 0.14 to 0.20
38. Fitthe retaining tool and the holding sleeve (Figures
3 and 4).
39. Unlock nut (68). Remove the gear (67).
40. Fit the shims (3) selected during procedure 37
between the two washers (6).
41. Reinstall the gear.
42. Degrease the thread on the shaft with a solvent.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
43. Lightly coat the nut (68) with Loctite 270 and then
tighten to a torque of between 130 and 170 Nm.
44. Lock the nut by bending the collar into the groove
with a suitable drift punch.
45. Insert the spring (72) and the oil feed pipe (71) into
the shaft.
46. Remove the tool and the holding sleeve.
47. Fit the gear (18) and 3rd and 4th gear synchromesh
(23) with the oilways pointing towards the 4th gear
(18) .
48. Fit a new circlip (26) .
Note: Open the circlip as little as possible. After
fitting, check that it has not been deformed.
49. Check the following by hand:
a) the end play on gears,
b) the rotation of the shaft and gear train.
50. Check that the 1st and 2nd gear synchromesh
functions correctly.
C . Final operations
51. Refit and shim the output shaft (as per Section
5E02).
52. Refit the layshaft (as per Section 5F02).
53. Refit the input gearbox assembly (as per Section
5B01).
54. Shim the layshaft (as per Section 5F02).
55. Reassemble the forks and the selector rail (as per
Section 5D01).
56. Adjust the reversing selector (as per Section 5B04).
57. Refit the selector cover (as per Section 5C01 or
5CO2 according to the version).
Note: Do not forget to install the bolt (1) on the
housing (see Fig. 9, Section 5C01).
58. Recouple the gearbox with the engine (as per
Section 2A01).
59. Recouple the gearbox and the rear axle (as per
Section 2B01).
60. Check the operation of the electrical circuits.
61. Carry out a road test on the controls.
62. Check for leaks on the unions and mating faces
(selector cover, and gearbox on rear axle).
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
ne
5G02.7
D . Service tools
1. Tools available from the MF network
Mainshaft retaining tool
ediiirv.
3378082M1
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-le
Ar
5H01.1
CONTENTS
-
General
Operation
A.
B.
C.
D.
Final procedures
E.
F.
Circuit diagram
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The creeper gear reduction gearbox consists of an
epicyclic gear train comprising of a planetary carrier and
ring gear assembly mounted at the rear of the main
gearbox. It is operated from a lever located on the
console, inside the cab. The lever is connected by a
cable to an arm fitted on the right front side of centre
housing. The arm shifts the fork which in turn controls
the coupling sleeve.
The creeper gears should only be selected if the main
gearbox is in the Lo range.
Operation
Coupling sleeve (8) is splined to connecting shaft (21).
If lever A is moved towards the creeper gear position
(Fig. 3), coupling (8) is shifted towards the rear and its
external teeth engage with the planetary carrier (1).
Connecting shaft (21) speed is then 1/4 of output shaft
speed.
In normal gears, output shaft is coupled with connecting
shaft (21) when sleeve (8) is moved forward, thus
providing direct transmission.
When creeper range is selected (snail light ON) and Hi
(hare) light blinks, the operator is informed that the
gearbox is on the Hare position. He then must shift to
Lo position.
The electrical signal indicating that creeper speed range
is selected is transmitted from the control cabin mounted
C switch (Fig. 3).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
a)Two-speed PTO
Remove third point bracket, leading gear and
connecting shaft, then carry out procedures 1 to 7,
section 7 A01.
Remove PTO clutch and carry out procedure 3,
section 7 E01.
NW'
5H01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5H01.4
lk 'NA
zw411.
co Nit
II
dilliMMus*4,`,772Y7:,
410..,01:11
it's
O
O
0
F
41) 0 0
0
F
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Issue 1
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
Planetary carrier
Thrust washer
Front disc
Spring washer
Bolt
Spring ring
Internally toothed bush
Coupling sleeve
Planetary gears
Needle rollers
Spacer
Pin
Sector plate
Sector plate
Backing disk
Circlip
Planetary carrier assembly
Thrust washer
Ring gear
Locating pin
Connecting shaft
Fig. 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
5H01.5
D . Final Procedures
22. Refit fork, coupling sleeve, connecting shaft and
coupler and carry out procedures 22 to 31, section
5 D01.A.
23. Reassemble PTO assembly.
a) Two-speed PTO
Refit PTO assembly and carry out procedures 5 to
7, section 7 E01.
Refit connecting shaft, leading gear and third point
bracket, then carry out procedures 8 to 18, section
7 A01.
b) Four-speed PTO
Refit PTO assembly and carry out procedures 16 to
18, section 7 E01.
Refit connecting shaft, leading gear and third point
bracket, then carry out procedures 75 to 94, section
7 A01.
24. Refit right hydraulic cover and carry out procedures
15 to 33, section 9 101.
25. Test drive and check creeper gears.
26. Check PTO and PTO brake operation.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
Fig. 4
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1*)-
List of parts
18.Hare light
50.Creeper speed switch
51.Relay
52.Blinker relay
53.Diode
54.Creeper speed light
Colour codes
G : Grey
M: Brown
N : Black
C : Light
F : Dark
5H01. 7
Abbreviations
F . Circuit diagram
age
C4,
3
52
51
18
54
Ivo ist
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
0
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Noe
5H02.1
CONTENTS
- General
- Operation
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Operation
Moving lever A to the snail position (Fig. 2) causes, at
the same time,engagement of the two reduction devices.
The switch (1) closes the solenoid valve which controls
the hydro-mechanical reduction device (input housing)
putting the forward reduction device into the Tortoise
range.
At the same time, the rear mechanical reduction gear
goes into the slow position (see chapter 5 H01).
The movement of the two reduction devices into the
Tortoise range drives the rear axle connecting shaft at
a speed of 1 revolution per 7.8 revolutions of the box
input shaft. When lever A is moved back to the Hare
position, the transmission of movement is direct (ratio
of 1:1). The tractors having the super creeper speeds
version are fitted with an accumulator (Fig. 3)
connected to the pipe (2) coming from the 17 bar valve.
The purpose of this is to reduce the pressure drop when
the super creeper range is engaged. This device is held
by a bracket fixed to the selection cover.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lg.
NO
5H02.3
00.0A.00.0000000
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ave
6 . REAR AXLE
Contents
6 A01 DESCRIPTION
6 B01 LIFT COVER
6 CO1 TRUMPET HOUSINGS
6 CO2 HEAVY DUTY TRUMPETS
6 D01 HANDBRAKE
6 E01 DIFFERENTIAL
6 F01 BRAKE PISTON AND SEALS
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
'se
6A01.1
CONTENTS
- General
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
6A01.2
General
The rear axle comprises four main housings :
- The centre housing which houses the differential, the
power take-off gear in all variants and the 4-wheel
drive transmission, the handbrake and main brake
control unit. It also supports the two axle housings
(trumpets), the lift cover and the side covers (see
sections 9 101-02).
- The right and left trumpets fixed to each side of the
centre housing, serving as a rearwheel drive axle case
(see sections 6C01-02).
- The lift cover fitted to the top of the centre housing
supporting the lift arms which are attached to the
lower links (see sction 6B01).
Issue 1
February 1995
Main brakes
Two pistons mounted laterally in two cavities in the
centre housing act on two discs splined onto the output
shafts. The brake pistons are activated hydraulically
(see section 6 F01).
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
6A01.3
A.,
74.-- Axeel4A,
AV !
.111
Pligi'
11110.1-11
poi1001001Wn..4
Iii
ISLI
Alliff
'
...10 ....II'.
11212.1=
,,,
-MP
,i1,0 iv
iS
1/4
1
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
1MIL\ eow
\11
6..\
A...drorraiiii;
1 \NW\\
4111.-.:
www.maskinisten.net
111.1101021Mmih..
!EMIR!
Ai&
..mmar.awamorAcillai
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
- General
A. Removal
B. Disassembly
C. Reassembly
D. Refitting
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
6801.2
General
The lift cover is mounted on the upper face of the rear
axle housing. The shaft (4) which has the two lift arms
(5) and (11) splined to it, is supported by bushes (8).
Cam (9) on the lift shaft (4) provides the means for
sensor (26) to monitor position of lift arms. This information is transmitted to the Electronic Linkage Control
(ELC) system.
To ensure correct play between the lift arms and the
cover, shims [12] are fitted on the left hand end of the
shaft.
List
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
[12]
(13)
(14)
(15)
of parts
Washer
Bolt
Retainer
Lift shaft
Right-hand lift arm
Nylon ring (2)
0-ring (2)
Bush (2)
Cam
Lift cover
Left-hand lift arm
Shim(s)
Bush
Set screw (2)
Vehicle speed sensor
Issue 1
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
February 1995
Nut
Cup plug (2-speed PTO)
Screw (4-speed PTO)
Control finger (4-speed PTO)
0-ring (4-speed PTO)
Lever (4-speed PTO)
Screw (4-speed PTO)
Elbow connector
Bolt
Nut
Position sensor
Cup plug without lift
Threaded plug without lift
Seal without lift
Thrust washer
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
we
6801.3
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ave
6B01.4
Exploded view
00
0
0
00
E?:
-L
---1"4147
dc)
(0
ED 0
Issue 1
February 1995
(00
00
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6B01.5
A. Removal
1. Remove the sheetmetal.
2. Remove the rear fastening screws to the cab.
3. Raise the cab.
Note: Place a block between the cab and the
trumpets (Fig. 1).
4. Disconnect (Fig. 2) :
. the supply hose (1) to the spool valve
. the supply hose (3) to the lift valve
. the return hose (2).
5. Remove the bolts (4) for the spool valve support (5)
(Fig. 2).
6. Remove the support swinging the assembly out of
the way, without disconnecting the controls (1)
(Fig. 3).
7. Disconnect (Fig. 4):
. the vehicle sensor wire assembly (1)
. the position sensor wire assembly (2)
. the differential lock pipe (3)
. the cable (4) (4-speed PTO, if fitted)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
6E301.6
B. Disassembly
12. Place the cover on a work bench.
13. Remove the elbow connector (23).
14. Unscrew the nut (16) and remove the vehicle
speed, sensor (15).
15. Unscrew the nut (25) and remove the position
sensor (26).
For tractors equipped with economy 4-speed, carry
out operations 16 to 19 (Fig. 6).
16. Undo the Allen screw (22) in the lever (21).
17. Undo the screw (18).
18. Remove the control finger (19).
19. Remove the 0-ring (20).
20. Flatten tabs locking the bolts (2) retaining the lift
arms..
21. Undo the screws.
Fig. 7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lAr
Ave
6B01.7
C. Reassembly
Note: The bushes (13) are mounted with Loctite 648
at a distance of 40.50 mm from the face A (Fig. 8).
31 . Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
32. Clean the joint faces of the lift cover and of the
spool valve support.
33. Fit the bushes(8) in the cover.
34. Fit the cup plug (17) smeared with Loctite 542 flush
with the cover (2- speed p.t.o.).
35. Mount the lift shaft (4) and the cam (9) in the cover
(Fig. 9).
Note: Ensure that the direction of the shaft and
the position of the cam are correct.
36. Tighten the set screws (14) smeared with Loctite
241 to a torque of 5 Nm (Fig. 9).
Note: Apply this torque so as not to deform the
cam.
37. Position the 0-rings (7) and the nylon rings (6).
Note: Protect the splines of the shaft. Lubricate
the 0-rings before mounting (Fig. 10).
38. Grease the splines of the shaft (4) (Anti-Seize
Grease or equivalent).
39. Fit the lift arm (5) (sensor side), the washer (1), the
retainer (3) and the screw (2).
Note: Grease the face of the cover (Anti-Seize
Grease or equivalent) before fitting the arms.
40. Tighten the screw (2) so as to align two flat sides of
the screw head with the two tabs of the retainer(3).
Bend back the tabs.
Note: If work has been done without the need to
carry out shimming J1 (Fig. 12) (eg. replacement of
seals) it is essential to place the shims (12J at the left
end of the shaft (factory fitting) to preserve the
correct positioning of the cam and avoid having to
adjust the sensor (26).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
6B01.8
le
,..7% rr
0
`- \11S
,
N
1
Fig. 12
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6B01.9
D. Refitting
53. Clean the joint face of the cover on the rear axle
housing.
54. Smear the joint face with a sealing compound
(Master Joint 510 Loctite or equivalent).
55. Lift cover into position.
Note : When refitting the cover, ensure that the
supply pipe of the differential lock and the
control finger (4-speed economy PTO) engage
properly in their respective positions (Fig. 14).
56. Mount the support for the PTO control cable
(depending on the version) and fit the bolts (24) of
the cover (10). Tighten to the following torque :
. 12mm diameter bolt = 72- 96 Nm
. 16mm diameter bolt = 160-200 Nm
Note : The 6190 tractor is fitted with a heavy
duty lift shaft. The tightening torque of 16 diam.
bolts is 240 - 320 Nm.
57. Refit the upper pins to the rams and lift rods. Refit
the trailer brake valve support if fitted. Retighten
the pipe at both ends.
58. Refit (Fig. 4) :
. the differential lock supply pipe (3)
. the cable (4) (4-speed PTO, if fitted)
59. Fit the vehicle speed sensor (15) with *Loctite 577
Sensor Sealing or equivalent (Autotronic,
Datatronic tractors) (Fig. 15).
60. Screw in the speed sensor into contact with the
crownwheel, without forcing it.
61. Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn so as to obtain a
clearance of approx. 1 mm between the sensor and
the crownwheel (Fig. 15).
62. Tighten the nut (16) moderately (Fig. 15).
it 0,5
Fig. 15
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
68. Smear the thread of the two lower screws (4) with
Loctite 510. Fit and tighten the bolts (4) in the spool
valve support to a torque of 50-70 Nm (Fig. 2).
69. Reconnect (Fig. 2) :
. the supply hose (1) to the spool valve
. the supply hose (3) to the lift valve
. the return hose (2)
70. Adjust the p.t.o. control (4-speed) (section 7 A01).
71. Remove the blocks between the cab supports and
the trumpets. Position the cab.
72. Refit the rear fastening screws of the cab. Tighten
the nuts to 27-35 Nm and the lock-nuts smeared
with Loctite 270 to 13-20 Nm.
73. Fit and adjust the position sensor.
74. Smear the thread of the sensor (26) with a sealing
compound (Hylomar or equivalent), then screw in
the sensor a few turns.
75. Start the engine.
76. Using the external control or pushing on the end of
the raising solenoid, make sure that the lift arms are
in the fully raised position (relief valve blowing).
Stop the engine.
77. Screw in the sensor (without forcing it) until it
meets the cam (9). Connect the sensor to the
female connector of a locally made test harness as
shown Fig. 17. Connect the other connector of the
test harness to the tractor harness. Connect pins
(1) and (2) to the MF 3005 multimeter. Lower the
lower links of 3 to 5 cm at the ball ends or hook.
Unscrew the sensor to obtain a voltage between
6.92 and 6.96 volts. Reconnect the tractor sensor.
78. Tighten the nut (25) to a torque of 25 Nm using a
suitable spanner (Fig. 18).
79. Check for leaks:
. at the joint between the lift cover and the spool
valve support
. at the hydraulic connectors.
1 . Earth
2 . Signal
3 . Sensor power supply 9.5 V
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6C01.1
CONTENTS
.
General
Issue 2
10
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Description
The trumpet housings support the RH and LH axle
shafts and house the final reduction units which transmit the drive from the differential assembly.
There are two versions of the rear axle, normal and
heavy duty, depending on the size of tractor : normal for
the 6110 to 6140 tractors and heavy duty for the 6150
to 6170 tractors.
The two trumpet housings are symmetrical and are
fitted on either side of the centre housing.
iTr
Shims [26] located at the end of the axle shaft allow the
taper roller bearing preload to be adjusted. The shaft (2)
and the planetary carrier assembly (10) are held by the
washer (25) and the bolt (24) . The ring gear (22) is a
force fit in the trumpet housing and attached by three
bolts (17) . It comprises three locating dowels (21)
which centre the brake plate (18) .
Drive from the differential is transmitted to the final
reduction planetary gears through a planetary shaft (23)
on to which the brake disc (19) is splined.
As from serial number E240024, the brake discs are
lubricated by a continuous oil flow from the lubricating
system (closed centre) (see General, section 6F01).
Construction
The half shaft (2) is supported by two taper roller
bearings (5) and (8) fitted opposite each other. The unit
is sealed on the outside by a triple lip seal /31and on the
inside by a single lip seal /71. The final reduction planetary carrier assembly (10) fitted with three pinions (14)
is splined onto the half shaft (2) .
The heavy duty planetary carrier assemblies comprise
two rows of needle rollers (16) separated by a spacer
(15) . The normal duty planetary carrier assemblies have
only one row of needle rollers (16) . The recesses in
carrier assemblies (10) are rough finished and require
adjustment with suitable thickness thrust washers
[13] .
List of parts
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
Planetary gear
Spacer (heavy duty planetary carrier assembly)
Needle rollers
Bolt
Brake plate
Brake disc
Bolt
Locating dowel
Ring gear
Planetary shaft
Bolt
Washer
[26] Shim(s)
(27) Locating dowel
(28) Plug
(1)
(2)
Wheel stud
Axle shaft
/31 Triple lip seals
(4) Seal housing
(5) Bearing cup
(5A) Bearing cone
(6) Trumpet housing
/71 Seal
(8) Bearing cup
(8A) Bearing cone
(9) Spur washer
(10) Planetary carrier assembly
(11) Circlip
(12) Planetary gear pin
[13] Thrust washer(s)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6C01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
6C01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6C01.5
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
16. Remove :
. the brake disc (19)
. the planetary shaft (23)
. the locating dowel (27)
Note : Prior to serial number E240024, to prevent the brake piston (C) from coming out of the
housing, it is recommended that two wide
washers and two bolts be fitted diametrically
opposite each other to hold it in place. (Fig.4)
17. Remove the brake plate (18) .
Refitment
18. Clean the mating faces of the centre housing and
the trumpet housing with a non-greasy solvent.
19. Apply a bead of oil resistant (Silicomet type) silicone
to the inner edge of the centre housing (Fig.5).
20. Check that the disk (19) slides freely on the plane-
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6C01.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Reassembly
Note: The planetary ring gear (22) is a tight fit in the
trumpet housing (6).
It is centred by the three locating dowels (21) (Loctite 638) and tightened by the three bolts (17) to a
torque of 79-90 Nm (Loctite 242).
9. Clean the seal contact surfaces, the cup seats and
the cones in the trumpet housing and on the shaft.
The seal, cup and cone contact surfaces must be
free from burrs and damage.
10. Coat the outside diameter of the seal /7\ with
Loctite 542 (metal cage).
Note: Fit the seal the correct way round.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
6C01.9
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lAr
26
//
: P1 = 0.025 to 0.125
\ \ \
Fig. 15
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6CO2.1
CONTENTS
. General
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Description
The Heavy Duty trumpets are fitted on 6180 and 6190
tractors. They support the RH and LH axle shafts and
house the final reduction units which transmit the drive
from the differential assembly.
The two trumpet housings are identical and are fitted on
either side of the centre housing.
Construction
The axle shaft (2) is supported by two taper roller
bearings (5) and (8) fitted opposite each other. The unit
is sealed on the outside by a triple lip seal /31 and on the
inside by a single lip seal /71. The final reduction planetary carrier assembly (21) fitted with three pinions (18)
is splined onto the axle shaft (2). Shims [22] located at
the end of the axle shaft allow the taper roller bearing
preload to be adjusted. The shaft (2) and the planetary
carrier assembly (21) are held by the washer (23) and
the bolt (24). The ring gear (10) is a force fit in the
trumpet housing. It comprises five locating dowels (9)
which centre the brake plate (26).
Drive from the differential is transmitted to the final
reduction planetary gears through a planetary shaft (25)
on to which the brake disc (27) is splined.
List of parts
(1) Wheel stud
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
[22]
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
Axle shaft
Triple lip seal
Seal housing
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Trumpet housing
/71 Seal
(8) Bearing cup
(8A) Bearing cone
(9) Locating dowel
(10) Planetary ring gear
(11) Spur washer
(12) Plug
(13) Bolt
(2)
/31
(4)
(5)
(5A)
(6)
Issue 2
December 1997
Spacer
Circlip
Planetary gear pin
Thrust washer
Planetary gear
Spacer
Needle roller
Planetary carrier
Shim(s)
Retaining washer
Bolt
Sun wheel
Brake plate
Brake disc
Locating dowel
Bolt
s
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6CO2.3
47,
oximcc
;
grurN N
4 ,
r
x7a. NO
r
*r-r4ri
Issue 1
r;4,
2teir."
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
6CO2.4
Issue 1
February 1995
14r
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6CO2.5
7. Disconnect the draft control sensor harness (without disconnecting the harness).
As from serial number E240024 (open centre),
disconnect the brake lubricating hose (1) or pipe
(11) (depending on the side concerned). (Fig. 1 B).
8. Remove the cab attaching bolts (A) with the nuts
(Fig.1).
9. Raise the cab slightly to lift the support spacer (B)
clear (Fig.1).
Important: Check the space between the bonnet and the windscreen.
10. Position a suitable support on a trolley jack under
the trumpet housing.
1 1. For the LH trumpet housing disconnect the lift
hydraulics valve supply hose (plug the ends).
12. Unscrew the attaching bolts (29).
13. Separate the trumpet housing from the rear axle
housing.
1 4. Remove :
. the brake disc (27)
. the planetary shaft (25)
. the locating dowel (28)
Note: Before serial number E240024, to prevent
the brake piston (C) from coming out of the
housing, it is recommended that two wide
washers and two bolts be fitted diametrically
opposite each other to hold it in place (Fig.2).
1 5. Remove the brake plate (26).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ta
Refitment
16. Clean the mating faces of the centre housing and
the trumpet housing with a non-greasy solvent.
17. Apply a bead of oil resistant silicone (Silicomet type)
to the inner edge of the centre housing (Fig.3).
18. Check that the disk (27) slides freely on the sun
gear (25) (Fig.4).
19. Refit the locating dowel (28), the planetary shaft
(25) and the brake disc (27).
20. Screw two dowel pins into diametrically opposite
positions on the centre housing.
21. Refit the brake plate (26) in the trumpet housing.
NOTE: To retain the plate, apply three spots of
"Amber Technical" or equivalent grease to the
surface of the ring gear (10).
22. Fit the trumpet housing to the centre housing.
Note: Turn the shaft (2) to engage the planetary
shaft (25) in the planetary gears (18)
23. Clean the bolts (32) and coat them with Plastex,
Hylomar or an equivalent gasket sealant.
24. Fit and tighten the bolts (29) to a torque of 170 210 Nm.
25. Carry out procedures 9 to 11 in reverse.
26. Refit the cab attaching bolts with the nuts and
locknuts to a torque of:
Nut : 27-35 Nm
Locknut : 13-20 Nm (with Loctite 270)
27. Reinstall the draught control sensor after lightly
smearing it with Loctite Anti-seize or equivalent.
Reconnectthe hose (1) or pipe (11) on the restrictor
union (3) (Fig. 1 B).
28. Carry out procedure 3 in reverse.
29. Reinstall the wheel. Tighten to a torque of 400 to 450
Nm and carry out procedure 3 in reverse.
30. Remove the axle stand.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW
6CO2.7
Reassembly
10. Clean the planetary carrier (21), the pins (16) and
the planetary gears (18). Check the condition of the
parts.
11. Coat the needle rollers (20) with 'Amber Technical"
or an equivalent grease. Into each planetary gear
(18) insert two rows of needle rollers separated by
a spacer (19).
Note: Each planetary gear has 56 needle rollers.
Fit
the planetary gears (18) and the thrust washers
12.
(17).
13. Fit three pins (16) with the circlip (15) (Fig.7).
14. Open out the circlip (15) (Fig.6).
15.Tap lightly on the three pins to insert the circlip (15)
into the planetary carrier groove (Fig.7).
16. Position one end of the circlip in contact with the pin
(16) (Fig.8)
17. Clean the threads of the bolt (13). Fit the spacer
(14). Coat the bolt (13) with Loctite 270 before
fitting. Tighten to a torque of 34 - 50 Nm (Fig.8).
18. Check that the spur washer (11) is fitted.
19. Refit the planetary carrier.
20. Fit shims to obtain the required preload (see
Section D).
21. Refit the trumpet housing (see Section A).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AO 0 0
Reassembly
9. Clean the seal contact surfaces, the cup seats and
the cones in the trumpet housing and on the shaft.
The seal, cup and cone contact surfaces must be
free from burrs and damage.
10.Coat the outside diameter of the seal /7\ with
Loctite 542.
Note: Fit the seal the correct way round.
1 1 . Replacement of seal /7\
a) Without replacing me shaft (2)
So that the seal lip is not in the same place on the
shaft, press on the seal until it is 9 mm from the
shoulder of the cup (Fig 9).
b) Replacing the shaft (2)
Position the seal 8 mm from the shoulder of the cup
(Fig.10).
12. Lubricate the cups (8) and (5) and press them fully
on to the shoulder.
13. Press the housing (4) to within 20 mm of the
trumpet housing (Fig.11).
14. Push the triple lip seal /3\ up against the shaft
shoulder.
Note: Ensure that the seal is fitted the correct
way round (Fig.11).
1 5. Lubricate the shaft (2) and press the cone (5A)
against the shoulder.
16. Lightly grease the cone (5A), the lips of seals /3\
and /7\ (use BP Agricharge or an equivalent grease).
Issue 1
February 1995
\t4te
siti
.446
-7
. ,1,
11 -
s'
mm
Fig. 10
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 12
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
71*.
age
6D01.1
6 DO1 Handbrake
CONTENTS
General
Operation
A. Disassembly
B. Reassembly
10
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
6D01.2
General
The handbrake assembly is fitted on the bevel drive
pinion. It consists of a mechanism placed between two
friction discs which are driven by the bevel drive pinion
via splines.
The mechanism comprises two cast iron plates held by
springs and separated by balls housed in cams.
Operation
When the handbrake lever in the cab is pulled, the cam
(14) is moved via the pin (20). The cam pushes the
actuator lever (13) which causes the plates of the
mechanism (31) to rotate and move apart. The discs
(30) are thus compressed between the moving plates,
the closing plate (24) and the supporting plate (29),
preventing the bevel drive pinion from rotating.
When the handbrake lever is released, the spring (17)
moves the cam (14) to the rest position and the mechanism is closed by its springs.
Issue 1
February 1995
List
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
/5\
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
[27]
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
of parts
Circlip
Pinion
Stud
Nut
Plate
Pin
Clevis
Pin
Cotter pin
Left cover
Plug
Seal Ring
Actuator lever
Cam
Circlip
Finger
Spring
Dowel
Seal ring
Control shaft
Retainer ring
Washer
Finger
Closing plate
Screw
Bevel drive pinion
Shim(s)
Screw
Supporting plate
Discs
Mechanism
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Apv
IRO
6D01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
Ar
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6D01.5
A. Disassembly
1. Drain the rear axle housing.
2. Block :
- the front wheels of the tractor
- between the engine frame and the front axle
(Fig. 1).
3. Raise the tractor with a jack.
4. Place props in position.
5. Remove the rear wheels.
6. Remove the right-hand hydraulic cover. Carry out
operations 2 to 14, section 9 101.
8. Drive out the double pins (2) and (4) of the coupling
sleeves (1) and (5). Slide the sleeves towards each
other on the pin (3).
Remove the pin and sleeve assembly (Fig. 2).
On 4RM tractors
If the double pins are not accessible, carry out
operations 9 to 12, section 5 D01.A.
9. Remove the circlip (1).
10. Remove the pinion (2) (if fitted).
.4111*".
VAVAIVAVAMEIIN
ppireir.
11E11111
1
111.1.
00
IK21.
0
Fig. 2
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Aye
6D01.6
22. Remove the closing plate (24) and the control shaft
(20).
Note: Keep the mechanism (31) and the brake
discs (30) towards the rear. Withdraw the dosing plate (24) (Fig. 4), inclining it in order to
disengage it from the dowel (18), the finger (23)
and the bevel drive pinion (26) and to release
the shaft (20) from the housing.
23. Remove the spring (17) and the washer (22).
24. Remove the retainer ring (21) (if necessary) on the
control shaft (20).
25. Remove the discs (30) and the mechanism (31).
In case of replacement of mechanism
26. Undo the nut (4), remove the plate /5\ and the pin
(6).
27. Remove the split pin (9), take out the pin (8) and the
clevis (7).
Note: The stud (3) is smeared with Loctite 270
and locked in the Bevis (7).
If replacement of the supporting plate (29) is unavoidable
28. Remove two diametrically opposed screws (28)
and screw in two guide studs (A) (Fig. 5). The
purpose of this is to hold the shims [27] (Fig. 6).
Unscrew
the two remaining screws.
29.
30. Remove the supporting plate.
Note: Check that the shims have all remained
on the housing.
The finger (16) smeared with Loctite 241 is
screwed into the cam (14). The finger (23) smeared with Loctite 241 is screwed into the supporting plate (29).
The dowel (18) is pushed fully home on the
shoulder of the closing plate (24).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lee
6D01.7
B. Reassembly
31. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
In case of replacement of supporting plate (29)
36. Refit the clevis (7) prepared with the stud (3) and
the pin (8). Replace the split pin (9).
37. Fit the lever (13) with its pin (6) on the stud (3) of
the clevis.
38. Refit the plate /5%, tighten the nut (4).
Note: The plate /51 is rectangular. It must be
positioned horizontally, lengthwise, on the pin
(6) in the lever (13) to be correct (Fig. 7).
39. Replace the discs (30), placing the mechanism (31)
between them.
Note: Fit the lever (13) on the finger (23). Check
that the discs slide freely on the bevel drive
pinion (261.
40. Place the retainer ring (21) (if removed) on the shaft
(20).
41. Fit the shaft (20) in the closing plate (24) with the
washer (22) and the spring (17).
11111/11'
011111
1,
;_micaletra,
1
1
43. Check that the discs (30) and the mechanism (31)
are correctly positioned.
44. Fit and tighten the screws (25) to a torque of 90 120 Nm.
45. Fit the cam (14) with its finger (16).
46. Fit the circlip (15). Replace the spring (17), positioning its ends E as indicated in Fig. 8.
Fit
the seal (19) supported by the housing (Fig. 9).
47.
I
Fig. 8
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
a : released position
b : maximum engaged position
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6D01.9
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
6D01.10
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
INO
6E01.1
6 E01 Differential
CONTENTS
- General
10
11
11
I.
J. Service tool
14
18
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The bevel crownwheel and pinion, whose movement is
provided by the output shaft of the gearbox, drives the
rear axle through a connecting shaft.
The helical bevel drive pinion is supported on either side
by taper roller bearings.
The bearing cones are force-fitted on the pinion, and
the rear bearing cup is also force-fitted in the rear axle
housing. The front bearing cup moves freely in its bore
to enable the shimming of the pinion.
The crownwheel is fixed to the differential housing by
rivets. The differential assembly turns on two taper
roller bearings supported by two side carriers screwed
on to the rear axle housing.
The differential assembly comprises two housing halves containing four planetary pinions and two sun
gears.
The pinion is fitted in the rear axle housing with a
preload obtained by means of shims placed between
the handbrake backing plate and the axle housing.
The shimming of the differential assembly is carried
out with deflectors (shims) of different thicknesses
placed behind the bearing cup of the left hand cup
bearing.
Differential lock
The left hand carrier houses the differential lock mechanism.
The system comprises a piston and a splined sliding
coupler rotating with the left sun gear. The piston acts
on the sliding coupler when pressure from the 17 bar
hydraulic circuit is supplied by the solenoid valve fitted
on the right hand cover. The piston moves, pushing the
sliding coupler and compressing the spring.
The teeth of the sliding coupler engage with a fixed
coupler attached to the differential housing. In this
position, the sun gears of the right and the left hand
trumpet housings turn at the same speed. When the
pressure is released, the coupler moves back towards
the rear under the influence of the spring.
(1) 0-ring
(2) Bolt
(3) 0-ring
(4) Circlip
(5) Piston
(6) Spring
(7) Sliding coupler
(8) 0-ring
(9) Left hand carrier
(10) Differential lock hydraulic assembly
(11) Thrust washer
(12) Finger
[13] Deflector (shim)
(14) Bearing cup
(15) Screw
(16) Coupler
(17) Bearing cone
(18) Washer
(19) Sun gear
(20) Planetary pinions
(21) Washer
(22) Cross joint
(23) Crownwheel
(24) Rivet
(25) Right hand carrier
(26) Bolt
(27) Bearing cup
(28) Bearing cone
(29) Crownwheel carrier
(30) Bearing cone
(31) Bearing cone
(32) Bolt
(33) Bearing cup
(34) Bevel drive pinion
(35) Supporting plate
[36] Shim(s)
(37) Bearing cup
(38) Pipe
(39) Connector
(40) Differential lock supply tube
(41) Oil deflector
Specifications
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
6E01.3
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
6E01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.5
Special points
On tractors equipped with a closed centre hydraulic
circuit, bolt "V" (Fig. 5A) also supports the return tube
(1) from the auxiliary spool valves inside the centre
housing (Fig. 1 B).
On tractors with economy 4-speed PTO, continue with
disassembly by removing the top link support, the
compound pinion and the fork (see section 7A01).
Loosen the bolts (2) alternately so as to release the
spring (6) gradually.
4. Remove the carrier (9), the washer (11), the sliding
coupler (7) and the spring.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Reassembly
1 0. Check the parts and replace any which are defective.
1 1 . Clean the finger (12), smear it with Loctite 221,
then fit and tighten it on the carrier (9).
1 2. Smear the 0-rings (3) and (8) with miscible grease
(Amber Technical or equivalent), in order to retain
them correctly in the bottom of their respective
grooves.
13. Using a plastic mallet, fit the piston (5) back in the
carrier (9) (Fig. 3), paying attention to the position of
the finger (12).
1 4. Fit the circlip (4), the deflector [13] ensuring that it
is fitted the right way round and the bearing cup
(14) (Fig. 4).
AII
I Iri
QIII01111111111
quift
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.7
Leak test
After working on the piston (5), the seals (3) and (8) and
the carrier (9), it is necessary to check the assembly for
leaks.
20. Fit a pressure gauge and valve on the supply
connector (39)(Fig. 6).
21. Feed compressed air at approximately 5 bar into
the system in order to position the piston and 0rings correctly.
Reduce the pressure to 0.3 bar to carry out the leak
test.
22. Close the valve. Over 1 minute the pressure gauge
should not show any drop in pressure.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.9
E. Disassembly of differential
assembly and crownwheel
43. Place the assembly on a workbench.
44. Remove the bearing cones (17) - (28) and the cup
(27).
Remove
the screws (15).
45.
46. Remove the fixed coupler (16).
47. Separate the two parts of the housing (29).
Note: These pieces each have the same number. They must be paired.
48. Remove the washers (18), the sun gears (19), the
planetary pinions (20), the washers (21) and the
cross joint (22) (Fig. 10).
Note: When the crownwheel is replaced, the
bevel drive pinion must be replaced as well.
These pieces each have the same number and
must be paired.
In the factory the crownwheel and the carrier
are assembled by means of rivets.
For the purposes of repair, the rivets are replaced with screws and nuts.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ime
6E01.10
14r
On 4WD tractors
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.11
(23) and of the carrier (29) and the screws and nuts
referred to in the spare parts catalogue.
68. Smear the screws (1) (Fig. 15) with Loctite 270 on
the first threads and place them in the crownwheel
and carrier.
69. Tighten and lock the nuts (2) (Fig. 15) to a torque of
150 -160 Nm.
Refitting
76. Smear the oil deflector (41) with Loctite 648 and
position it in the bore in the housing (Fig. 16).
Note: The oil deflector (41) must be fitted so
that it is flush with face F. Position the hole T so
that the lubricating pipe can be assembled
(if fitted).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
m0-
6E01.12
79. Fit the shims [42] selected in operation 77. Fit the
drive pinion and cup (33).
Note: It is mandatory to carry out the adjustment
of the conical distance (on 6190 tractors only)
before the adjustment of preload P1.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.13
42
P1 =0.05 to 0.12
1st method: (rear axle on tractor or on a support)
84.Place the tip of a dial indicator against the drive
F
Fig. 17
P1 = 0,05 / 0,12
r
I
Orclte
e $
Fig. 18
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
m10
6E01.14
P2 = zero to +0.25
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.15
Dots
Reference
187 689 M1
892 173 M1
892 172 M1
892 171 M1
892 170 M1
191 124 M1
191 125 M1
521 401 M1
Number of
dots
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
mm
0.73 - 0.78
0.864 - 0.914
0.991 - 1.041
1.118 - 1.168
1.245 - 1.295
1.37 -1.42
1.49 - 1.54
0.61 - 0.66
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Lie
6E01.16
106.
APT
107.
108.
J2 = 0.15 to 0.40
110.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6E01.17
Refit the gear (2) (if mounted ) and the circlip (1)
(Fig. 29).
116.
119.
125.
126.
127.
128.
link support.
Tractors with 2-speed PTO
See section 7A01, Part A.
129.
130.
123.
wiring harnesses with a clamp. Reinstall the lefthand brake piston (see section 6F01, Part B).
Refit the fuel tank.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
10
6E01.18
J. Service tools
1. Tool available from MF network
Shimming tool 3376847 M91 (Fig. 30).
30
20
VA,
90
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
iT
6F01.1
CONTENTS
- General
A. Disassembly
B. Reassembly
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4PY
General
The brake pistons are housed in two lateral cavities of
the rear axle housing, concentric with the supporting
face of each trumpet housing (see 6A01, page 4).
They comprise a shouldered part and are guided by
3 dowels force-fitted in the housing.
Sealing is provided by 2 0-rings mounted in grooves of
the rear axle housing. Each piston is controlled by a
master cylinder supplied by a residual oil flow coming
from the 17 bar valve or from the distribution block via
the manifold (closed centre), according to the version.
Each piston acts directly on a friction disc mounted on
the planetary shaft at the entrance of the trumpet
housing and a backplate centred by dowels and supported on the ring gear of the final drive unit. When the
brake is released, a self-adjusting device fitted as from
serial number E275051 ensures a minimal clearance
between the piston and the brake disc and maintains a
constant pedal travel.
i
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6F01.3
A . Disassembly
6110 to 6170 Tractors
1. Remove the trumpet housing. Carry out operations
1 to 15, chapter 6 C01.A.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ar
B . Reassembly
7. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
Note : To ensure that the brake self-adjusting
system operates correctly from serial number
E275051 to serial number E326018, it is
mandatory to centre the RH and LH differential
flanges with a locally manufactured tool: see
chapter 6C01, parts C and I.
8. Fit the piston (1) without seals in the housing (2)
(Fig. 5). Check that the piston slides freely in the
bore in the housing and that it fits onto the centring
dowels (3) without any friction points. After carrying
out this check, remove the piston.
9. Fit spring pins (4) at about 8 mm from machined face
" F " of the piston (Fig. 3A). Fit new 0-rings (1) and
(2) (Fig. 6) after smearing them with a moderate
quantity of miscible grease so that they remain at
the bottom of the groove.
10. Position the piston over the dowels, then fit it in to
place with the aid of a plastic mallet, striking
alternate points around the circumference (Fig. 7A).
Fit the bolts (3) (Fig. 7B) after lightly smearing them
with Loctite 241 and tighten them to a torque of
10 Nm with the locally manufactured socket.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6F01.5
11. Hold the piston with two large washers and two
screws diametrically opposed (Fig. 8).
Leak test (operations 12 to 15, Fig. 8).
If work is carried out on the brake piston and 0-rings, it
is necessary to check for leaks.
12. Fit a pressure gauge to the connector (2).
22. To each vent screw (1) on the left and right hand of
the rear axle housing attach a transparent hose (int.
dia. 6 mm) (Fig. 9).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6F01.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
i
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
age
7 . POWER TAKE-OFF
Contents
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
7A01.1
CONTENTS
General
Operation
A.
B.
C.
10
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AV
7A01.2
17k
Power Take Off - Inteee shaft - Driving pinion - PTO brake
6100 SERIES TRACTORS
Power-take-off
4-speed 2-speed
General
The drive from the engine is transmitted to the powertake-off clutch mounted at the front of the centre
housing.
The intermediate shaft (2) is connected by splines at
one end to the clutch and at the other end either to the
double pinion (13) in the 2-speed PTO version or to the
coupler (31) in the 4-speed economy PTO version.
The compound pinion (13) turns on two taper roller
bearings (3) (4) and (7) (8), mounted in the bore of the
centre housing and the top link support (10) respectively.
A piston (9) housed in the 3rd point support and
controlled by the 17 bar hydraulic circuit enables the
compound pinion (13) to be braked when the control
lever is moved to the PTO braking position.
Operation
2-speed PTO
When the PTO solenoid valve feeds the clutch, the
intermediate shaft (2) is driven. This in turn drives the
compound driving pinion (13) which engages constantly with the 540 rpm and 1000 rpm pinions of the lower
line.
4-speed PTO
This feature enables speeds of 540 rpm or 1000 rpm to
be obtained with an engine speed of 1550 rpm.
Clutch
Intermediate shaft
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Washer
/61 Bolt
(7) Bearing cone
(8) Bearing cup
(9) Brake piston
(10) Top link support
[11] Shims
(12) 0-ring
(13) Driving pinion
(14) Compound pinion assembly
(15) Deflector
(16) Washer
(17) Needle roller bearing
(18) Compound pinion
(19) Spacer
(20) Needle roller bearing
(21) Washer
(22) Set screw
(23) Shaft
(24) Locking screw
(25) Nut
(26) Fork
(27) Screw
(28) Needle roller bearing
(29) Circlip
(30) Ring
(31) Dog tooth coupler
(32) Circlip
(33) Washer
(34) Dog tooth pinion
(35) Shaft
(36) Cup plug
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Powet4ake-off brake
The nob put in PTO position acts on an electrical
contactor which enables the solenoid valve of the PTO
brake mounted on the right cover to open. Oil is
supplied to the chamber situated behind the piston (9).
The piston moves and presses the bearing cup (8)
against the bearing cone (7), progressively
immobilising the driving pinion (13) which constantly
engages with the 540 and 1000 rpm pinions.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AT
7A01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Age
7A01.5
1. Disconnect (Fig. 1) :
. the auxiliary spool valve supply hose (1)
. the supply hose of the lift valve (3)
. the return hose (2)
2. Remove the bolts (4) of the auxiliary spool valve
support (5) (Fig. 1).
3. Detach the auxiliary spool valve support.
Note: Tilt the support and auxiliary spool valve
assembly without detaching the control cables
(1) (Fig. 2).
4. Disconnect the supply tube (1) of the PTO brake
(Fig. 3).
5. Disconnect the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3).
6. Remove the bolts (3) and the top link support (10)
(Fig. 3).
7. Withdraw the pinion (13) and shaft (2) assembly
held by the washer (5) and screw /61. Remove the
bearing cone (4).
Note: The shaft (2) is mounted in the clutch (1)
without locking screw.
Reassembly
8. Check and clean the parts. Replace those which are
defective.
9. Refit the bearing cone (4). Fit the pinion (13) and
shaft (2) assembly held by the washer (5) and
screw /61.
10. Clean the joint face of the top link support.
1 1 . Smear the joint face of the housing with a sealing
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
Note: To ensure the lubrication of the bearing
cone (7), a cup plug (36) is fitted without Loctite,
recessed into the face of the housing.
12. Refit the top link support (10). Fit and tighten the
bolts (3) to a torque of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 3).
Note: Ensure that the cup (8) is present.
13. Reconnect the supply tube of the PTO brake (1) and
the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3).
14. Clean the joint face of the spool valve support.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Disassembly
21. Remove the lift cover. See section 6B01.
22. Disconnect the supply tube (1) from the PTO brake
(Fig. 3).
23. Disconnect the lubrication tube (4) (Fig. 3).
24. Remove the bolts (3) of the top link support
(Fig. 3) and detach it.
25. Withdraw the pinion (13) and shaft (2) assembly
held by the washer (5) and bolt /6\.
Note : The shaft (2) is mounted in the clutch (1)
without locking screw.
26. Remove the screw /6\ and the washer (5).
Fig. 5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AY-
7A01.7
Reassembly
29. Check and clean the parts. Replace those which are
defective.
30. Place the deflector (15) on the pinion (13). Push the
bearing cone (7) on as far as the shoulder with the
aid of a press (Fig. 6).
Lubricate the bearing cone (4) and place it in the cup
(3).
Note: if replacing the cup (3), refit the 540/1000
rpm pinions. See section 7B01. Top up the oil of
the rear axle housing.
31. Withdraw the piston (9) from the top link support
(10).
32. Remove the shims [11] and the 0-ring (12) in order
to prepare for shimmng J1.
33. Fit the piston (9) (without 0-ring) and the cup (8) in
the support (10).
34. Lubricate the cup and the bearing cone (7).
35. Fit the pinion (13) in the housing.
36. Refit the top link support.
Tighten the bolts to a torque of 130 -170 Nm.
37. Carry out shimming (Fig. 7) to obtain :
J1 = -0.05 to +0.05.
38. Place the tip of the dial gauge against the end of the
pinion (13) (Fig. 8).
39. Pull on the pinion, turning it alternately from right to
left, so as to compress the deflector (15), to seat
the bearing cone (7) correctly in the cup (8).
40. Set the dial gauge to zero.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
7A01.9
66. Remove the nut (25) and the locking screw (24) of
the fork (26).
Remove
the screw (22) (Fig. 11).
67.
68. Withdraw the shaft (23) from the compound pinion
assembly (14) in order to disengage the fork (26).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigre
7A01.10 Power Take Off - Inter* shaft - Driving pinion - PTO brake
80. In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the
needle roller bearings (17) and (20). Position the
compound pinion assembly (14). Fit the washer
(16) smeared with miscible grease (Amber Technical or equivalent).
81. Lightly engage the shaft (23) to hold the washer
(16) in place. Fit the washer (21) smeared with
miscible grease. Centre the compound pinion
assembly (14).
82. Mount the shaft (23) finally in the pinion assembly
(14) and in the fork (26), ensuring that the hole of
the screw (22) is properly positioned.
83. Smear the screw (22) with Loctite 542. Fit and
tighten to a torque of 28-43 Nm.
84. Clean the joint face of the top link support.
85. Smear the joint face of the housing with a sealing
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
86. Ensure that the cup (8) is present. Fit and tighten
the bolts (3) to a torque of 130-170 Nm (Fig. 10).
87. Reconnect the tubes (1) and (4) (Fig. 10).
88. Refit the screw (24) and the nut (25) on the fork
(26).
89. Adjustment of locking of fork (26) (Fig. 14) :
. Position the fork (26) and the locking screw (24)
on the flat part M of the shaft (23) (between the
two locking notches). Tighten the screw as far as
it will go so as to compress the ball.
. Loosen the screw by 1/4 of a turn. Smear the nut
(25) with Loctite 241. Tighten to a torque of 15-20
Nm.
. Check that the fork is locked correctly.
90. Adjust the control. See E.
91. Clean the joint face of the spool valve support.
92. Smear the joint face of the support with a sealing
compound (Loctite 510 or equivalent).
93. Refit the support, tilting it, with the control cables
(1) (Fig. 2).
94. Smear the threads of the two lower bolts (4) with
Loctite 510. Tighten the four screws to a torque of
50-70 Nm (Fig. 1).
95. Reconnect the hoses (1) (2) (3) (Fig. 1).
96. If the screw (27) and intermediate shaft (2) have
been removed, refit the left side cover. Carry out
operations 7 to 20, section 9102.
97. Check the operation of the PTO and its brake.
Note: Shimming J1 must be carried out when working on the following parts: Pinion (13), deflector
(15), bearing cones (4) (7), cups (3) (8), piston (9), top
link support (10).
For correct shimming of the bearing cones (4) (7)
and of the cups (3) (8), it is necessary to remove the
lift cover.
Disassembly
99. Remove the lift cover. See section 6 B01.
100. Remove the PTO gears. Carry out operations 59
to 72.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vgr
7A01.11
101. Separate the pinion (13) from the shaft (35) with
the aid of a press and a suitable tool (Fig. 15).
Reassembly
110. In the pinion (18), place the spacer (19) and the
needle roller bearings (17) and (20). Position the
compound pinion assembly (14). Fit the washer
(16) smeared with miscible grease (Amber Technical or equivalent).
GOMM
IMMO
1111111
Issue 2
Fig. 17
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
125. Attach the clevis (1)to the lever Lwith the clip (7).
Tighten the nut (2).
126. Adjust the cable stop (5), the nut (3) to the end of
the thread.
127. Tighten the nut (4), checking that the cable is not
restricted.
128. Put the lever M into the Economic-1550 r.p.m.
position (a) as in Fig. 20 (stop in contact with the
compound pinion, fork locked)
129. Screw on the clevis (1) to the end of the cable
thread (6) and attach it to the lever M with the clip
(7). Tighten the nut (2).
130. Adjust the cable stop (5), ensuring that the lever
M remains locked.
131 Tighten the nuts (3) (4), checking that the cable
is not restricted.
132 Test the locking mechanism of the lever in the
position 2000 r.p.m. (b) and verify that the
dashboard indicator operates correctly.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Ale
7801.1
CONTENTS
- General
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
7E301.2
14r
General
The driven gears (5) and (6) are fitted on the PTO shaft
situated in the lower rear part of the axle housing. These
gears constantly engage with the driving compound
gear which is driven by the upper shaft whose movement is transmitted by the PTO clutch.
The PTO shaft (10) is fitted at the front on a roller
bearing (1) force-fitted in the axle housing and at the
rear on a hub (9) turning on a roller bearing (15).
It has 6 splines in the 540 rpm version and 21 splines in
the 1000 rpm version.
In the 540 rpm configuration, the gear (5) is driven
through the splines of shaft (10). The gear (6) and bush
(4) assembly runs idle on the shaft (10).
In the 1000 rpm configuration, the gear (6) is driven via
the splines of shaft (10). The gear (5) and shaft (3)
assembly runs idle on the shaft (10).
The snap ring (20) holds the shaft in place.
Sealing is provided by the seal /14\ or /14A\ and the 0rings (11) and (19). The deflector (13) ensures protection against foreign material.
Parts list
(1) Roller bearing
(2) Deflector
(3) Bush
(4) Bush
(5) 540 rpm gear
(6) 1000 rpm gear
(7) Circlip
(8) Snap ring
(9) Hub
(10) 540 or 1000 rpm p.t.o. shaft
(11) 0-ring
(12) Cover
(13) Deflector
/14\ Sealing ring
/14A\ Reinforced sealing ring
(15) Roller bearing
(16) Bolt
(17) PTO speed sensor
(18) Nut
(19) 0-ring
(20) Snap ring
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
PTO shaft
age
7801.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
7B01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7B01.5
Refitting
12. Mount the shaft and rear bearing assembly (Fig. 4).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Reassembly
Version a (Fig. 5)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
le
7B01.7
33. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which are
defective.
34. Smear Loctite 648 on the face of the deflector (2)
which meets the housing and place it in its hole.
Position so that the aperture faces upward (Fig. 7).
35. Fit the roller bearing (1) in the housing abutting on
the deflector (2).
36. Lubricate the bushes (3) and (4).
37. Refit the gears (5) and (6) and screw two guide
studs against the gear (6). The purpose of this is to
hold the gears in line (Fig. 3) when refitting the rear
cover assembly.
Note: If the bushes (3) and (4) are damaged,
replace the gears (5) and (6).
38. Refit the rear cover assembly by carrying out
operations 12 to 15.
39. Smear Loctite Form A gasket 2 (sensor sealing or
equivalent) on the thread of the PTO sensor. Fit and
adjust the sensor:
a) Screw the sensor fully in, without forcing it, so
that it is in contact with the gear (6).
b) Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn.
c)Tighten the nut (18) moderately and connect the
harness.
Refit the LH cylinder, reassemble the lower fastening and reconnect the supply hose.
Refit the driving gear with the intermediate shaft
and the top link support.
Issue 1
February '1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ile
7C01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
External controls
E.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ate
7C01.2
General
The driven gears (4) and (7) are fitted on the p.t.o. shaft
(13) situated in the lower rear part of the axle housing.
These gears constantly engage with the driving compound gear which is driven by the upper shaft whose
movement is transmitted by the p.t.o. clutch.
The p.t.o. shaft is fitted free in the roller bearing /2\ and
is force-fitted in the roller bearing (10) which are fitted
in the axle housing and in the cover (14) respectively.
The hub coupler (6) is driven by the splined shaft (13).
The gears (4) and (7) drive the shaft when the coupler
(5) is moved towards the front (540 rpm) or the rear
(1000 rpm). When one of the gear (4) or (7), equipped
with bushes (19) and (20) respectively, is passive, it
rotates either on the bush /3\ or on the shaft (13).
A fork (25) fitted on a selector rail (22) enables speed
selection (540 or 1000 rpm).
Sealing is by means of a seal /11\ or /11A\ and the 0-ring
(18). The deflector (12) ensures protection against
foreign materiel.
Issue 2
Deflector
(1)
/2\
Roller bearing
/3\ Bush
(4) 540 rpm gear
(5) Coupler
(6) Hub
(7) 1000 rpm gear
(8) Circlip
(9) Retainer ring
(10) Roller bearing
/11\ Seal
/11A\ Reinforced seal
(12) Deflector
(13) PTO shaft
(14) Cover
(15) Screw
(16) Sensor
(17)
Nut
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
0-ring
Bush
Bush
Lever
Selector rail
0-ring
Pad
Fork
Set screw
Pad
Plug
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7C01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7C01.5
t
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Reassembly
Version a (Fig. 4)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7C01.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
7C01.8
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7C01.9
--.7.10i .er121
l
,r
ytill
11!:
i
e'k
ilr
i 6f
/
meism
:
2
li il
. I: ,
v-pr .
, , "l'Argr
Icomeozr
--.;.
Are, - 74
11
==1:2
F.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7D01. 1
CONTENTS
- General
11
12
13
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
List of parts
Operation
2WD
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
[21]
Issue 2
October 1996
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
Plug
Circlip
Pinion
Circlip
Ball bearing
Circlip
Circlip
Shaft
Circlip
Coupler
Screw
Cover
Needle roller bearing
Bearing cup
Bearingcone
Gear
Circlip
2WD shaft
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Shim(s)
Spacer
Circlip
Plug
Double pin
Double pin
Sleeve
Sleeve
Shaft
Circlip
Gear
4WD shaft
Transfer gear
4WD
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
me
7D01.3
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Issue 1
7D01.5
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ase
7D01. 7
Fig. 2
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ise
7D01.8
35. Remove the fork, the sleeve assembly, the connecting shaft and the coupler.
36. Remove the circlip (30).
37. Remove the gear (31).
30. Drive the double pins (25) and (26) from the
sleeves (27) and (28).
Slide
the sleeves towards one another on the shaft
31.
(29).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
7D01.9
49. Check that the needle roller bearing (13 )is present.
50. In order to be able to turn the shaft to carry out spacing
J1, do not mount the gear (16).
Position the cone(15). Fit the shaft (18) assembled with
the cone (19) and the circlip (17).
51. Refit the cup (20), the spacer(22) and the circlip (23).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
7D01.10
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ave
7D01.11
80. Remove the guide studs. Fit and tighten the screws
to a torque of 130 -170 Nm.
81. Reconnect the G.S. PTO control cable (1) (Fig. 2).
82. Adjust the control (see E).
If the right hand hydraulic cover has been removed,
carry out operations 83 to 85.
83. Lift the tractor with a trolley jack.
84. Refit the wheel. Remove the prop and the jack.
85. Tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400-450 Nm.
86. Replenish transmission oil.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
101.Refit the fork, the sleeve assembly, the connecting shaft and the coupler. Carry out operations 22
to 31 in section 5D01.A.
Tractors without creeper gears
102.Refit the gear (31) and refit the circlip (30).
103.Refit the assembly (connecting shaft and sleeves), then position the sleeves (27) and (28) on the
shaft (29).
104.Fit two new double pins (25) and (26) on the
sleeves.
Fig. 12
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ate
7D01.13
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
!Ay
7E01.1
CONTENTS
- General
- Operation
D. Service tool
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
LW'
7E01.2
General
The power-take-off clutch, fitted at the front of the rear
axle housing, is driven by a shaft connected via splines
to the main clutch input shaft which is driven by the
flywheel. The PTO clutch drive shaft passes through
the primary shaft of the gearbox, the Speedshift or
Dynashift, the reverse shuttle and the layshaft.
The clutch assembly is composed of the following
principal components :
- A housing (9) supported by two ball bearings (2) and
(7) separated by a sleeve (4) centred in a hole in the
centre housing. The sleeve (27) supports the ball
bearing (22), the drive hub (21) and piston (10).
- A clutch housing (15) comprising a pack of discs (17)
and inter-mediate plates (14) is fitted on the support
housing.
The housing (9) has exterior helical teeth which drive
the gear of the hydraulic pump. The roller bearings and
the plates are lubricated.
The clutch has 3, 4 or 5 plates, depending on the
version.
PTO engagement
The clutch is fed by the 17 bar hydraulic circuit through
the PTO solenoid valve situated on the right side cover.
The oil enters the support housing (9) through channels
a and c, and chamber b. It pushes the piston (10) which
presses the outer plates (14) against the inner plates
(17). The outer plates (14) have lugs which are driven by
the clutch housing (15) and the inner plates (17) drive
the hub (21), which is splined to the intermediate shaft
which is in turn splined to the PTO compound gear. At
the same time the pressure which was acting on the
PTO brake piston is cut off, enabling the 540 and 1000
rpm gears to turn freely. When the clutch is engaged,
the plates are cooled and lubricated.
PTO braking
When the supply is cut off, the spring (18) pushes the
piston against the housing (9).
When the button is in the PTO brake position in the cab,
the solenoid valve for the PTO brake directs the oil to
the PTO brake situated in the top link support. The
pressure acts on a piston which supports the cup on the
rear taper roller bearing, progressively stopping the
driving gear.
Note:
The clutch control shaft has been modified as from
serial No. F037019 (Fig. A).
Fit the longer end "E" or the paint mark "P"
pointing towards the input unit.
MI,
.:=
11 1
XI
r/A,
ve,
ln.0.6
x4jjah,. Np
r=11
141 Altradr.
101\
IrAkorPrarAlear Allre
Any
111:0
1==
41,0/
alk lejakliklMork\.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
7E01.3
General arrangement
no.
VIIIMEGODIII
r
''.
;11/4
tz
45:1*,
'
,r4741
42.
(C)
0 0 OD 43
kar70,
0
0
k
[S,`UM
`110)0
&.. tar
-mom
0:o.
Nii.":&im. PP, Al&12"41eia ironsiiMMeA
lP
IIIIIr mai
rimenaTiii
0 A 090# 02 0060
Circlip
Ball bearing
0-ring
Sleeve
Seal rings
0-ring
Ball bearing
Valve
Support housing
Piston
0-ring
Belleville washer
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Retainer
Outer plate
A : 3-plate clutch
B : 4-plate clutch
C : 5-plate clutch
Clutch housing
Bolt
Inner plate
A : 3-plate clutch
B : 4-plate clutch
C : 5-plate clutch
Spring
Issuei
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
e
Spring seat
Securing ring
Hub
Ball bearing
Washer
Screw
0-ring
0-ring
Sleeve
Spacer, 3- and 4-plate type
Spacer, 3-plate type
Pins
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mot
7E01.4
Issuel
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW-
7E01.5
.,:t
ilic
e-amcpaluex-,44,4 i
_Aaizeiz
---_,w=
10
IR oir17:77
i
ris_
Refitting
4. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which are
defective.
5. Check that the 0-rings (2) and (4) (Fig. 1) have not
deteriorated.
,,,
,,..,...7
.,...:.iiii::.; i
Refitting
Removal
1 2. Remove the left side cover. Carry out operations 1
1 6. Check that the 0-rings (2) and (4) (Fig. 1) have not
deteriorated.
to 6, section 9 102
1 3. Remove the top link support, the compound gear
and the intermediate shaft. Carry out operations 60
to 68 and 72 to 78, section 7 A01.
14. Remove the retaining screw (3) of the clutch (1).
Remove the clutch and the spring (5) (Fig. 1).
Issuel
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
7E01.6
18. Clean the screw and smear it with Loctite 221 and
tighten it with a ring spanner (Fig. 1).
19. Refit the intermediate shaft, the compound gear
and the top link support. Carry out operations 80 to
82 and 85 to 98, section 7 A01.
20. Replace the left cover. Carry out operations 7 to 19,
section 9102.
21. Check the operation of the clutch, the PTO brake
and of the hydraulic lift.
Check
for leaks :
22.
- at the joint faces (spool valve support, top link
support, left side cover)
- at the hydraulic connectors.
Issuel
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
7E01.7
Reassembly
Note: The valve (8) is fitted in the support housing
(51.
The sleeve (27), smeared with Loctite 648 (Fig. 6) is
fitted with a press. If disassembly proves necessary,
check when reassembling that the channel is not
obstructed with Loctite.
Two pins (30) are fitted in the support housing (9) 5
mm from the face (Fig. 7).
37. Clean and check the parts. Replace those which are
defective.
38. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball
bearing (7) in until it meets the shoulder.
38. Place the seal rings /5\ in their grooves and join up
the ends (Fig. 8). Ensure that they turn freely.
40. Slide the sleeve (4) on to the seal rings, taking care
not to damage them.
Note: Position the larger diameter end of the
sleeve towards the ball bearing (7).
41. Using a suitable device and a press, push the ball
bearing (2) in until it meets the shoulder of the
support housing (9) (Fig. 9).
Fit
the circlip (1).
42.
43. Replace and lubricate the 0-rings (11), (25) and
(26).
Fig. 7
Issue1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mot
7E01.8
44. Lubricate the sleeve (27) and the piston (10) and
insert into the housing with a plastic mallet (Fig. 10).
45. Using a suitable device and a press, insert the ball
bearing (22) into the hub (21). Fit the securing ring
(20).
47. Compress the spring (18) with the tool (Fig. 5).
Mount the washer (23) and tighten the screw (24)
smeared with Loctite 242 to a torque of 24 -28 Nm.
48. Place the spacers, the outer plates and the inner
plates (according to the type) on the hub (21).
49. Position the clutch housing (15) on the two pins
(30). Fit the bolts (16) lightly smeared with Loctite
542 and tighten them to a torque of 24 - 28 Nm.
50. Manually check that the inner plates and outer
plates do not bind together.
51. Lubricate and fit the 0-rings (3) and (6).
Note : The 0-rings have different diameters.
E.
co
Fig. 9
Service tool
Fig. 10
R:6
21
146,5 242
08
111111111M1
INIEW1111111111111
la 45'
1160
64
Issuel
February 1995
0581.5
092
M6
M6
Fig. 11
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8 . FRONT AXLE
Contents
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
8A01.1
CONTENTS
- General
B. Disassembly of clutch
C. Reassembly of clutch
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Imo
8A01.2
Front axle
- 4 WD clutch assembly
General
The clutch assembly for the drive to the front axle is
mounted in the lower part of the rear axle housing. An
inspection cover placed under the housing provides
access to the unit which comprises :
- A shaft (25) turning on two taper roller bearings
mounted in the bore of the centre housing.
- A hydraulic clutch assembly mounted on the shaft.
- A transfer gear (15) centred on the shaft by a bush
(43), driving the clutch plates (36).
The transfer gear (15) has helical teeth and engages
constantly with the gear (7) fitted on the bevel drive
pinion.
The shaft is fitted with shims [20] placed between the
cap (22) and the cup (18) so as to obtain play of 0 to
+0.10 mm.
Operation
Disengaging
The 4WD solenoid valve sends oil at a pressure of 17 bar
via a gallery in the centre housing, through bush (11)
into the drilling in shaft (25).
The piston (30) is forced by oil pressure along hub (4.0)
and pulls drum (42) which compresses the Belleville
washers /34\ and /351 releasing plates (36). The
transfer gear (15) then runs freely on bush (43).
Engaging
With the solenoid valve releasing the oil pressure, the
Belleville washers push back the drum (42) which
through the plates locks up with transfer gear (15) and
drives shaft (25). The returning oil is dumped back into
the centre housing.
Issue 1
February 1995
List of parts
(1) Sleeve
(2) Double pin
(3) Shaft
(4) Double pin
(5) Sleeve
(6) Circlip
(7) Gear
(8) Plug
(9) Needle roller bearing
(10) Bolt
(11) Bush
/12\ Seal rings
(13) Bearing cup
(14) Bearing cone
(15) Transfer gear
(16) Clutch assembly
(17) Cover
(18) Bearing cup
(19) Bearing cone
[20] Shim(s)
(21) 0-ring
(22) Cap
(23) Circlip
(24) Seal
(25) 4WD drive shaft
(26) Seal
(27) Locking screw
(28) Flange
(29) 0-ring
(30) Piston
(31) Circlip
(32) 0-ring
(33) 0-ring
/341 Belleville washer
/351 Belleville washer
(36) Outer plate
A : 4-plate clutch
B : 5-plate clutch
(37) Inner plate
A : 4-plate clutch
B : 5-plate clutch
(38) Cover
(39) Circlip
(40) Hub
[41] Shim(s)
(42) Drum
(43) Bush
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
N7,
vN 13 3 ; 1411%.
,,i./. 1e
8A01.3
iiiio
.....,
fille"
_.
:
AIN N.
Milt
..
.&.N-Ira
-2,71:11
0 mm
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
age
8A01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8A01.5
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Emission 2
Juin 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8A01.7
39. Position the hub (40) in the bell (42) so that it bears
against the Belleville washers.
40. Fit the discs (36), aligning the lugs. Fit the backing
plates (37). Install the cover (38).
Note : Discs (36) with thicker reinforcement (2
mm instead of 1.8 mm) were introduced on
tractors from the following serial number
onwards:
Tractors with proportional PTO
- D157019 6170
- D158004 6180
Tractors without proportional PTO
- D3280516110 to 6160
Tractors of type 6190 with or without
proportional PTO
3619473M01
3619147M01
2 0.05 mm thick
1.4 or 1.7 mm thick
Washers /3414351
Discs (36)
Splined shims [41]
cannelees
J1 = 0,9/ 1,1 al
M. P.., w
VAI
Heavy duty
clutch
Standard
clutch
41
rl
I111
,111M,
ao...:
/1/11111.111111411M.INI
111111.1
/..
I":1,1
Fig. 7
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
8A01.8
14r
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ow'
8A01.9
58. Fit the cone (14), the shaft (25) and cup (18), so as
to seat the cones correctly in the bearing cups and
obtain the following play:
J2 = 0 to 0.10 mm.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71. Fit the cap (22) and circlip (23). Remove the protection from the splines on the shaft.
72.0n tractors with heavy duty sealing: grease and
install the seal (26) with its lip facing the cap (22).
Remove the protection.
73. Fit the flange (28) and ensure that there is
functional play between the flange and the
housing.
74. Tighten bolt (27) after smearing it with Loctite 241.
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1 . Cap extractor
2 holes, 7 dia.
2 . Bush extractor
5
oe
74:
C21
10
3205
350
25
375
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8801.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
F.
G.
10
H.
12
I.
Service tools
14
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
6100 tractors are fitted with the following four
categories of front axle:
- AG 85 (6110 to 6140)
- AG 105 (6150 and 6160)
- AG 125 (6170 and 6180)
- AG 155: 6190
The relevant category and serial number is indicated on a
plate riveted onto the right-hand side of the axle housing.
Description
The final drive assembly consists of a swivel housing
(47) articulated on the front axle housing by means of
two swivels (7) and (11) . The wheel hub (22) turns on
two taper roller bearings whose cups (23) and (19) are
force-fitted in the hub. The cones (18) and (25) are also
force-fitted.
The bearings (18) , (19) , (23) and (25) are not adjustable.
The parts are manufactured in accordance with
machining tolerances such that no adjustment or
shimming is required. The drive from the front
differential is transmitted to the wheel hub via the
universal drive shaft assembly (10) , the sun gear (28) ,
the planet gears (38) and the ring gear (44) . The ring
gear is held by two retaining rings (24) and (26) on the
ring gear carrier (42) . The ring gear carrier is force-fitted
on the swivel housing (47) and locked by the centre nut (27) .
For greater efficiency, the seals are equipped with
double lips.
Tight sealing is ensured between the hub and the swivel
housing by seal (45) and between the universal drive
shaft and the axle housing by seal (8) and protective bush
(40) . Seal (45) is identical on axles AG 85 and AG 105. A
different seal is fitted on axles AG 125 and AG 155.
Tight sealing is ensured between the drive assembly
and the swivel housing by seal (16) and on swivel
bearings in the housing by 0-rings (6) and (12) .
Service tools (See Section I)
MF451 B: Swivel extractor
MF451 B3:
End fitting for extractor M18
3376880M1: Socket for ring gear carrier nut (AG 85
and AG 105)
3378028M1: Socket for ring gear carrier nut (AG 125
and AG 155)
3378039M1: Ring gear carrier and seal fitting tool
(AG 125 and AG 155)
3378038M1: Extractor for ring gear carrier (42)
3378040M1: Fitting bush for seal (45) (AG 85 and
AG 105)
3378056M1: Fitting bush for seal (45) (AG 125 and
AG 155)
3378058M1: Ring gear carrier and seal fitting tool
(AG 85 and AG 105)
Issue 3
(1) Bolts
(2) Cover
(3) Shims
(4) Cup
(5) Cone
(6) 0-ring
(7) Swivel pin
(8) Seal
(9) Bush
(10) Universal drive shaft
(11) Swivel pin
(12) Seal
(13) Cone
(14) Cup
(15) Cover
(16) Seal
(17) Bush
(18) Cone
(19) Cup
(20) Seal
(21) Plug
(22) Wheel hub
(23) Cup
(24) Retaining ring
(25) Cone
(26) Retaining ring
(27) Nut
(28) Sun gear
(29) Circlip
(30) Thrust washer
(31) Bush
(32) Grease nipple
(33) Bolt
(34) Circlip
(35) Needles
(36) Planetary carrier
(37) Plate
(38) Planet gear
(39) Plate
(40) Protective bush
(41) Planet gear pin
(42) Ring gear carrier
(43) Wheel stud
(44) Ring gear
(45) Seal
(47) Swivel housing
(48) Steering lock screw
(49) Nut
(52) Axle housing
(53) Plate
(54) Dowel
(55) Bolt
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-4P-
8B01.3
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
8B01.4
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Front Axle
8E301.5
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8801.6
au
ACL
O
Issue 3
Fig. 3B
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8B01.7
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8E301.9
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8E301.11
70. Remove the bolts (1), the cover (2) fitted with the
grease nipple (32), and the cup (4). Refit the cup
and the shims (3) selected during procedure 69.
Refit the cover. Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of
115 to 140 Nm.
71. Using a grease pump, lubricate the bearing (13)(14)
and (4) (5).
72. Smear the circumference of the seal (45) with
Loctite 542 (Fig. 11) and oil the lips.
Fit the seal using the following tools:
- 3378039M1: axles AG 125 and AG 155,
- 3378058M1: axles AG 85 and AG 105,
and the following bushes:
- 3378040M1: axles AG 85 and AG 105,
- 3378056M1: axles AG 125 and AG 155.
Note : Tool A (Part I) must be fully tightened on
the swivel housing. Coat nut D (see Part l) and
the mating face with graphite grease. The seal
(45) is not positioned fully home on the shoulder
of the swivel housing. The fitting position is
determined by the bush used.
Positioning dimension for seal (45):
- Axles AG 85, AG 105, AG 125 and AG 155: 11.5
from face F (Fig. 11A).
Reinstall the steering ball joint. Tighten the nutto a torque
of 115 to 130 Nm. Lock the nut with a new cotter pin.
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
8801.12
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8B01.13
Refitting
92. Refit the universal drive shaft. Insert a guide
through the filling port in order to align the lefthand drive shaft with the differential.
93. Refitthe assembly comprising the swivel housing
and the wheel hub. Fit a seal (6) on the swivel pin
(7), coated with Anti-Seize grease. Position the
pin so thatthe swivel housing assembly is aligned
with the axle housing (52). Fit the pin.
94. Fit the cup (4), the shims (3) and the cover (2)
fitted with the grease nipple (32). Fit the bolts (1)
and tighten them evenly and alternately to a
torque of between 115 and 140 Nm.
95. Replace the seal (12). Fit the lip of the seal in the
direction shown in Fig. 7. Fit the cone (13) fully
home on the swivel pin (11).
96. Fit the swivel pin (11) coated with Anti-Seize
grease, checking thatthe lip of seal (12) is correctly
positioned during fitting. Position the cup (14)
and cover (15). Fit the bolts (1) and tighten them
to a torque of 115 to 140 Nm in the same way as
described in procedure 94. Check that the swivel
pin (7) and (11) are properly in contact with
the axle housing (52).
97. Use a grease pump to lubricate the bearing (13)
(14) and (4) (5).
98. Refit the steering ball joint. Tighten the nut to a
torque of 115 to 130 Nm. Lock the nut with a new
cotter pin.
99. Remove the protection from the shaft. Refit the
sun gear (28) and the circlip (29).
Fig. 14
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
8B01.14
Ar
I. Service tools
Tools available through the MF network
MF451B - Swivel extractor (Fig. 15)
MF4518/3 - End fitting for extractor M18 (Fig. 15)
3376880M1 - Socket for ring gear carrier nuts (axles
AG 85 and AG 105) (Fig. 16)
3378028M1 - Socket for ring gear carrier nuts (axles
AG 125 and AG 155) (Fig. 17)
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8B01.15
Issue 3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
me
8C01.1
8 CO1 Differential
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
12
I.
13
J.
14
K.
14
L.
14
M.
Service tools
15
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
8C01.2
List of parts
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
Nut
Shim(s)
Spacer
Seal
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Housing
Shim(s)
Bearing cup
Bearing cone
Sun gear
Tab washer
Retaining ring
Piston
0-ring
Friction washer
Feder
Spring
0-ring
Guide washer
Washer
Shim(s)
Issue 2
General
(1)
(2)
(3)
Bolt
Cover
Half housing
Half housing
Crownwheel
Nut
Bearing cup
Bolt
Locking plate
Splined nut
Bearing cone
Locating dowel
Washer
Planetary pinion pin
Spherical washer
Planetary pinion
Drive pinion
0-ring
Bearing bolt
Half bearing
Centring bush
Spacer
Deflector
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
8C01.3
00000000000.00
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
8C01.4
t4r
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
m10
8C01.5
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
8C01.7
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8C01.9
Operating procedure
39. Measure dimensions C and E with a depth gauge.
Note: Make sure that the bearing cone (10) is
correctly seated in the cup (9).
40. After measuring the dimensions, apply the formula
to determine the required shim thickness.
41. Fit the cone fully home against the shoulder on the
drive pinion, using a press and a suitable fixture
(Fig. 12).
42. Place the shims (8), ensuring the previously
calculated thickness, in the housing.
43. Fit the cup (9).
latagozat.mgc:.
I
I
I
I
I
i
Fig. 12
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Method
45. Place the prepared drive pinion in the housing (7) as
shown in Figure 13A or 13B. Rotate the housing
through several turns in order to correctly seat the
bearing cone (10) in the cup (9). Slide the spacer
(45) into position with its chamfered edge towards
the splines on the drive pinion.
46. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension 'F'
according to the formula: A - B (Fig. 13A or 13B).
47. Press on the cup (6) while turning it alternately to
the right and to the left in order to seat it correctly
on bearing cone (5). Measure dimension G (Fig.
13A or 13B).
48. Determine the thickness SP1 of shims (2)
according to the following formula:
G - F: Axles AG 85 - AG 105 - AG 125 (Fig. 13A),
(G + F) - 0.05 (0.05 being the preload value): Axles
AG 155 (Fig. 13B).
SPi
SP-1
////////////////
7///////////////
///////////
77/177/717/
G
AG 85
AG 105
AG 125
Issue 2
Fig. 13A
AG 155
Fig. 13B
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8C01.11
Method
54. Rotate the drive pinion through several turns using
a dial type torque wrench and the special sleeve
(Fig. 16). Then, check that the torque is between 2
and 4 Nm.
55. After checking the torque, remove the nut (1) and
coat it with Loctite 270. Tighten the nut as
described in procedure 52.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
it was removed.
61 Assemble the half housing (25) in the cover (24)
(with the coupler teeth) in accordance with the
markings made before disassembly.
Position
the washer (35) on the sun gear (11), and
64.
place the assembly in the half housing (25),
engaging the tab on the washer in one of the holes
in the half housing.
65. Place the planetary pinions (38) (2 or 4 of them
according to the category) and the washers (37) on
the pin or pins (36). Then position the assemblies in
the half housing (25), engaging the tabs on the
washers (37) in the holes in the half housing (25)
(Fig. 6A or 6B).
66. Place the other washer (35) on the other sun gear
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
8C01.13
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
92. Check that the swivel pins (7) and (11) are
correctly in contact with the housing.
93. Remove the cover (2). Take out the shims (3) and
the cup (4). Smear the cone (5) with bearing
grease. Reinstall the top, the shims and the cover.
Tighten the bolts (1) to between 115 and 140 Nm.
Using a pump, grease the bearing (13), (14).
94. Reinstall the steering ball joints. Tighten the nuts to
a torque of between 115 and 130 Nm. Lock the nuts
with new pins.
86. If the seals (8) were removed, fit them fully home
against the shoulder. Replace the 0-rings (40) and
seals (6) and (12).
87. Lubricate seal (8). With the help of another person,
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
ne
8C01.15
M. Service tools
1. Tool available from MF network
MF451B - Swivel extractor (Fig. 20)
MF451B3 - End fitting for extractor M18 (Fig. 20)
MF471 - Differential locking spring compression
tool (Fig. 21)
3376881M1 - Clamping tool for drive pinion nut,
axles AG 105 - AG 125 (Fig. 22)
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8C01.16
EMU
111
1151/AIVAIIMIIVAIVAIIMIAM r
11.\\
1\1111111111111ME
01,
111111111111111610E11110.
HM8
HM18
co
AG 85
OA
0B
OC
81.80
40
28.54.0,5m
68
72
_a
OD
68
cirl 45.
AG 105
AG 125
81.80
47
34;90 *0,5/0
AG 155
91.80
47
34.90 +Qs'
Issue 2
22
25
94
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Rio
8D01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Adjustment of toe-in
F.
Track adjustment
G.
Service tool
10
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
General
The front axle comprises the following parts:
- A cast support identical to that of the 4-wheel-drive
version, whose lower rear part comprises a bearing
supporting the 2nd steering swivel pin (4-cylinder
engine) or a removable swivel pin (6-cylinder engine).
- A front bearing fixed on the cast support holding the
1st steering swivel pin.
- An axle beam articulated on two swivels.
- Two spindle arms.
- Two spindles mounted in the bores of the spindle
arms.
- A double acting ram linked to the spindles by two
steering arms.
There are two axle versions depending on the type of
tractor:
MF 6610-6120-6130-6140
Standard axle with 6-hole hub.
MF 6150
Standard axle with 6-hole hub or heavy-duty axle with 8hole hub.
MF 6160-6170-6180-6190
Heavy-duty axle with 8-hole hub.
(43)
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
/EA
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
/18X
Issue 1
Pin
Nut
Washer
Bearing cone
Spindle
Bearing cup
Dust cap
Thrust washers
Grease nipple
Nut
Axle Beam
Steering arm
Seal
Bush
Spindle arm
Bush
Washer
Sealing ring
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
/27%
(28)
(29)
/30
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
Version
standard
heavy-duty
8-hole
6-hole
hub
hub
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
(61)
(62)
(63)
(64)
(65)
Bearing cone
Hub
Bearing cup
Cover
Rivet
Nut
Washer
Belleville washers
Sealing ring
Bearing cone
Bearing cup
Sealing ring
Lock washer
Spacers
Screw
Washer
Nut
Bolt
Steering ram
Screw
Washers
Nuts
Sleeve
Screw
Steering rod
Screw
Nuts
Sleeve
Pin
Washer
Nut
Ball joint
Pin
Nut
Ball joint
Support
Bush
Thrust washer
0-ring
0-ring
Nut
Lock nut
Bushes
Grease nipple
Washer
Bush
Spacer
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
r.;:32
0004 00
A_ A
ono
mono
liii
000 0 0 0
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
8D01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
8D01.5
Removal
12. Chock the rear wheels and apply the handbrake.
13. Lift the front of the tractor with a jack positioned in
the axis of the axle and insert props.
14. Remove the relevant wheel.
15. Extract the cover (22).
16. Remove the pin (1), loosen the nut (2), remove the
washer (3) (standard axle).
Release and loosen the nut (2), remove the lock
washer (31), remove the washer (3) (heavy-duty
axle).
17. Remove the bearing cone (4).
18. Remove the wheel hub (20) from the spindle (5).
19. Extract the sealing ring 118\ and remove the bearing cone (19).
20. Extract the cups (6) and (21) from the hub (20).
21. Remove the dust cap (7).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Not
8D01.6
Refitting
Standard or heavy-duty axle
35. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
36. Mount the spindle arm (15) in the axle beam (11),
fasten it with screws (36) and nuts (10) placed in
the seats of the axle.
Tightening torque of screws (36):
- Standard axle :
350 - 430 Nm
- Reinforced axle : 400 - 600 Nm
Standard axle with 6-hole hub
37. With a punch, push in the bushes (14) and (16)
against the shoulder in the spindle arm (15).
38. Fit the dust cap (7) on the spindle (5).
39. Place washers /88 and (17) on the spindle , orientate the lubricating grooves of washers /IA towards
washer (17).
40. Introduce the spindle (5) into the arm (15).
41. Place the seal (13) in the seat of the steering arm
(12).
42. Fit the steering arm (12) on the spindle (5).
43. Position the screw (33) in the recess in the spindle
(5), fit the washer (34). Tighten the nut (35) to a
torque of 250 - 300 Nm.
Note: Ensure that the spindle (5) is fitted without any play.
Heavy-duty axle with 6- or 8-hole hub
44. With a punch, push in the bush (14) against the
shoulder in the spindle arm (15).
45. Push in the sealing ring /27\against the shoulder in
the spindle arm with the lip facing outwards.
46. Push the dust cap (7) on the spindle (5).
47. Position the bearing cup (29) in the spindle arm.
48. Push the sealing ring /30\ in the spindle arm with
the lip facing outwards.
49. Push the bearing cone (28) on the spindle, then
introduce the spindle into the spindle arm.
50. Position the Belleville washers (26), the steering
arm (12) and the washer (25). Smear the nut (24)
with Loctite 241, tighten to a torque of 550-580
Nm.
Standard or heavy - duty axle
51. Using a press or an appropriate device push the
cups (6) and (21) against the shoulder in the hub
(20).
52. Grease the bearing cone (19) (MF1105 grease or
equivalent) and place it in the cup (6).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8001.7
Removal
Removal
Refitting
73. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
74. Assemble the sleeves (41) equipped with rods (43)
on the ram. Fit the screws (38) and washers (39)
and tighten the nuts (40).
75. Screw the ball joint (53) (if fitted) on the steering
ram.
76. Refit the ram assembly on the support (54).
77. Tighten the nut (52) of the ball joint to a torque of
100-120 Nm and fit the pin (51).
78. Couple the sleeves (46) to the rods (43) and to the
ball joints (50).
79. Connect the ram supply hoses.
80. Withdraw the jack. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake.
81. Adjust the toe-in (see section E).
82. Check for leaks of the ram connectors.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
nit
8D01.8
92. Remove the screws (1) and the grease nipple (3).
Remove the front bearing (2) and the washer (63)
(Fig. 4).
93. Remove the front axle, disengaging it from its rear
bearing (5) with the spacer (65) (Fig. 4).
94. Remove the lock nut (60) and the nut (59) with its
seal (58), remove the support (54). The bush (55),
the thrust washer (56) and the o-ring (57) remain
on the support (54).
95. If necessary, withdraw the bushes (61) from the
axle.
Note : The bush (64) is force fitted on the axle
beam (11).
Refitting
96. Clean and check the parts. Replace any which are
defective.
97. If necessary, fit the bushes (61) with a locally
made tool (see section G). Fit the bush (64),
chamfer positionned towards the axle beam.
98. Position the bush (55), the thrust washer (56) and
the seal (57) and refit the support (54).
99.Tighten the nut (59) with 0-ring (58) on the
support (54), then slacken it so as to obtain axial
play of 0.05 to 0.25.
100. Using a spanner wrench, tighten the lock nut (60)
to 120-150 Nm. Check that the support swivels
freely.
101. Hoist the axle. Position the spacer (65) (the chamfer facing the axle side. Fig. 4). Fit the axle in the
support (5).
102. Position the washer (63) (the chamfer facing the
axle side, Fig. 4). Mount the front bearing (2) so as
to eliminate play between the washer and the axle
as far as possible.
103. Smear the screws (1) with Loctite 270. Tighten to
a torque of 540-620 Nm. Detach the hoist.
104. Fit the grease nipple (3) (Fig. 4).
105. Refit the ram assembly (37) on the support (54).
Tighten the nut (52) to a torque of 100-120 Nm
and fit the pin (51).
106. Grease the bearings (2) and (5) (Fig. 4) and the ram
support (54).
107. Grease the rods (43) with molybdenum disulphide. Refit the assemblies (1) (Fig. 2). Fit the nuts
(10) and the screws (36). Tighten to a torque of :
- Standard axle : 350-430 Nm
- Heavy-duty axle : 400-600 Nm
108. Fit the screws (38), the washers (39) and the nuts
(40). Tighten to a torque of 75-81 Nm.
109. Refit the front wheels. Remove the stand under
the crankcase. Tighten the bolts to a torque of
140-200 Nm.
110. Remove the chocks and release the handbrake.
111 Adjust the toe-in (see section E).
Issud 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Age
8D01.9
E. Adjustment of toe-in
1 1 2.Set the steering to the central position. It
necessary to adjust the sleeves (46) so as to
obtain a toe-in of 0 to 14 mm. The toe-in is
measured at points A,A' and B,B', determined by
a diameter of 895 mm traced on the flanks of the
tyres (Fig. 5). It is obtained from the difference of
the two values L and D.
F.Track adjustment
113. Lift the front of the tractor in the axis of the axle.
114. Remove the screws (36) and (42) and the nuts
(10) and (40) (Fig. 6).
115. Place the spindle arms in the desired position.
116. Fit the bolts (36). Tighten to a torque of :
- Standard axle : 350-430 Nm
- Heavy-duty axle : 400-600 Nm
117. Fit the rods (43) according to the position of the
arms.
Fit the screws (42), the washers (39) and the nuts
(40). Tighten to a torque of 75-81 Nm.
A
0
,A11"
.*
41111111MilIMMA---'
Fig. 6
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
8D01.10
G. Service tool
Tool to be made locally
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4F
ir
Lie
8E01.1
CONTENTS
General
Operation
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
List of parts
General
The steering column assembly consists of the following
two sections:
- the fixed lower section comprising a tube and an
attaching base plate,
- the moving upper section comprising a tube and a
welded yoke as well as a housing including the steering
wheel height and tilt adjusting mechanisms.
Operation
Height adjustment
When the control rod (4) is moved to the high position,
rod T causes the elbow lever (8) to swivel and lower arm
(15) which is hinged on pin (14).
Adjusting screw [5] attached to the arm bears on the
lock plate (16) which is released, allowing the upper
section of the steering column to move.
The spring (3) returns the control lever (4) to its initial
position.
The stop (25) limits the movement of both sections.
Tilt adjustment
When the control lever (4) is moved to the low position,
it presses on rod T which pushes on the end of the
notched lever (9) and frees it from the rack /10\allowing
it to tilt the housing (20). The two return springs (17)
allow the positioning of the steering wheel.
Adjusting screw [5] allows the meshing of the teeth on
the rack /10\ and notched lever (9) to be adjusted.
Issue 1
AP'
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
Ile
8E01.3
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
use
8E01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
8E01.5
Refitting
6. Check the operation of all the positions of the
steering column.
7. Lightly coat the splines in shaft (29) with AntiSeize grease or equivalent.
8. Carry out procedures 2 to 5 in reverse order.
Note: Tighten the steering wheel nutto a torque
of 57 - 78 Nm.
9. Check the operation of the electrical equipment
and the A, B, C, D ratios (for Dynashift) or both
ranges for Speedshift.
Reassembly
13. Refit the levers (4) and (8) and the spring (3).
Replace the retaining washers (1) and (2).
14. Adjust the lever (4), rod T in contact with the
notched lever (9) using the adjusting screw [5]
(3 mm Allen wrench).
1 5. Carry out procedure 11 in reverse and carry out
procedures 6 to 9.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mot
8E01.6
Refitting
21. Carry out procedure 20 in reverse.
22. Compress spring (7). Position the rack /10\ as per Fig. 2
to avoid any interference with lever (4). Fit and tighten
bolts (6) after coating them with Loctite 241.
23. Refit the lever (4), rod T and spring (3). Replace the
retaining washers (1) and (2).
24. Adjust the lever (4), with rod T in contact with the notched
lever (9), using the adjusting screw [5]
(3 mm Allen wrench).
25. Carry out procedure 17 in reverse and carry out
procedures 6 to 9.
39. Uncrimp pin (18). Drive out pins (18) and (19).
40. Separate the housing (20) from the moving column (21).
41. Remove the circlip (23). Separate the upper shaft (12)
from the housing (20).
42. Drive out the lower shaft (29) from the moving column
(21).
43. Extract the bearings (22) from the housing (20).
Reassembly
Reassembly
30. Carry out procedure 29 in reverse.
31. Fit the pin (14). Replace the retaining washer (13).
32. Fit and set the adjusting screw MI and lever (4) with rod
T in contact with the notched lever (9).
33. Carry out procedure 27 in reverse and carry out
procedures 6 to 9.
Issue 1
44. Fit the bearings (22) in the housing (20) using a suitable
fixture.
45. Assemble the upper shaft (12) on the bearings (22). Fit
the circlip (23).
46. Assemble the lower shaft (29) equipped with bushes
(30) and circlip (31) on the fixed column (28).
Note: Deform the column tube by striking it with a
punch so as to lock the bushes (30) in position.
47. Reassemble the housing (20) and mobile column (21)
assemblies. Fit pins (18) and (19). Crimp pin (18).
48. Refit the springs (17).
49. Compress spring (7). Position the rack /10\ as per Fig. 2
to avoid any interference with lever (4). Fit and tighten
the bolts (6) after coating them with Loctite 241.
50. Adjust the lever (4), rod T in contact with the notched
lever (9) using the adjusting screw [5]
(3 mm Allen wrench).
51. Carry out procedure 35 in reverse and carry out
procedures 6 to 9.
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mat
8E01.7
Reassembly
59. Position bush (27).
60. Place the stop (25) in the groove on the fixed
column (28).
61. Assemble the mobile column (21) with the fixed
column (28).
62. Fit the bolt (24) without tightening it so that bush
(26) can be installed. After installing the bush,
tighten the bolt moderately. Check that the moving
column (21) slides freely.
Refit
the lock plate (16). Adjust the lever (4), rod T
63.
in contact with the notched lever (9) using the
adjusting screw [5].
64. Carry out procedure 53 in reverse and carry out
procedures 6 to 9.
Issue 'I
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ARO
8F01.1
8 F01 Bearings
CONTENT
General
A.
B.
C.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The lower section of the front frame of 6110 to 6150 series tractors
supports the second swivel pin of the front axle assembly.
The first pivot is articulated on a removable bearing.
On tractors in series 6160 to 6190, the front and rear bearings are
removable.
Refitting
9. Replace the dust guard (8). Position the washer (7) with the
chamfer facing the axle housing (52). Assemble the bearings
(6) on the front axle.
10. Hoist the front axle with slings. Fit the front axle assembly
and the bearing. Fit the bolts (12) and (13).
*10
LT(
6190
,
0 43
Fig. 3
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ow'
14r
8F01.3
liall1111110
131=r1M:
tort
r..
41:
1
14,1
0
/I7
, ----- r/
irz
41 I.
IN-
,/,
111------ T- (
1
-,--__ _.,;H_l__:
-I II , IL
1
*C'
, I
Fig. 4
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Replace the dust guard (9). Position the washer (4) with
the chamfer facing the axle housing (52). Fit the bearing
(2). Fit the bolts (1).
1 2. Smear the bolts (12) and (13) with Loctite 270. Tightening
cAr
torque:
1 3.
1 4.
1 5.
16.
11111Prr/i
11111111
Co
00
Removal
1 7. Extract the seal and the worn bushes.
NOWIELMILIMINIMM1111111
'1A%
CW
XV' NX
Refitting
1 8. Clean the parts, using a press and a suitable fixture, fit the
bushes in their respective supports flush with face "F"
(Fig. 5) with opening "0" facing upwards (Figures 6 and
7) and aligned with the lubricating channel. Fit the seal
(11) fully home on the shoulder of the support (6).
Issue 2
.AV46. 6.41M.
III
II I
II I
Fig. 5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
8F01.5
Rear support
111
Fig.10
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
D
1
,aG
10
1 1111
II II
Tightening torques
Coated with Loctite 270:
- bolts (1) and (13): 520 to 640 Nm
- bolts (12) 240 to 320 Nm
,,,Poz0:7-er
Fig. 11
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9 . HYDRAULICS
Contents
OPEN CENTRE
CLOSED CENTRE
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igir
ale
9A01.1
CONTENTS
A. General circuit
E. Circuit diagrams
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
age
9A01.2
A .General circuit
The hydraulic system of the 6100 tractors is of the open
centre type. It is divided into two separate circuits fed
by a two-stage gear pump, fitted on the internal face of
the right cover. Via a 150 micron strainer also fitted on
the right cover, the pump uses the transmission oil
contained in the common reservoir formed by the
centre housing and the gearbox. A 15 micron pressure
filter (40) and a clogging indicator (44) fitted on the low
flow circuit before the Orbitrol steering unit. The hydraulic pump is driven by the teeth of the PTO clutch
housing.
Ar
s
B . Low-pressure circuit, low flow
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
age
9A01.3
Parts list
High pressure
Excess flow
Low pressure
Lubrication
Suction
Return
Brakes - Clutch
Pilot flow
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9A01.4
Layout of parts
6110 to 6160 tractors
Spring loaded clutch with Dynashift and electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle selector cover
Speedshift
Spring loaded clutch
Speedshift solenoid
Dynashift solenoid
Dynashift control valve
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
9A01.5
E . Circuit diagrams
1 . ISO diagram
43-64#4*tJ
I.
17bar
4>
nut!,
---------J
6
13
Spring loaded
0 15u
17b
5b
A111011111111111=
L.
61
r73
Ir
17bar
III'
I
1
11111
Dynashift I
L.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
Pressure loaded
www.maskinisten.net
INO
9A01.6
17bar
2 . Simplified diagram
11111=<3,
9
34
A B CID
5
bar
..1101111.
10
11
.
1,5bar
<0
17bar
(42)
t.
Pressure loaded
Issue 2
December 1997
41
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ige
9B01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
General
6100 tractors can be equipped with a trailer braking
system consisting of :
- A valve assembly (spool valve) fitted on the right-hand
hydraulic cover.
- A pipe linking the trailer braking valve to a connector
situated at the rear of the tractor.
- A pipe connected to the master cylinders or to a supply
hose of the main right-hand brake (depending on
version) linked to the pilot head of the valve.
The valve is supplied as a matter of priority by the highpressure circuit. The oil not used for the braking of the
trailer is sent to the auxiliary spool valves.
The valve controls the flow and pressure towards the
trailer brakes. It is controlled by the pressure of the
tractor braking circuit so as to obtain tractor/trailer
braking that is progressive and proportional to the effort
applied to the pedal. The trailer brake only works if the
two pedals are coupled.
Description of the trailer braking valve
(Fig. 1)
Flow control valve (1)
Provides control of the flow Ox and regulation of the
hydraulic flow, transmitting the pressure to the trailerbrakes (see pages 4 and 6).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ase
9B01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9B01.4
0 f fR 4 43 00 0
J. 4 rxer
43 0 0 0 0
1
11[ 71741
v 92 WA&
o 0 o
In MEM
MR'
Or
Ir~ii ice!
ir ---41Nix lax
-.4 -rtegrdrit
-111114*
.<4.
ttA
IL
Issue 1
February 1995
'II
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9B01.5
Control flow OX is cut off and the flow control valve (1)
moves to position b (regulating position).
A constant flow QK flows from port P to port B (towards
the trailer brake junction) via the diaphragm (11), the
channel (12), the line (13) and the check valve (3). The
surface of the diaphragm (11) is calculated in accordance with the constant flow QK.
The residual flow QR passes through the control valve
(1) then to port N (continuity to the auxiliary spool valve
and the lift valve).
The line from port B (towards the trailer brake junction
is placed under pressure and acts on the surface (14)
of the control spool (2) against the pressure exerted on
the piston (6) by the tractor braking system.
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
www.maskinisten.net
9B01.6
0 O 0
14
4 NV
lir".""4
5X
z
43
millo_orar
/I
IA1
1 -o r
we
or0
(Op)
O
Fig. 6 - Partial braking of trailer
---4.014, .%
.....MW
1
-9,1- IP_ Hi
I L_NEiiiiii
INN"
II
,
1
i
Mt
JII
4P1111k7<
III
Nl
lor
,-.. row., Ar
v
.
=k
--
Ar
VAI A
ii 8.37:01.1a.MMT
Fp
- W'"
Issue 1
-6
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9B01.7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ise
9C01.1
CONTENTS
General
A. Flow divider
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Diagrams
G.
Issue 2
10
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The auxiliary spool valves are fitted on the highpressure circuit. They are fed by the oil coming from
the trailer brake valve or from the cover plate (depending on the option).
In the neutral position, the oil not used by the spool
valves is available for the lift valve fitted downstream.
The auxiliary spool valves are fixed on a support
which in turn is mounted on the rear of the lift cover.
The quick couplings are mounted directly on the body
of the spool. To obtain an adequate distance between
the couplings, the spool valves contain blocks which
serve as distance pieces. These blocks also permit
the oil to continue to the next spool.
Characteristics
Each spool valve is activated by a lever in the cab,
and has three phases:
- 35% slow flow
- 45% progressive increase in flow and pressure
- 20% full flow
The progressive increase in flow and pressure enables uniform control of implements.
This characteristic also enables two spool valves to
be activated simultaneously, the overall flow being
shared. The flow to each quick coupler is proportional
to the position of the control lever.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Age
9C01.3
Designation of ports
N :
Continuity (to lift valve)
P :
Pressure
OX :
Excess flow
R :
Return
X :
Regulated flow to 1st spool valve
VR :
Feed port 1, to lift valve
Description of components
(1) Intake block with incorporated flow
regulator
(2) Sealing plate with "O-rings
(3) Excess flow pipe
(4) Flow divider regulating knob
(5) Single/double change-over screw
(6) 3-position spool valve, convertible single/
double acting, return to neutral by spring
(7) Intermediate block receiving excess flow
(8) 3-position spool valve, convertible single/
double acting with kickout return to neutral
(9) Intermediate block
(10) 4-position spool valve with kickout return to
neutral
(11) End-plate enabling continuity to lift and
return to sump
Fig. 3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Age
9C01.4
A . Flow divider
For work requiring a regulated flow, the divider enables
a variable flow to be obtained, by adjusting the knob
(4) between the minimum and maximum positions
(Fig. 4).
pressure inlet
300
used
priority flow
Fig. 4
Adjustment (Fig. 6)
1. Remove the stop screw (6), the lock nut (1) and
the washer (2).
2. Unscrew and remove the knob (4).
3. Without forcing it, tighten the screw (3) so that the
valve (8) is in contact with its seat.
4. Screw in the knob so that it is in contact with the
cap (5).
5. Unscrew the knob by two turns.
6. Screw in and tighten the stop screw (6) to a torque
of 20 Nm.
7. Place the knob in the closed position (Fig. 4).
8.
the washer (2) and tighten the locknut (1) to
a torque of 30-40 Nm.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics
use
9C01.5
Neutral position
The oil is not available at outputs S1 or S2. It is sent
via the continuity line towards the lift valve and
passes directly to the intake manifold of the pump
when the lift is in the neutral position.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9C01. 7
::--t-1
&I
m.
Is-&-
4,
H
IE466.
' II
litlinifel
._-s_.
R
rA. u
Adi
ro.:
-..111.01011:012;.:11P: 111Wwi l wig.
mige
INLTib sitirk
,f,
J--''- -w-"iI.__J.
-'4,101"
1
"
.fr
.
T
.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
9C01.8
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
10
9C01.9
F. Diagrams
S2
S2
S2
1111
WP
Si
0-x
Fig. 12
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-14P-
9C01.11
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9D01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
Neutral position
B.
Lift phase
C.
Lower phase
D.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11\17nr
General
The lift valve is fixed on the left cover mounted on the
centre housing. Its function is to regulate the flow of oil
to and from the lift cylinders according to the signals
transmitted to it by the computer of the electronic
control system. This valve is composed of a series of
spools and valves, most of which are not reparable as
separate parts.
Description
The BOSCH hydraulic valve controls the supply to the
lift cylinders and is composed of two sections:
Hydraulic section comprising the following parts:
(1) Nonreturn valve, maintaining oil in the cylinders.
(2) Servo piston used in the lower phase.
(3) Nonreturn valve used in the lower phase.
(4) Control spool valve.
(5) Flow regulator spool valve.
(6) Shock valve set at 200 bar.
(9) Spool valve spring, flow regulation.
(10) Control spool valve spring.
(11) Control spool valve spring.
(12) Nonreturn valve ball.
(13) Restrictor.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9D01.3
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
B. Lift phase
The lift solenoid (8) is actuated to raise the tractor
linkage.
The control spool valve (4) moves to the left and stops
the control flow, placing the chamber of the spring (9)
under pressure and pushing the spool valve (5) to the
left.
The movement is dampened by the volume of oil
flowing through orifice d.
14r
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9D01.5
piston (2) opens the valve (1), enabling the oil returning
from the cylinders to be directed towards the return port
R to the housing. As the movement of the piston (2) is
limited, the control flow is reestablished, and is directed
towards the nonreturn valve (3), the return port C and
the return port Rto the housing. The lower phase has no
effect on the spool valve (5) which is in a floating
position. It enables the minimal flow required for control
purposes and ensures that the main flow is able to pass
to the pump intake via the continuity port N and the
transfer tube.
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
w
9E01.1
CONTENTS
-
General
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Noe
9E01.2
General
The steering system used on 6100 series tractors is a
hydrostatic system with no mechanical linkage
between the steering wheel and the steering cylinder.
The main components of the system are as follows :
- A pressurised oil feed supplied by the low-flow stage
of the hydraulic pump.
- A hydrostatic steering unit (Orbitrol).
- A double acting steering cylinder fitted on the 4WD
front axle or the 2WD axle.
The Orbitrol is supplied by the low-flow system as a
matter of priority. When the steering wheel is turned,
the required flow of oil is sent to the relevant side of the
steering cylinder. The excess flow not required for
steering, combined with the oil returning from the
cylinder is then directed on to the distribution valve
situated under the hood, which then goes on to satisfy
the needs of the transmission, brakes and clutch..
If the engine breaks down or the hydraulic pump fails,
the Orbitrol acts as a manual pump, so that steering
control is maintained at all times.
Operation
The Orbitrol unit consists of spool and sleeve with
neutralising springs and a drive pin which connects to
the cardan shaft. The cardan shaft is in turn connected
to the metering unit. The Orbitrol unit has 4 hydraulic
connections :
- pressure,
- returns (to distribution valve)
- 2 service ports for the steering ram.
14r
Parts list
(1) Screw
/2\ Screw
(3) Seal
(4) Cover plate
(5) 0-ring
(6) Stator
/7\ Pin
(8) 0-ring
(9) Rotor (metering valve)
(10) Spacer
(11) Cardan shaft
/12\ Washer
/13\ Centring springs
(14) Needle roller bearing
(15) Kin-ring
(16) Washer
(17) 0-ring
(18) Relief valve
/19\ Seal
(20) Shock valves
(21) Orbitrol
(22) Non return valve
(23) Suction valves
/24\ Ring
(25) Spool valve
(26) Check valve
(27) Sleeve
(28) 0-ring
(29) Distributor plate
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9E01.3
0
0
0
A
1
,
4
e
HFir
r
L
1 Immom, I11=if
p..s
A07-- itihaVE.M.,
Ii
ILMIII
rb
A- -..,SIAN'
0101211WIA
Iv
_MAP
virAwAlin I a
ACM110""\ %.
N" KiWk Ma
-11b. Mi Lw.sw..........21101
14..riA
k mOr II
la
IQ Wil' i
ip._=11
:: Ilk .m.
qv" A
\
\I i
A
=....ii7
.1./..A.Sgitrfi A- Al'
IlimarS"',7147'` ,AmiIrW-Pr
Z.MidleffeldrAMIMM
AillW
. II.
.A
i
AA
CD 0 Cr0000
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lAr
L_
A
B
L
P
Steering cylinder
Position of steering wheel, left or right
Supply to the left hand side of the steering cylinder
Low-flow supply coming from the hydraulic pump
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
9E01.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9E01.6
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
9E01.7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9E01.8
13k
MECHANICAL CONTROLS
-4
I-
YVV
L:
P:
R:
T:
II
11
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
17. Using special tool MS62A, fit the seal /19\, the 0ring (17) and the kin-ring (15).
18. In the holes for the shock valves (20) place the balls
and the springs. Screw in the threaded rings. Fit the
seals and tighten the caps.
1 9. In the hole for the relief valve (18) place the valve
and the spring. Screw in the threaded ring. Fit the
seal and tighten the cap to a torque of 40-60 Nm.
20. Fit the spool valve (25) into the sleeve (27). Position
the centring springs /13\ as shown in Fig. 1 and fit
the pin /7\ using special tool MS63..
21. Position the ring /24\ on the sleeve and spool valve
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly
in the unit.
22. Fit the washers /12\ and (16) with the chamfer of
the washer /12\ facing towards the centring
springs /13\, and with the needle roller bearing (14)
between them.
23. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in the unit,
applying a slight oscillating movement. Ensure that
the pin /7\ is held horizontally.
24. In the receptacles of the suction valves (23) place
the two balls and the two pins.
25. In the receptacle of me non -return valve (22) place
the ball and screw on the threaded ring.
26. Position the connecting shaft (11).
9E01.9
32. Refit the screw /2\ (in the position marked upon
disassembly) and the screws (1) with their seals
(3). Tighten alternately to a torque of 30- 35 Nm.
33. Using a test bench or an appropriate equipment,
check the adjustment and operation of the Orbitrol.
34. Refit the unit on the tractor.
Fig. 1
op
27. Fit the 0-ring (28) and the distributor plate (29).
28. Fit the rotor (9) in such a way that two of the C
shaped hollows are in the axis of the aperture of the
shaft (11) (Fig. 2). Refit the spacer (10).
29. Place the 0-rings (5) and (8) on the stator (6).
Fig. 2
30. Whilst taking care not to move the rotor (9), fit the
stator (6). Then move the stator so that its fastening
holes coincide with those of the distributor.
Note: The rotor (9) and the pin /71must be in the
position shown in Fig. 3.
31. Refit the cover plate (4).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
9F01.1
CONTENTS
- General
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
General
Functions or mechanisms supplied
by the low-pressure system
9 E01
5 B02 - 5 B 03
9 J01
9 KO1
5 CO1
5 CO2
8 A01
8 CO1 - 6 E01
7 E01
7 A01
5 A01
C
D
E
L
Operation
The flow of oil coming from the 17 bar distribution valve
lubricates the front cover and the gearbox as well as the PTO
shaft which traverses it.
An external pipe also brings the oil to the PTO clutch. A smallbore pipe directs the oil towards the driving pinion of the PTO
upper shaft and the coupler as well as the compound pinion
of the 4-speed PTO (if fitted).
If the pressure is greater than 1.5 bar, the spring (2) is
compressed, the valve (1) lifts up and the oil flows into the
gearbox housing (Fig. 1).
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
9F01.3
Lubrication and cooling system, 1.5 bar valve closed (oil hot)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9G01.1
CONTENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 1
A
B
C
Issue 1
February 1995
D
E
F
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ale
9G01.3
Fig. 2
Brake master cylinders with trailer braking (single circuit)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
IRO
9G01.4
AP'
Pedals latched
Braking and balancing of pressure
B
C
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9G01.5
Fig. 6
attli#80101-
1. Smear the pins (5) and (6) with molybdenum disulphide (Fig. 7).
2. Smear the clevis (1) with Loctite 542 and screw it
on to the rod (2).
3. Fit the return spring (3).
4. Adjust the clevis so as to obtain a distance X of 115
mm 0.5 between the support (4) and the clevis
fastening pin.
5. Do the same for the second clevis and check that
the twinning mechanism operates smoothly.
6. Manually check the operation of each pedal to
ensure that they operate freely.
O
O
;
14
x=115mm 0,5
Fig. 7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9G01.6
Fig. 10
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigr
9H01.1
CONTENTS
- General
A. Operation
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The distribution valve is fitted on the
rear bonnet support. Its function is:
- To supply oil and keep the low pressure circuit to 17
bar.
- To supply the lubrication and cooling system.
- To ensure a constant level in the brake and clutch
master cylinders.
As from serial numbers D086001 (6100 standard) and
D115017 (6100 steep nose), a valve limits the residual
pressure to the master cylinders (see Fig. 13).
A. Operation (Fig. 2)
When the engine is started, the oil coming from the
steering control valve (Orbitrol) enters through port 1
and flows out through port 5 towards the low pressure
circuit of the right hand hydraulic cover to feed :
- the input unit Speedshift or Dynashift
- the engine clutch (Pressure loaded)
- the electro-hydraulical reverse shuttle control
- the Hare/Tortoise range
- the 4WD clutch
- the differential lock
- the p.t.o. clutch
- the p.t.o. brake
- the front p.t.o. (if fitted)
A back pressure is then created in the circuit, forcing the
ball (20) to lift from its seat, compressing the spring
(21). The oil passes to the back of the spool (19),
creating a pressure which gradually moves it, compressing the spring (17), resting against the shims [18].
The spool (19) enables the oil to pass towards the port
6 and towards the oil cooler. It emerges cooled and
travels towards the channels (14) and (13) of the
lubrication system. When the oil is cool, the 5 bar valve
(15) opens and allows a quantity of oil to pass directly
to the channel (13) of the lubrication system without
passing through the cooler.
When one of the low-pressure functions is required, the
momentary pressure drop causes the ball (20) to return
to its seat due to the action of the spring (21), and the
spool (19) attempts to move, being pushed back by its
own spring (17). The oil in the end chamber escapes
through the drain hole V, enabling the spool to move
back slowly.
Issue 2
October 1996
When the needs of the low-pressure circuit are satisfied, the oil finally passes through the feed ports 8 and
10 (Fig. 1). Flow and residual pressure are regulated by
a pipe 11 and a restrictor A, thereby maintaining a
constant level in the brake and clutch master cylinders.
Leakages return to the gearbox via port 9.
Note: After dismantling or replacement of
the valve, tighten it to a torque of 40 to
55 Nm.
Designation of ports (Fig. 1).
Each port is numbered on the valve body.
1 Supply coming from the Orbitrol unit.
2 Outlet to the front p.t.o. (if fitted).
3 Not used (plug)
4 Not used (plug)
5 Outlet (17 bar) to the Speedshift or Dynashift, the
electro-hydraulical reverse shuttle control and the
solenoids fastened on the right hand cover.
6 Outlet to the oil cooler (5 bar valve closed).
7 Outlet to the lubrication line (5 bar valve open).
8 Clutch master cylinder supply (residual flow).
9 Return to front left hand of gearbox.
10 Brake master cylinder supply (residual flow).
11 Outlet with external pipe connecting the supply
channels of the brake and clutch master cylinders
and the T-piece mounted on the outlet 7 of the
lubrication line.
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9H01.3
Fig. 2
0
JJ
LV
b7
11
III
4111,
CD
4s.4
10
,..
,
r- *,, ,
.0.,81111/
I.. ,
IINIII
dg
AININ........
.____
-'..........
._...
.,.....
../
1,/ mir
&
.!
./
/
.005./.."..
.0/%4 %//"
I tiitrunli411
Illimi:& vult 1n
.w
z,-.4. ..e,......
.... N
.-NN.N-
18 CO 0
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
Distribution valve
Lubrication towards the front cover, the p.t.o.
shaft, the p.t.o clutch and the driving gear 2 or
4-speed p.t.o.
Lubrication coming from the oil cooler
(5 bar valve closed)
5 bar valve
Valve body
(17)
[18]
(19)
(20)
(21)
A
V
Spring
Shims
Spool
Ball
Spring
Restrictor
Drain hole
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ay
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mh ligrr
II
Joe
9101.1
CONTENTS
General
A. Removal of cover
B.
Refitting of cover
C.
D.
Disassembly of cover
E.
11
F.
12
G.
Reassembly of cover
14
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9/012
General
The right-hand cover fitted on the rear axle housing has
two main functions:
- It serves as a support for numerous components of
the hydraulic system.
- It comprises various intake and delivery channels of
the high- and low-flow (high- and low-pressure) circuits.
The internal face of the cover accommodates:
- The dual element hydraulic pump and its driving gear.
- The suction pipe.
- The intake manifold.
- The transfer pipe from the left cover.
Its external faces accommodate:
The five solenoids controlling the low-pressure functions (depending on option).
- The safety valve of the high-pressure circuit.
- The trailer brake valve (if fitted) or a cover plate.
- The pressure test coupler.
- The strainer.
- The main filter with its support.
- The low oil pressure switch.
- The filter vacuum switch.
- The engine speed sensor.
Parts list
(1) Cover
(2) Screw
(3) High-pressure (high-flow) valve
(4) Engine speed sensor
(6) P.T.O. brake supply connector
(7) P.T.0 brake solenoid
(8) Reducer
(12) Low-pressure switch
(13) Solenoid valve (p.t.o. clutch)
(14) Fitting (2WD version)
(15) Differential lock solenoid
(16) Differential lock supply connector
(17) 4WD solenoid
(18) Plug (2WD version)
(19) Hare/tortoise solenoid
(20) 17 bar supply connector
(21) Plug (2WD version)
(22) 4WD clutch supply connector
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9/01.3
0 0000 4 0 0 GOO
MI,
aA
.11
#1t:
(41)
/W/
Gee
COG
GOO
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
9/01.4
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9101.5
Exploded view
0
O
CIO
.11111.
O
o
PAV
0'
fea-,
Ora
es Or r(I)
0
Cp
I ftrieefts
tyl,
0 0 00
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Return to housing
Low-pressure circuit
re.t7::-;54 Suction
High-pressure circuit
A
B
C
D
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9101.7
ends
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
RIO
9/01.8
B . Refitting of cover
15. Clean the housing and cover joint faces .
16. Check the presence of the two dowels (1) on the
cover (Fig. 3).
17. Fit new seals on the cover:
- for the Hare/Tortoise lines (2) (Fig. 3)
- for the p.t.o. clutch line (3) (Fig. 3)
- for the suction pipe (4) (Fig. 4) (ensure the pipe is
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
oo
0
0
9101.9
e 0 Ei o
, Awl
oaniNER411
zrzw/
I
\1
Fig. 5
Reassembly
36. Check that the valve (7) slides freely in the valve
body (6).
37. Fit washer (8), mount the body (6) complete with
valve (7) in the cover. Position the 0-ring (5).
38. Fit the spring (4) and shims [2] and tighten the plug
(1) to a torque of 50- 60 Nm.
D . Disassembly of cover
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Removal (Fig. 7)
9/01.11
&ore.
tr
ait
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
9/01.13
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
APT
G . Reassembly of cover
Refitting of driving gear
97. Position the key (54). Fit the driving gear (53),
ensuring that it is correctly engaged on the key. Fit
the washer (52).
98. Smear the nut (51) with Loctite 241 and tighten to
a torque of 50 - 60 Nm.
99. Refit the plugs (27) smeared with Loctite 542 (if
removed).
100. Replace the 0-rings (49) on the pipe (48).
101. Replace the seal (34), refit the pipe and intake
manifold (47). Refit the screws (55).
102. Fit the filter vacuum switch (26).
103. Fit and tighten the test coupler (24) with its 0-ring.
104. Fit the sensor (4) (Autotronic, Datatronic) with
"Loctite 577 Sensor Sealing" or equivalent.
105. Screw in the sensor, without forcing it, until it is in
contact with the pump gear.
106. Unscrew the sensor 3/4 of a turn to provide
clearance of approx. 1 mm between the sensor
(4) and the gear (53). Tighten the nut (1) to a
torque of 18-20 Nm (Fig. 19).
107. Fit the 0-rings (30) (31) (32) in their respective
locations on the cover plate (28) (version without
trailer brake).
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lgr
Ile
9/01.15
108. Refit the plate, fit the screws (25) and tighten
them to a torque of 25 - 35 Nm.
109. Refit the connectors (6), (20), (23) and (33).
110. Fit the plug (21) and connector (14) (2WD version), connectors (16) and (22) (4WD version).
1 1 1. Refit the reducer (8) with its 0-ring and lowpressure switch (12), lightly smeared with Loctite
221 (version with Autotronic, see table on page 2).
112. Refit the pressure switch (12) coated with Loctite
221.
113. Refit the solenoid and plug (18) (2WD version).
Note: To avoid interference with the cab, do
not refit the p.t.o. brake solenoid on tractors
with a low cab. The p.t.o. brake solenoid is
equipped with a diode. It is marked with the
symbol
>
Tighten the solenoid to a torque of 1820 Nm.
114. Refit the high-pressure valve. Carry out operations 36 to 38.
115. Refit the cover. Carry out operations 15 to 33.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
i
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - LH cover
Joe
9102.1
CONTENTS
A. Removal
B. Refitting
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9102.2
Hydraulics - LH cover
A . Removal
1. Immobilise the tractor and lift the rear with a trolley
jack. Remove the rear wheel and put a stand in
place.
2. Drain the gearbox.
3. Mark and disconnect the cable of the lift (1) and
lowering (2) solenoid valves (Fig. 1A).
4. Disconnect and block the lift valve supply hose (3)
and the ram supply tube (4) (Fig. 1A).
On tractors with brake lubrication, disconnect the
union (10) and tube (11) (Fig. 1 B).
Note: On tractors with a low cab, remove the
bolts (7) and take away the valve to facilitate
access to the upper bolts (5) of the cover.
5. Remove the handbrake control support (6).
Disconnect the ground speed power take-off control
(8) and remove the support (9) (if fitted) (Fig. 1A).
Remove the bolts (7), remove the valve to facilitate
access to the upper bolts (5) on the cover (low cab)
(Fig. 1A).
6. Remove the cover and the transfer tube.
B . Refitting
7. Clean the cover and housing joint surfaces .
Note: As from serial number E240024, a check
valve (1) (Fig 3) screwed onto the inner face of
the cover maintains a pressure of
approximately 5 bar for the lubrication of
brakes (see section 9A01).
8. Check that the 0-rings (1) of the transfer tube are
not damaged and refit the tube (Fig. 2).
9. Coat the housing joint surface with a sealant
(Master Joint or equivalent).
10. Screw in two opposing guide studs G (Fig. 2).
1 1 . Refit the cover.
1 2. Mount the handbrake control support (6), the
GSPTO support (9) (if fitted) (Fig. 1A). Remove the
guide studs. Fit and tighten the bolts to a torque of
72 - 96 Nm. Connect the controls.
On tractors with a low cab, check that the 0-rings
of the lift control valve are not damaged and refit the
valve.
Fit and tighten the bolts (7) to a torque of 25-35 Nm
(Fig. 1A).
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - LH cover
ale
9102.3
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
wgirr
Age
9J01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
Service tool
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
9J01.2
General
The distribution unit (3) (Fig. 1) installed on the front
right-hand side of the gearbox consists of two separate
sections, one for clutch control and the other controlling
the four Dynashift ratios.
- Clutch section: This consists of a series of spools,
seals, a check valve and a piston, which are replaceable
using kits the contents of which are described in the
spare parts catalogue.
- Dynashift section (see section 9 K01).
Purpose of the control valve
This valve installed on the 17-bar system performs the
following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
17-bar supply
Accumulator
Distribution unit
Master cylinder hose
Clutch supply pipe
Issue 1
6.
7.
8.
9.
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9J01.3
P = 17 bar
R = Return
E = Clutch
1,-.........-1.........,kiiir
v,,_
-1111.,,,.....4...._
vq49,--10
,
Leeakari
l
a
IralgrIKIrsi
OL..*."aVXWI \'.1
L..--
moll
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9J01.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
"le
9J01.6
Overall view
11 ICS
, %,
.illiii 11167411110
41111
*-1
- _..
i-b-,
_, ZNIN.
4.
.-7_zia.. -,... -1", _
A
_ n. lictsnr...
4:411.111.12_11 EN
'
......
A IL.
F A'Air
d4
kV
`111\ NI 1:
11/4
1
...................m4
II ,, ,Ar
,Wilrfis.
/4
List of parts
(1) Plug
(2) Spring
(3) Non-return valve
(4) Safety valve spool
(5) Main spool
(6) Main spool sleeve
(7) Valve body
(8) Pressure valve sleeve
(9) Plugs
(10) 0-ring
(11) Circlip
Issue 1
IIIIIM 1
I ilirimj 'tka .
la1.11 1
"
-SrSgg'
,,sNok,
9.11.1rial
t
it,...
...
Fs
,..
Spring
Pusher
Circlip
Spring
Modulation spring
Quadring seal
Guide rings
Piston
Calibrated coupling
Modulation limit stop
(22) Spool limit stop
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
Fig. 7
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW9J01.7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Nse
Ng!
9J01.8
Reassembly
3. Check and clean the parts. Replace any parts that are
scored or deformed. Check that the check valve (4) and
spool (5) slide freely in sleeves (6) and (8). Before
reassembling, lubricate the seals with transmission oil.
4. Replace the 0-rings (10) and assemblies A, B and C
with repair kits. Fit the circlips (11).
Note: Before fitting the piston in assembly A,
preform the guide rings (18) in circular shapes,
with the knurled side facing valve body (7).
Lubricate the rings with miscible grease and position them in the grooves on the piston. The bore
in coupling (20) is calibrated.
5. Checking the modulation pressure
0
0
1M
0.6 (C UAINJ
MIN
11111111
N:.711111L
AW NEllk A,P=v
teig.4,114,.7"..,s2NANIVil 4-J 4tiv II
gq
lkl:NX
NkNol I
11.
.or
.
11
-.5-1r711911.
IVI,W
-PAO I
/,
71/4
II IN
311:2f7j;*
4ArMill Vim
0
101
41,
.- OD
0
FS
0
(11D-
IMO
as
0
0
Fig. 11
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
9J01.9
E. Service tool
Tool to be manufactured locally
- Spring compression tool.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9K01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
Ratios explanation
B.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The system control assembly comprises of the three
main parts (Fig. 1) :
-The distribution unit (1) mounted on the right side of
the gearbox can be fitted in two different versions :
A . Pressure loaded : The distribution unit consists of
two separate sections, one for clutch control and the
other controlling the Dynashift.
B . Spring loaded : The distribution unit controls only
the Dynashift system.
Every version has two internal oilways A and B (Fig. 2
and 3) allowing the oil to circulate from one solenoid
valve to the other.
- The solenoid valves (2) are screwed into the distribution unit, they include:
. the lower solenoid valve EV1 with four ports and two
positions.
. the upper solenoid valve EV2 with three ports and
two positions.
-The accumulator (3) mounted on the distribution unit,
on the inlet line, enhances the oil flow to fill - the
Dynashift unit piston chambers when necessary.
Thus piston reaction is maintained.
Make
Olaer
Type
1/20
Capacity
1 litre
Gas
Nitrogen
Pressure
9 1 bar (must
be checked every 6
month, with engine
stopped)
Lubrication
The oil flow coming from the cooler lubricates the
mechanical elements of the Dynashift, reverse shuttle
unit, gearbox and P.T.O. shaft which pass through the
transmission (see section 5 A01).
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'
mw
9K01.3
R
P
E
Issue 2
Fig. 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
Ar
9K01.4
EV2
EV1
Issue 2
Fig. 3
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9K01.5
A . Ratios explanation
Ratio A
41
Solenoid valve EV1 is supplied, thus allowing oil under pressure to reach gallery A. This gallery directs the oil to the front
piston via orifice E, and also, to solenoid valve EV2. Since EV2
is in neutral position, the oil can circulate through the spool
valve and orifice F to the rear piston chamber. Both pistons are
thus under pressure.
EV1.
EV2
Ratio B (Fig. 5)
A gear change from A to B is obtained when both solenoid
valves are supplied. The oil flow to the rear piston is thus
interrupted. The rear piston is pushed back by springs which
send oil back into gallery B. This gallery communicates with
the sump via solenoid valve EV1.
Front
Rear
Fig. 4
Ratio C (Fig. 6)
A gear change from B to C is obtained by interrupting the
electrical supply to solenoid valve EV1, solenoid valve EV2
remains energized. Gallery A is no longer under pressure but
is connected to the sump. Consequently, the front piston can
return to neutral position.
Gallery B is under pressure. The oil circulates to the rear piston
through solenoid valve EV2.
Ratio D (Fig. 7)
Ratio D is obtained by cutting the electrical supply to EV2. The
two pistons are connected to the sump by gallery A.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9K01.6
Ratio
Front piston
coupler (7)
Rear piston
coupler (8)
17 bar
17 bar
17 bar
17 bar
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
Hydraulics - Tests
ate
9L01.1
CONTENTS
Preparation
A.
High-flow circuit
B.
Low-flow circuit
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9L01.2
Hydraulics - Tests
Preparation
Before beginning the tests, the engine should be run to
bring the oil temperature up to a minimum of 60C
(140F).
The following equipment is recommended for the tests
described in this section. This equipment is available
through the MF network:
- MF 3001:
Pressure gauge kit
- MF 3002:
Hoses and unions kit
- MF 3003:
Flowmeter assembly
- 3582045 Ml: Hydraulic coupler
Otherwise, use suitable equivalent equipment.
In all cases, make sure of the direction of flow of the
oil in order to avoid damaging the flowmeter.
Choose pressure gauges, hoses and unions of
sufficient capacity and strength.
Issue 1
Engine speed
(rpm)
011/mn
-)I D125026
Q1:L/mn
P2:bar
I-0125027
2,200
47,7
53,5
2,200
47,7
53,5
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
9L01.3
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
9L01.4
max.
P2: 0 bar
40
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1W
Hydraulics - Tests
9L01.5
25,4
26,7
16,4619 Steering
at rest
1,000
11
12
16,4619 Steering
at rest
Diff.
lock
Front
PTO
Optional
Dynashift
ABCD
Speedshift
Hare
range
Clutch
PressureFront axle loaded
clutch
Electrohydraulic
reversing
control
As per
version
As per version
Reference flow Q3
0
Flow reading Q4
Flow observed
Q3 - 04 limn
Permissible flow
limn
Pressure P6 (bar)
1.5
3.5
16.4 -19
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
W'
9L01.6
Hydraulics - Tests
Ar
6110 to 6160
Spring-loaded with Dynashift
6170 to 6190
Pressure-loaded with Dynashift
Fig. 6a
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
Issue 1
ne
9L01.7
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
ale
9L01.9
A
B
C
D
Front
piston (2)
P11 (bar)
Rear
piston (3)
P12 (bar)
EV1
EV2
(V)
(V)
17
17
0
0
17
0
17
0
12
12
0
0
0
12
12
0
P13 (bar)
disengaged
P13 (bar)
engaged
1,000
2,200
0
0
17
17
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
9L01.10
Modulation pressure
The clutch valve gives a modulation between 11 bars
and 0 bar. This modulation corresponds to a pedal travel
extending between 32 mm 1 from the high stop
position and 25 mm 1 before the pedal low stop
position (the total travel being 150 mm).
- If the modulation travel is offset with respect to the
pedal travel, bleed the control using the bleeder (2)
located at the end of the valve (see Section 4A01,
Part E).
Lubrication circuit
Connect a pressure gauge onto the diagnostic
connector located on the right-hand side of the gearbox
(Fig. 11) to check P14.
Operate the pedal to disengage or engage the clutch.
Engine speed
(rpm)
P14 (bar)
disengaged
P14 (bar)
1,000
2,200
2
3
0.4
1.2
Issue 1
engaged
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Hydraulics - Tests
ase
9L01.11
Q5 I/mn
disengaged
Q6 limn
engaged
2,200
0.75
0.75
Issue 1
February 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9M01.1
SOMMAIRE
CONTENTS
A.
General
B.
Principle
C.
Layout of parts
D.
Circuit diagrams
E.
Identification of ports
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
ow'
9M01.2
A . General
6100 series tractors with six-cylinder engines can, on
option, be equipped with a hydraulic circuit of the closed
centre type with controlled flowrate and pressure. This
is made up of two separate HP and LP circuits supplied
by a variable-displacement pump which is, itself,
supplied by a booster pump.
Both pumps are driven by the external teeth on the PTO
clutch.
The booster pump installed on the left-hand cover
sucks the oil, through a strainer, into the common
reservoir formed by the centre housing and the
gearbox. The booster flow is then conveyed to the righthand cover and passes through the main filter before
flowing to the variable-displacement pump, and to the
cooling and gearbox lubricating circuit. The booster
pressure is maintained by a valve mounted on the righthand cover and calibrated at 5 bars.
The variable-displacement pump provides supply to
either one or two override units installed on the lefthand cover, as applicable:
- one unit for tractors without trailer braking,
- two units for tractors with trailer braking.
The first override unit ensures supply to:
- the steering system (or the steering system and trailer
braking) as first priority,
- the 17-bar circuit as second priority.
The second override unit, if fitted, shares its first priority
between the steering system and the trailer brake
circuit. When supply has been provided for these
priority functions, the remaining flow is available for the
lift control valve and auxiliary spool valves.
It is impossible for the whole output from the variabledisplacement pump to be absorbed by the override
units.
All the pilot signals from the various HP valves are sent
to the override units and then transmitted to the variable-displacement pump controller.
The controller responds to the pilot signal
corresponding to the function requiring the highest
pressure.
Characteristics of components
Suction strainer (27)
- Cartridge type
- Filtration threshold: 150 p,
B . Principle
The principle of the closed centre hydraulic system is to
limit the power absorbed by the engine. If no hydraulic
slave device is actuated, no output is discharged from
the variable-displacement pump. When one function is
engaged, the pump supplies only the output required
for that function.
Note : When the housing is drained, the main filter
is replaced or any servicing operation resulting in
the intake of air is performed on the circuit, the
hydraulic circuit must be primed.
Disconnect the electrical stop device on the injection pump and turn the engine with the starter
motor until the 5-bar pressure indicator light goes
out on the dashboard.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
List of parts
(1) Front differential lock
410
no'
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
Steering ram
Left-hand cover
Hydrostatic steering unit (Orbitrol)
Booster pump
Dynashift
Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve
PTO clutch
4WD clutch
Rear differential lock
PTO brake
Front PTO (if fitted)
Cooler
Clutch master cylinder
Brake master cylinders
Pressure control valve, 17 bar
Steering override valve
Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve
Differential lock solenoid valve
PTO solenoid valve
PTO brake solenoid valve
4WD solenoid valve
Front PTO solenoid valve (if fitted)
LP switch
Right-hand and left-hand brakes
Pump suction pipe
Suction strainer, 150 micrometres
Lubrication switch
Variable-displacement pump
Pressure relief valve
Trailer brake valve
Trailer brake connector
Auxiliary spool valves
Lift control valve
Lift ram
Valve 1.5 bar
LP diagnostic connector
Electrohydraulically controlled reverse shuttle
piston (if fitted)
(39) Lubrication: Speedshift or Dynashift (according
to version) - Reverse shuttle - Gearbox - Power
take-off and PTO brake
(40) Main filter, 15 micrometres
(41) Engine clutch and Dynashift control valve
(42) Accumulator (Dynashift version)
23
9M01.3
18 22)
40
High pressure
44
Low pressure
16
Lubrication
Suction
I
Return
48
Brake - Clutch
Pilot
27
31
53
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Layout of parts
Tractor 6160
Spring-loaded clutch with Speedshift and electrohydraulically controlled selector cover (according to
option)
Layout of parts
Tractor 6160
(45)
(46)
(62)
(63)
Fit
Layout of parts
Tractor 6160
(64)
(65)
SOMMAIRE
issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
9M01.5
D . Diagrams
YFt
) TO
SOMMAIRE
Ftf Ftn
ImF
L_
xhF
-T
. 11.1174
AS
it
19
10
_
C2 18
0
i
of i I
11
5 her
42
Pressure Loaded
Xj
Ell 0
Dynast& E
__, 0
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
List of parts
(16) Pressure control valve, 17 bar
(18) Hare/Tortoise solenoid valve
(19) Differential lock solenoid valve
(20) PTO solenoid valve
(21) PTO brake solenoid valve
(22) 4WD solenoid valve
(24) LP switch
(28) Lubrication switch
(37) LP diagnostic connector
(44) Clogging indicator
(55) LS diagnostic connector
(56) HP diagnostic connector
(57) Lubrication diagnostic connector
(58) Safety valve, 22 bar
(59) Dynashift solenoid valves (EV1 and EV2)
(61) Accumulator
(63) Spring-loaded clutch
(64) Speedshift solenoid valve
(65) Speedshift unit
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Noe
9N01.1
CONTENTS
- General
A. Identification of ports
B. Operation of spools
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9N01.2
General
The design of the trailer braking system for 6100 series
tractors is identical to that of 8100 series tractors.
The hydraulic unit mounted on the right-hand cover
includes two override units installed in series.
The inner unit (1) (Fig. 1) ensures priority to the 17-bar
circuits and the lift control valve mounted on the auxiliary
spool valve assembly.
The outer unit (2) (Fig 2) shares priority between the
steering and trailer braking.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
J
K
:
:
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
9N01.3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
B . Operation of spools
When the trailer brake is not actuated, there is no pressure in channel K and the spool allows communication
between channels L and R.
As soon as the tractor braking system is used, the
pressure in channel K moves the piston (7) which
pushes the spool (6) to the left, so allowing flow
between channels J and L.
The pressure increase in channel L acts on the end of
the spool (6) and compresses the spring (8), so reestablishing the balance allowing the pressure to be
maintained in channel L according to the pressure in
channel K.
This maintaining of pressure is obtained by establishing
communication between channel L and either channel
J or port R.
Note : As in the case of the override unit (1) (see
Section 9P01), there is 0.5 I flow from channel A to
channel D (dynamic type steering) via a hole and a
restrictor in the spool (4).
Tightening torque
Bolt V : 25 to 35 Nm, Loctite 542
Special points
- Check for leaks from the seals and unions.
- Carry out hydraulic tests (see Section 9V01).
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
9N01.5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
AV
9P01.1
CONTENTS
- General
A. Identification of ports
B. Operation
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'se
9P01.2
General
The override unit (50) which includes two spools (Fig. 3)
installed on the right-hand cover (54) receives flow from
the variable displacement pump. It ensures that priority
flows are provided to the steering circuit via the trailer
brake unit (if fitted) and the low-pressure circuit (17
bars). The oil is then conveyed to the lift control valve
and the auxiliary spool valves.
Tightening torque (Fig. 2)
Bolts V : 25 to 35 Nm, Loctite 542.
Special points
- Check for leaks from hydraulic unions 0-rings
between the override unit and the hydraulic cover.
- Carry out hydraulic tests (see Section 9V01) and check
that the controls operate correctly.
- Carry out a road test.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
9P01.3
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
INO
9P01.4
Hydraulics - Closed
centre
B . Operation (Fig. 3)
1st priority : Steering (or 2nd unit if
equipped with trailer braking)
Spool (2) moves to the left due to the action of spring
(3).
The flow sent along channel B (Fig. 1) from the variable
displacement pump is conveyed, as priority, to the
Orbitrol distribution valve through channel A.
- Steering in neutral : The steering distribution valve
(Orbitrol) is in the closed position. Pressure from the
pump lifts spool (2) and the flow is directed to channel
H.
- Steering actuated : A pilot pressure from the Orbitrol
distribution valve arrives at port D and pushes spool (2)
to the left, allowing flow through to port A supplying
the Orbitrol unit.
Note : A flowrate of approximately 0.5 limn passes
from port A to port D via a hole and a restrictor in
spool (2). This flow produces a pressure of approximately 6 bars at port D. The LS line carries that
pressure to the pump regulator, set at 22 bars, to
obtain a standby pressure of 28 bars.
In the version equipped with trailer braking, ports A and
D are closed with blanking plugs.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
itt
9P01.5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
9Q01.1
CONTENTS
General - Operation
A.
B.
Assembly procedure
C.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Operation (Fig. 1)
When the spool (1) is pulled, the fluid enters via channel
P, passes through restrictor C and port D. It is then
routed to channel E, pushes rod (2) and enters chamber
F. At the same time, the ramp of the spool valve raises
the plug A and the oil flows via port B.
Supply to port A is obtained by pushing the spool (1).
The flowrate is regulated by means of the button (4) and
the controlling spool valve (5).
Proposed assemblies
GP050 = a + b
GP052 =a+b+c
GP054 =c+c+c
Couplers
The couplers are of the Parker 7451 type: coupling /
uncoupling by pressure on one side. These couplers
are identical to those fitted on the open centre type
hydraulic centre.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9Q01.3
LS
v4
11Ir=16rat;
111
1
hill
ts
1
11
'41
1.6
Section N
Fig. 1
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
9Q01.4
Description of components
(5) Intermediate units
(6) End plate
(17) Lift control valve
(19) Inlet unit
(33) Auxiliary spool valves
Fig. 2
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9Q01.5
B
A
Identification of ports
B
A
VO=1
1.2
A - B Couplers
P
HP pressure from variable displacement
pump via override unit
or units (according to
option) and lift control
valve
Return from auxiliary
R
spool valves (under
level of hydraulic fluid)
LS
Signal to variable
displacement pump
controller via lift control
valve or override unit or
units (according to option)
i A
1
11
R Ls P
1
1
11
Ls
Fig. 3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me'
9Q01.6
Removal
1. On each auxiliary spool valves, disconnect the
control cables (2) and the valve adjusting rods (9)
(flow control).
2. Disconnect the tubes (8), (16) and (30) and hoses
(15)and (31).
3. Mark and disconnect the wiring harnesses from the
raising and lowering solenoid valves, (14) and (18)
respectively.
4. Remove the bolts (10). Detach and remove the
support and spool valves assembly.
5. Remove the bolts (11). Separate the spool valves
unit from the support.
Refitting
6. Carry out the same operations as for removal in the
reverse order.
7. Fit and adjust the control cables on the spool valves
(see C).
8. Check the correct operation of the spool valves in
each position and the adjustment of the flow control
(see hydraulic tests, section 9V01).
Fig. 4
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9Q01.7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 8
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9Q01.9
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9 RO1
9R01.1
CONTENTS
-
General
B. Description
C. Neutral position
D. Lifting position
E. Lowering position
F. Assembly procedure
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
The lift control valve (17) is different from the lift control
valve used with the hydraulic system of the open centre
type. Located between the inlet unit (19) and the
auxiliary spool valves assembly, it is attached to a
support mounted to the rear of the lift cover (Fig. 1).
Its function is to regulate the flow of hydraulic fluid to
and from the lift rams according to the signals
transmitted to it by the computer of the electronic lifting
system.
The lift control valve is equipped with an LS pilot port for
the load sensing system.
This pilot port allows the lift control valve to send
pressure data to the variable-displacement pump
controller via the override unit.
Description (Figures 2 to 6)
The BOSCH lift control valve is made up of two sections :
Hydraulic section (lift control valve)
(1) Non-return valve keeping the hydraulic fluid in the
rams
(2) Spool assembly used during the lowering phase
(4) Control spool
(5) Flow regulating spool
(6) Shock valve
(9) Flow regulating spool spring
(10) Control spool spring
(11) Spool assembly spring
Or
(53)
Designation of ports (Figures 3 to 6)
P : High pressure from the variable-displacement
pump via the override unit or units (according to
option)
R : Return from auxiliary spool valves (under level of
hydraulic fluid)
V : Lift rams
LS : Signal to the variable-displacement pump
controller via the override unit or units (according
to option)
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9R01.3
.-1I 0
Mil
R.
P P2
LSj
Clou0
Fig. 3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
C . Neutral position
When the engine is stopped and the lift control valve is
in the neutral position, the control spool (4) and the
spool assembly (2) are held in position by springs (10)
and (11), respectively.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
D . Lifting position
When the lifting solenoid valve (8) is actuated , the
control spool (2) moves upwards.
The LS pressure data is transmitted onto the upper face
of the flow regulating spool (5) (same side as spring (9))
and moves the spool downwards, so directing the flow
to the control spool and the non-return valve (1).
The movement of the flow regulating spool is damped
by the volume of hydraulic fluid contained in chamber
9R01.5
111d 11.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
E . Lowering position
F . Assembly procedure
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
9S01.1
CONTENTS
General
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
General
Steering unit
Unlike the unit with an open centre type hydraulic
system, the LSD steering unit is equipped with a fifth LS
port.
Issue 1
List
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
of parts
Bolt
Bolt
0-ring
Cover plate
0-ring
Stator
Pin
0-ring
Rotor
Spacer
Link shaft
Washer
Centring springs
Needle-roller bearing
Bush
Washer
0-ring
Relief valve
Seal
Shock valve
Orbitrol distribution valve
Non-return valve
Suction valves
Ring
Spool valve
Check valve
Sleeve
0-ring
Distributor plate
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
LAI I FAIr//02
41/ AGfirdrA4 i IS
4trAk
.41
WAtariar .11riM
1115-4
raTOWaV
MB
V.*
9S01.3
11
e
V:
d
46
MIRE ."3.1 LN
gr4/1.77,11
,.140AgromPANzzjar4,.4.
le1=1is7
;
t1N470rAMIRC
1:.v.-,417..1710-ik:=
;1111==ar--4111
k
et GO 0000 0
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Two shock valves (20) and two suction valves (23) are
placed in ports L and R of this distribution valve.
The shock valves (20) protect the circuit between the
steering ram and the distribution valve from any impact
on the wheels.
The suction valves (23) allow the oil released by the
shock valves (20) to flow from the right-hand channel to
the left-hand channel or vice versa, depending on the
displacement of the piston in the steering ram.
B
L
LS
P
Override unit
Supply to left-hand side of steering ram
Control
High-flow supply from variable displacement
pump
Issue 1
P.,
R
T
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9S01.5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vAr
The oil returning from the cylinder passes via the nonreturn valve (22) and supplies the metering device.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
no'
9S01.7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
lAr
LIAISONS MECANIQUES
B :
LS :
L :
P :
R:
T:
Override unit
Control
Supply to left-hand coupling of steering ram
High-flow supply from variable displacement pump
Supply to right-hand coupling of steering ram
Return to housing via selector cover
Issue 1
Fig. 6
10. Remove the washers (12) and (16), the needleroller bearing (14) and the ring (24) from the sleeve/
spool valve assembly.
Remove the pin (7) and the centring springs (13) by
pressing on one of their ends. Separate the sleeve
(27) from the spool valve (25) .
11 . Unscrew the cap of the relief valve (18) . Using an
8 mm Allen key, remove the threaded bush and
take out the seal, the spring and the valve. (The
crimped seat is not removable).
1 2. Unscrew the two caps from the shock valves (20),
and remove the seals.
Using a 6 mm Allen key, remove the threaded
bushes and take out the springs, the balls and their
seats. (The crimped seats are not removable).
1 3. Extract the seal (19), the bush (15) and 0-ring (17) .
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
9S01.9
18. Place the balls and springs in the recesses for the
shock valves (20). Screw in the threaded bushes,
position the seals and tighten the caps.
19. Place the valve and spring in the recess for the relief
valve (18) and screw in the threaded bush. Position
the seal and tighten the cap to a torque of 40 to
60 Nm.
20. Insert the spool valve (25) in the sleeve (27).
Position the centring springs (13) as shown in
Figure 7 and fit the pin (7).
21. Position the ring (24) on the sleeve and spool valve
assembly so that the chamfer facilitates assembly
in the distribution valve.
22. Fit washers (12) and (16) with the chamfer on
washer (12) directed towards the centring springs
(13) and with the needle-roller bearing (14)
positioned between them.
23. Fit the sleeve and spool valve assembly in the
distribution valve, applying a slight oscillating
movement. Check that the pin (7) is held
horizontally.
24. Place the two balls and the two pins in the recesses
for the suction valves (23).
25. Place the ball in the recess for the non-return valve
(22) and screw in the threaded bush.
26. Position the splined link shaft (11).
Fig. 7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9 TO1
9T01.1
CONTENTS
- General
11
14
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
List of parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Bolt
Pressure relief valve
Supply to Orbitrol
Bolt
LS piloting from Orbitrol
LS piloting to pump controller
Override unit or trailer brake unit (if fitted)
Cover
LS diagnostic connector
HP diagnostic connector
Pump controller
Union (LS)
LP switch (17 bars)
Solenoid valves (PTO, PTO brake,
to differential lock (front and rear),
(19) and 4WD)
(20) LP diagnostic connector
Issue 1
Plug
Piloting from brake master cylinders
PTO brake union
2WD or 4WD differential lock union
Engine speed sensor
4WD union
Main filter, 15 micrometres
LP union
Booster and lubrication pressure diagnostic connector
Supply to lift control valve and auxiliary spool valves
LS piloting to auxiliary spool valves and lift control
valve
Bolt
Trailer brake hose
Clogging indicator
Bolt
Locating dowels
Nut
Washer
Gear
Key
Variable-displacement pump
Booster and lubrication pressure switch
Union and pipe to cooler
Safety valve, 5 bar
Safety valve, 22 bar
Heat-sensitive switch
Pump attaching bolt
Nuts
Studs
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
net
9T01.3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
IRO
9T01.4
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
10
9T01.5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 4
Issue 1
Fig. 5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ay
9T01.7
F
G
L
P
R
S
S1
Fig. 7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
te
1
9T01.8
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9T01.9
Special points
- An upper bolt on the cover is hidden by the union
screwed onto the controller (12). The controller should
be removed to facilitate removal of the cover.
- If it is necessary to remove the suction pipe (1),
remove the bolt (2) (Fig 9). Orient the pipe as required
and remove it by manoeuvring it through the opening
in the cover.
- To remove the safety valve (45) on the LP circuit,
compress the spring (3) with a screwdriver and remove
the circlip (1). Remove components (2) to (4) (Fig. 10).
Check that the valve (4) slides freely in its housing.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ate
9T01.10
Refitting
9. Clean the mating faces on the housing and cover.
10. Check that the two locating dowels (36) are in place.
Replace the 0-rings on the HIT and PTO channels (Fig. 11).
11. Fit the suction pipe (1) if it was removed. Tighten the bolt (2).
Fit the booster pipe (3) with the notch in the dowel (1).
Lightly smear the seal (4) with miscible grease and position
it on the flange of the pipe (3) (Fig. 9).
12. Smear the mating face on the cover with a sealing compound
(Loctite 510 or equivalent) without blocking the Hare/Tortoise
and PTO ports.
13. Fill the pump (41) with transmission oil via port "0" (Fig. 8).
14. Slide the cover onto the studs and apply it onto the centre
housing, checking that the suction pipe (1) is correctly
positioned on the 5-bar valve (48) between the mating faces
between the cover and the housing (Fig. 12).
15. Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of between 120 and 160 N m
and the nuts to between 90 and 120 Nm.
16. Replace the 0-rings (1) to (3) (Fig. 13) and reinstall the
override unit or the trailer brake unit (if fitted). Smear the
bolts (4)with Loctite 542 and tighten them to a torque of
between 25 and 35 Nm (Fig. 8).
17. Reconnect the engine speed sensor, the switches, the
solenoid valve harnesses and the pipes.
18. Raise the tractor and refit the wheel. Remove the axle stand
and tighten the wheel nuts to a torque of 400 to 450 Nm.
19. Top up the oil in the centre housing.
20. Check the operation of the electric circuits, the LP switch
(14), the booster switch (lubrication) (42), the clogging
switch (34), the heat-sensitive switch (46) and the solenoid
valves.
21. Check for leaks on the cover mating face and the hydraulic
unions.
Special points
- Sensor (25): Smear the threads with Loctite 577 Sensor Sealing
compound or equivalent.
- Booster switch (lubrication) (42), LP switch (14) and heatsensitive switch (46): Lightly smear the threads with Loctite
542.
- If a replacement pump has to be fitted (see part C), repeat the
hydraulic tests (see Section 9V01).
Tightening torques
- Solenoid valves (15) to (19): 18 to 20 Nm,
- Knurled nuts: 4 to 5 Nm.
- 5-bar safety valve (44): Coat the threads with Loctite 241 and
tighten to between 10 and 20 Nm using the locally manufactured
tool.
- Sensor locknut (25): 10 to 15 Nm.
- Pressure relief valve (2): 150 Nm.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9T01.11
"-----1
.#:000
10
12
R
F
0 0
G
Fig.14
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ay
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9T01.13
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6100
I;Fr
SERIES TRACTORS
9T02.1
CONTENTS
- General
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
9T02.2
General
The left-hand cover installed on the centre housing
supports the following components :
On its inside face:
- booster pump (2) and it driving gear (12)
- suction manifold (4)
On its outside face:
List of parts
(1) Suction pipe
(2) Booster pump
(3) Booster pipe
(4) Suction manifold
(5) 0-ring
(6) Strainer
(7) Bolt
(8) Plug
(9) Seal
(10) Bolt
(11) Washer
(12) Gear
(13) Key
(14) Cover
(15) Nut
(16) Locating dowels
(17) 0-ring
(18) Gasket
(19) Bolt
(20) Bowl
(21) 0-ring
(22) Bolt
(23) 0-ring
(24) Locating pins
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
9T02.3
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
9T02.4
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9T02.5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Fig. 4
A:
C:
G:
Issue 1
Fig. 5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
use
9T02.7
Refitting
6. Clean the mating face between the housing and the
cover. Apply Loctite 510 or equivalent on the housing
mating face.
7. Replace the 0-ring (17) and position the seal (5) on
the suction manifold (4) (Fig. 1).
8. Reinstall the manifold on the pipe (1).
9. Slide the gasket (18) on the guide dowels G2, with
the face on the manifold side lightly smeared with
silicone (Silicomettype). Screw the two diametrically
opposite guide dowels G1 on the housing (Fig. 7).
10. Check that the two locating dowels (16) are in place
(Fig. 5).
11. Slide the cover onto the guide dowels G1 and G2
and fit it on the housing.
1 2. Remove the guide dowels G2 alternately and fit
bolts (7) smeared with Loctite 241 and tighten to a
torque of 15 to 20 Nm.
1 3. Remove the guide dowels G1. Reinstall the
supports. Fit bolts (10) and (19) and tighten them to
a torque of 90 to 120 Nm.
14. If necessary, replace the 0-ring (21) on the bowl
(20). Install the strainer (6) and tighten the bowl.
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
iTr
9T02.8
Tightening torques
- Nut (15) : 50 to 60 Nm (Loctite 241)
- Bolt (22) : 40 to 50 Nm (Loctite 241)
Final operation
25. Reinstall the cover (see A).
0 0 0
111
,
..0Ir
ITN 4.7-
.!A, `a
0
Issue 1
A
w
NM_
Fig. 9
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9T02.9
Removal
27. Clamp the pump in a vice fitted with plastic jaws.
28. Remove the bolts (1) and the cover (7) (Fig. 10).
29. Remove the circlip (3), the lip seal (4) (Fig. 11) and
the 0-rings (5) and (6) (Fig. 12).
Refitting
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9U01.1
CONTENTS
A. Working on brake and clutch master cylinders
F.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9U01.3
Pedals latched
Braking and pressure balancing
The force applied on both pedals, transmitted by the
push rods (7) moves the pistons (4) in the bores of the
two master cylinders. The two valves (1) close the feed
ports, the two balancing valves (3) are opened by the
pistons (4) and balls (2). The pressure is balanced in the
two master cylinders by the balancing junction D.
The pressurised oil is also directed to ports C and C' of
the main brake circuit.
Trailer braking
Continuous action of pistons (4) and (6) closing valves
F and F'. Chambers E and E' are pressurised and feed
the control system of the trailer brake spool (see Section
9N01) via ports A and A'.
000
m
i
r
'
111
.1741
1,7,7
,..warri.:4A.
1117.
yAr 1,.
1/4%.1
-
\ks.,
A .4
1111
3,30
050
E F
A
B
C
00
0
D
E
Fig. 2
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ise
9001.4
Fig. 3
Brake master cylinders with trailer brake (single circuit)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Issue 1
(8)
(9)
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1;k
9U01.5
Pedals latched
Braking and pressure balancing
The force applied on both pedals, transmitted by the
push rods (7) moves the pistons (4) in the bores of the
two master cylinders. The two valves (1) close the feed
ports, the two balancing valves (3) are opened by the
pistons (4) and balls (2).
The pressure is balanced in the two master cylinders
by the balancing junction D.
The pressurised oil is also directed to ports C and C' of
the main brake circuit.
Fig. 5
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'NO
9U01.6
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(50)
(51)
(54)
Fig. 6
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
aye
9U01.7
14
A
1.
IMINNIN
'
NIL
1.111111111
'Mr
O.b
11
kt
I A 01I
Novi
A
B
W
"
IlEh.
Fig. 10
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Fig. 12
Fig. 9
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
9U01.9
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
41;Pv
m*'
9V01.1
9 vol Tests
CONTENTS
2
- Preparation
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
9V01.2
Preparation
Before beginning the tests, the engine should be run to
bring the oil temperature up to a minimum of 80C
(176F).
To help increase the oil temperature:
- Run the engine at 2,000 rpm.
- Connect a flowmeter onto an auxiliary spool valve.
- Keep that spool valve actuated.
- Limit the flow in the flowmeter.
- As soon as the oil temperature rises to above 80C
(176F), release the auxiliary spool valve and open the
flowmeter valve.
The following equipment is recommended for the tests
described in this section. This equipment is available
through the MF network:
- MF 3001: Pressure gauge kit
- MF 3002: Hoses and unions kit
- MF 3004: Flowmeter assembly with turbine
- 3582045M1: Diagnostic coupler
Otherwise, use suitable equivalent equipment.
In all cases, make sure of the direction of flow of the
oil to avoid damaging the flowmeter.
Choose pressure gauges, hoses and unions of
sufficient capacity and strength.
Values measured during tests:
- max. flowrate: 105 I/mn,
- min. flowrate: 0 - 5 I/mn,
- max. pressure: 200 bars,
- min. pressure: 0.4 bar.
A. High-pressure circuit
The high-pressure circuit supplies the following
systems:
- the steering,
- the brakes,
- the auxiliary spool valves,
- the lifting system.
1. Booster pressure of the main variabledisplacement pump
- Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostic connector
located on the right-hand hydraulic cover (Figures 1
and 3) and check P1.
Engine speed
rpm
P1
(bar)
1,000
2,200
5,2
6,3
Issue 1
P1
(bar)
P3
(bar)
1,000
2,200
4
4
25
25
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
IRO
9V01.3
Engine speed
rpm
Q1
P4
P5
(limn)
(bar)
(bar)
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
90/100
90/100
90/100
90/100
90/100
0
P4 = P5
- 22 + 1 bar
110
130
150
170
180
190
Engine
speed
rpm
P6
P7
Q2
(bar)
(bar)
(limn)
min.
Max.
2,200
106
130
95
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
9V01.4
Ar
6. Lifting
Maximum pressure
Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostic
connector (Figures 9 and 10) located:
on the pump controller: XLS pressure = P9,
on the right-hand cover: pump pressure = P10.
Run the engine at 1,000 rpm.
Use the external lift control buttons to engage the
maximum high position:
P9 and P10 = 190
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, connect a hand-operated
calibrating pump to the lift rams (with the rams linked
together) (Fig. 10).
- Apply pressure with the calibrating pump.
P11 = 220 to 240 bars
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Issue 1
9V01.5
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9V01.6
7. Steering
Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to each diagnostic
connector and run the engine as described in
paragraph 6.
- Slowly turn the steering wheel and check that P12
and P13 gradually increase (Fig. 11).
P12 = 145 bars
P13 = 170 bars
Shock valve
- With the engine stopped, connect a hand-operated
calibrating pump under one of the two steering ram
supply points.
- Apply pressure with the calibrating pump (Fig. 11):
P14 = 225 to 250 bars
- Carry out the same procedure for the second steering
ram supply point.
Checking the steering circuit for leaks
- Run the engine at 1,000 rpm.
- Apply full steering lock and apply a torque of 4 Nm on
the steering wheel. It must not turn at more than 2
revolutions per minute. If the steering wheel turns at
more than 2 rpm, disconnect the lines supplying the
rams and block the two openings.
- Apply the same torque on the steering wheel. If it
turns at less than 2 rpm, there is a leak from the ram.
8. Trailer brake (if fitted)
Maximum pressure
- Connect a pressure gauge to the quick coupler on the
trailer brake system (Fig. 11) to read P15.
- Run the engine at 2,200 rpm.
- With the brake pedals coupled together, gradually
apply force.
- The pressure reading must gradually increase to
reach:
P15 = 120 to 150 bars
- If the pressure does not increase gradually, bleed the
brake circuit.
Flowrate
- Connect a flowmeter to the quick coupler on the
trailer brake system. Connect the return to the filling
port and read Q3.
Engine speed
rpm
Q3
(limn)
min.
1,000
27
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me'
9V01.7
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9V01.8
B. Low-pressure circuit
The 17-bar low-pressure circuit supplies the following
systems:
Dynashift or Speedshift,
engine clutch (pressure-loaded only),
rear power take-off clutch,
front take-off clutch (if fitted),
4WD clutch,
front and rear differential lock,
Hare/Tortoise range,
electrohydraulic reverse shuttle control (if fitted).
1. 17-bar circuit
Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostic connector
(Figures 12 and 14) located to the front of the righthand hydraulic cover to check P16.
Run the engine at 1,000 rpm.
Declutch (pressure-loaded clutch only) and deactivate
all the low-pressure components.
The front axle must be engaged with the pressure
used only for declutching.
Place the range lever in the Tortoise position and the
Dynashift lever in position D.
On tractors equipped with Speedshift, place the lever
in position C (30 km/h tractor) or position D (40 km/h
tractor).
Engage each system. The pressure must not drop
below 14 bars and must return to its initial level when
each system is engaged.
P16 = 17 1 bar
2. Booster circuit and cooling safety
- Connecta pressure gauge to the diagnostic connector
located on the right-hand cover (Figures 13 and 14) to
check P17.
Engine speed
rpm
P17
bar
1,000
2,200
5
6
P18
(bar)
P19
(bar)
1,000
2,200
2
2,3
1,9
2
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9V01.9
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
b) Flowrate test
- Connect a flowmeter to the lubricating circuit between
the manifold and the gearbox to read Q4 (Fig. 16).
Important: It is mandatory that the flowmeter
valve must be in the maximum open position until
the end of the test.
Engine speed
rpm
Q4
(limn)
min.
1,000
2,200
5
6
Ratio
a) Dynashift
- Remove the guard preventing access to the
connectors (30 km/h tractors, pressure-loaded clutch).
- Remove the plugs (1) from the distribution unit.
- Screw on two male connectors (2) and (3), ref.
3384387M1, and connect them to diagnostic
connectors fitted on pressure gauges with a capacity
of approximately 30 bars (Figures 15 and 16).
- Start the engine.
- Operate the lever under the steering wheel to select
each ratio (A, B, C and D).
- Check whether the pressures are correct compared
with the table:
A
B
C
D
Front piston
connector (2)
P22 (bar)
Rear piston
connector (3)
P23 (bar)
EV1
EV1
(V)
(V)
17
17
0
0
17
17
0
0
12
12
0
0
12
12
0
0
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW9V01.11
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9V01.12
14r
b) Clutch
Control circuit
- Connect a pressure gauge to the diagnostic connector
of the clutch valve located on the right-hand side of
the gearbox (Figures 17 and 20) to check P24.
- Operate the pedal to engage or disengage the clutch.
Engine speed
rpm
P24
(bar)
disengaged
P24
(bar)
engaged
1,000
2,200
0
0
17
17
Modulation pressure
- The clutch valve modulates between 11 bars and 0
bar. This modulation corresponds to a pedal travel
extending 32 + 1 mm from the high stop position and
25 + 1 mm before the pedal low stop position (the
total travel being 150 mm).
. If the modulation travel is offset with respect to the
pedal travel, the control system must be bled using
the bleeder (2) located at the end of the valve (see
Seciton 4A01, E).
P25
(bar)
disengaged
P25
(bar)
engaged
1,000
2,200
2
3
0,4
1,2
i
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
9V01.13
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
9V01.14
14r
Engine speed
rpm
Q5
disengaged
(limn)
Q5
engaged
(limn)
1,000
3 max.
Issue 1
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
10 . ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Contents
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Vgr
10A01.1
CONTENTS
A. General
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. Fuses
issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. General
MF 6100 tractors are equipped with a 12-volt electrical
system with negative earth, charged by a 70-ampere
alternator.
The alternator has an integrated rectifier and charging
regulator. An additional terminal is provided to supply
power to the electronic engine tachometer. The
alternator is fitted on the right-hand side of the engine
and is driven by a twin belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The starter motor, mounted on the right-hand side of
1000 series engines, is of the pre-engaged type.
A starting safety switch, located under the clutch pedal,
cuts off the power supply to the starter motor when the
clutch is not pressed.
Specifications
Battery
MF 6110-6120-6130-6140
Quantity
Make
Type
Model
Cold start performance
Reserve capacity at 25 A
Voltage
Acid capacity
1
CEAC
Maintenance-free
FCM 125388
505 A (-18C)
120 mn
12 V
8.2 I
Issue 1
Valeo
NG
70 A
Integrated
14.2 V
Magnetti-Marelli
M127 (2.8 kW)
12 V
Pre-engaged
Item
Colour
Ways
C1
C2
Black (circular)
Black (circular)
Red band
Black
Black
White
White
Black
Black (circular)
Black
Black
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
White
White
Black
Black
Black
9
9
C3
C4
C5
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C30
C31
C33
C34
C60
6
6
5
13
2
3
1
1
2
1
5
4
3
6
2
1
2
2
1
8
1
1
1
3
13
11
2
2
6
Identification of harnesses
Item
Description of harnesses
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(I)
(m)
(o)
(t)
(u)
(w)
(ae)
(af)
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mse
10A01.3
SOMMAIRE
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Abbreviations
HB:
Handbrake buzzer (if fitted)
PB:
Pneumatic brake (if fitted)
PS:
Pneumatic seat (if fitted)
emb: end fitting
+ P = + permanently live
+ AC = + live when ignition is on
Colour code
A = Aluminium
B = White
BL = Blue
G = Grey
I
= Ivory
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
0 = Orange
R = Red
RO = Pink
V = Green
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
IRO
10A01.3
N
10
RO
R
- IC24
0C23
Cl
31
F1
291
13
F20 =
32
C24
7
6
CC1
--441
C2
c-NF -C)
38
PB
a s
3
4
19
C3
F6
3
5
18
20A 7.5A
22
30
NY_
C7
C7
1 2
23
E7
C14
67
29
24
EA
C28
3
C28
25
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
uj
R-E)
28
www.maskinisten.net
ase
10A01.4
-44P-
2. Engine equipment
<ey to diagram
1. Starter switch
6. Alternator warning light
17. Starter
18. Battery
19. Battery main switch (optional)
31. Safety switch
32. Alternator
33. Engine oil pressure switch
34. Temperature gauge
35. Fuel gauge
36. Air filter vacuum gauge
37. Hydraulic filter vacuum switch
38. Gauges with additional fuel tank
39. Rev. counter / totaliser
1.0. Engine oil pressure warning light
. Water temperature gauge
1.2. Fuel gauge indicator
2. Air filter clogging warning light
1.4. Hydraulic filter clogging warning light
1.5. Injection pump control solenoid
1.7. Thermostart
1.8. Hydraulic filter clogging indicator
1.9. Hydraulic low-pressure switch
.. .olour code
= Aluminium
3 = White
3L = Blue
= Grey
= Ivory
= Yellow
A = Brown
= Black
) = Orange
1 = Red
10 = Pink
= Green
= Violet
= Light
= Dark
;sue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
10A01.4
di
C31
31
VI
39
eso a
B
C2
40
33
CI
C60
36
43
44
48
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
10A01.5
Key to diagram
Item
Colour
C7
C9
C10
C16
C60
C62
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
C77
White
Black
White
White
White
White
Black
White
White
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
N = Black
R = Red
RO = Pink
V = Green
VI = Violet
F = Dark
Black
Black
Black
Ways
13
3
6
4
6
6
6
2
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
6
6
2
Tubular connection
Identification of harnesses
0:)6 cu
Item
Colour code
A = Aluminium
B = White
BL = Blue
G = Grey
I
= Ivory
J = Yellow
M = Brown
Identification of connectors
< C
Starter switch
Stop switches
Rear RH direction indicator
Rear RH brake light
Rear RH work lamp
Number-plate lights
Power socket
Rear LH work lamp
Rear LH brake light
Rear LH direction indicator
Front LH direction indicator
Front LH parking light
Front LH work lamp
Front LH headlight
Horn
Front RH headlight
Front RH work lamp
Front RH parking light
Front RH direction indicator
Flashing beacon
Flashing beacon switch
Flasher unit
Lighting selector switches
Hazard warning light switch
Instrument panel assembly illumination
LH direction indicator warning light
RH direction indicator warning light
Front headlight main beam warning light
1st trailer warning light
2nd trailer warning light
Rear work lamps switch
Front work lamps switch
Rear work lamp relays
Front work lamp relays
Front and rear work lamp relays
Fuel gauge
cr)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
CD
SOMMAIRE
Issue 1
Description of harnesses
Instrument panel harness
Engine harness
Roof harness
Instrument panel/roof (lower section)
Instrument panel/roof harness (upper section)
Front work lamps harness (accessories)
Front and rear lighting harness
Roof lighting harness
Number-plate illumination harness
Instrument panel / roof illumination harness
Roof lights harness
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
10A01.5
C2
23
21
It
22
24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31
32
fp
1s2
)31
k
BL
74
C63
C7 o
-400
F18
a>
16
II
B.ertb.1
0
0
41[INNIMI
611MUM
ri35
V.0
17
116 II F23
F24
1F20
grgg
ii
0,131111
1
11
10M1
BL
34
114
3
C62
19
060
C65
'
C60
C67
C67
B.____c
18
BsnbN
1111111111111
C77
113
=--
RIP
EA
coo
C65
114
OID
'411111111*ZIESSI
=1111111311110111111116
O
O
041,0
Nmammir U
ammomea=1111M11
1
C100
a
F15 111
VF
Ra
Cl.
C16
C6
111
04
SOMMAIRE
20
V
ELF
C69
BLF --O
17
VF
C62
3
CIO
)
LF >
C63
C63
,r 2
c--vF
c-0
C71
----BL-C
C63
CIO
3C72
3-12c
>----N--C
16
i
t)
e'fie
. qi 4105)
C9
BLF
15
ra
t)
4.11Piir0-411
(4,4, 1:flefit IN kg
Oo
0
)--BL
21
22
111
111,M11
ailm0 8 23
Fll till aloe
.,
sa.
MAN wri11111
F6
4
F12 lr".
" .I"laill011.
141PIIII4
0
C73
--c
>N--C
,L,.......-
m atl.....Ar...,.
C60
068
C64
0
C70
BL-C
36
33- =
12
15
9
20
o o
14
13
MFin UM."
F2
=V IO: tlail
F8
64///i
F3
_III
.1.1
F9 =
I =-111 II 111.4-EN,
F4
F5110 Jrasm., ..4.5,
RC)
C66
11
10
RO
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
SOMMAIRE
Key to diagram
1. Starter switch
2. Stop switches
3. Rear RH direction indicator
4. Rear RH brake light
5. Rear RH work lamp
6. Number-plate lights
8. Rear LH work lamp
9. Rear LH brake light
10. Rear LH direction indicator
11. Front LH direction indicator
13. Front LH work lamp
14. Front LH headlight
15. Horn
16. Front RH headlight
17. Front RH work lamp
19. Front RH direction indicator
22. Flasher unit
23. Lighting selector switches
24. Hazard warning light switch
25. Instrument panel assembly illumination
26. LH direction indicator warning light
27. RH direction indicator warning light
28. Front headlight main beam warning light
29. 1st trailer warning light
30. 2nd trailer warning light
31. Front work lamps switch
32. Rear work lamps switch
33. Rear work lamp relays
34. Front work lamp relays
36. Fuel gauge
Abbreviations
+ P = + permanently live
+ AC = + live when ignition is on
Identification of connectors
Item
Colour
Ways
C7
C9
C10
C16
C60
C62
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
C77
White
Black
White
White
White
White
Black
White
White
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
13
3
1
4
6
6
6
2
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
6
6
2
Black
Black
Black
Tubular connection
Identification of harnesses
Item
Colour code
A = Aluminium
B = White
BL = Blue
G = Grey
= Ivory
I
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
R = Red
RO = Pink
V = Green
VI = Violet
F = Dark
Issue 1
Description of harnesses
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
22
+P
C2
23
CI
24
+P
ti
Cl
31
25 26 27 28 29 30
C7
32
7
9
0n
04
C6
3
. 0
C)
C7
114
SOMMAIRE
!ri
10A01.6
Ea
0
V.0 VI
119
F20
3R
{C77
,fre
F22
0
113
33
34
if Ilk
(WOK..
co
VI
19
C60
C65
C
00
0
0
VF
BLF
17
C10)_.
C63
C69
C62
BLF
C63
C63
C10
C71
--BLC
O
C72
3R
/ 3---NC
16
45,
splift: g]
0
BLF
15
VF N
papoi
)1111,1111
e Ili]
("'
cl
`1.1
[11.1e1
4)
1i)
Eva; ...arEn!
9
20
711
1
It
z.
.. :=0
F4
no
11111F.
6
7
18
F6
112
11111
43
F2
18
13
F9
O0
C73
22
4
ib
14
C60
C70
C68
13
N
36
11
Ro
CONTENTS
C-44
10
www.maskinisten.net
iW
10A01.7
43
42
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vAr
F. Fuses
Fuses are housed in a box located to the left of the instrument panel.
The box is divided into two sections. The upper section contains the
fuses for the lighting system and the lower part contains the fuses
protecting the engine and electronic functions.
A special tool (25) located in the box allows fuses to be replaced
easily.
Note: The fuse box should always be kept clean. Fuses with a
higher rating than the specified rating must never be used. The
origin of the failure should always be traced before replacing a
blown fuse.
In addition to those fitted in the fuse box, the system is also equipped
with other fuses, as follows:
- four fuses fitted at the front:
. 7.5 A fuse (brown) protecting the electronic lift unit,
. 15 A fuse (blue) protecting the Autotronic unit,
. 5 A fuse (yellow) protecting the front PTO (if fitted);
. 30 A fuse protecting the interior power supply socket.
ITEM No.
1-7
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
AMP. APPLICATION
Not used
5
(+P) - Radio, clock and interior light pre-equipment
25
(+P) - Cigar lighter
25 (+AC) - Front windscreen wiper and washer
25 (+AC) - Cab blower
15 (+AC) - Rear wiper
5
(+AC) - Dynashift control
7.5 (+AC) - Electronic lift,
Alternator warning light
15
(+AC) - Instrument panel assembly,
Injection pump
10
(+AC) - 4WD and differential lock switch,
Cabin relay
25 (+AC) - TPM computer
Parking brake buzzer
Pneumatic suspension seat
Creeper gears
Interior power socket
Hare/Tortoise
Lift
PTO switch
Autotronic
15
(+AC) - In series with F14
Stop switch and brake lights
30
(+AC) - TCU braking information
10
(+AC) - RH and LH indicators
7.5 (+AC) - Horn
7.5
Lighting relay control
Lighting, front LH sidelights
RH rear red light
Illumination of instrument panel assembly
7.5
Illumination of clock, differential lock
Front RH sidelight
LH red light
Illumination of switches/buttons
Illumination of number-plate
25
(+P) - Rear work lamp
25 (+P) - Front work lamp
7.5 (+P) - Flashing beacon switch
25
(+P) - Hazard warning lights
Additional work lamps (if fitted)
15
Headlights (main beam) and indicator light
10
Headlights (dipped beam)
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
11 . ELECTRONICS
Contents
i
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
0
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igir
0
Tester-programmer - Description
Ime
11A01.1
11 A01 Tester-programmer
CONTENTS
A.
General - Description
B.
Composition of kit
C.
D.
E.
Screen displays
F.
ETCU modes
G.
Error messages
11
H.
Multimeter function
11
10
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
11A01.2
Tester-programmer - Description
A. General - Description
Note : These sections concern the use of the testerprogrammer on all tractors in series 6100 and 8100.
The following testers should be used according to the
local language and speed limits:
3376941M1
30 km/h
French
3376942M1
40 km/h
French
3376943M1
30 km/h
English
3376944M1
40 km/h
English
3376945M1
30 km/h
German
- 3376946M1
40 km/h
German
3376947M1
30 km/h
Spanish
3376948M1
40 km/h
Spanish
The tester-programmer allows you to :
- monitor the operation of main electronic components
and detect failures of the following systems :
. Autotronic,
. Electronic lift control,
. Datatronic.
- parameterise the various electronic components
according to the specifications of the tractor they are
installed on.
List of parts
1 - Cable harness/tester connector
2 - Connector for Autotronic unit (CAN)
3 and 4 - Power supply and earth terminals
5 - On/Off switch
6 to 10 - Keypad
11 - Screen display contrast adjustment
12 - Input for earth continuity test
13 - Input for testing of voltmeter and frequency-meter
Autotronic
- load a new program into the Autotronic 2 electronic
transmission control unit (ETCU) in order to update its
programming.
- set the parameters on a replacement Autotronic 2 unit
before installing it on a tractor.
- test the Autotronic 2 system.
t
Mirr" MASSEY FERGUSON
0 On
10
11
E3
10]
[C]
CP
M'
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
Tester-programmer - Description
11A01.3
B . Composition of kit
On tractor
(a)
On table
Autotronic II
E.L.C.
Harness
Datatronic II
used
3714779 M1
3712723 M1
(b)
3715767 M1
3714780 M1
(a): This connection allows on the 'Auto 2" unit to be parameterised or programmed.
(b) : See section 11 D02
Fault:
If the tester screen does not light up, check the tractor cable
harness.
- Yellow wire: direct supply from the battery protected by a
15 A fuse fitted in the battery compartment.
- Black wire: connected to the earth on the gearbox selector
cover.
- Check for MINIMUM VOLTAGE of 9 volts on connector C33.
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Description
OE
C33
3714779M1
I-
.,
. BILISEY PEINGLOON
000
000
000
101
139 GE3
0g0
MASSEY FERGUSON
0 0 0 111141 gg
000
000
101
RD CEI
El Ei 0
Issue 2
Colour of wires
BL : Blue
M : Brown
N : Black
R : Red
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ar
Tester-programmer - Description
11A01.5
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11A01.6
Ale
Tester-programmer - Description
E. Screen displays
MASSEY FERGUSON
(C) COPYRIGHT
1993
PROM: A93121
FLASH: A931210
SERIAL: 30101
PRESS OK
TESTER: Y
AUTOTRONIC:
PRESS CLUTCH PEDAL
TCU OFF
TESTER : Y
AUTOTRONIC : Y-1
PROGRAM IS NECESSARY
PRESS OK
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Description
Start the engine to provide a power supply of more than
13.6 volts. This is required in order to clear the ETCU
memory. Otherwise, a message is displayed on the
screen.
Press OK.
11A01.7
PROGRAM TCU
START ENGINE
PRESS OK
A*'
PROGRAM TCU
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
PROGRAM TCU
CONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
PROGRAM TCU
PRESS CLUTCH PEDAL
PRESS OK
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ave
11A01.8
Tester-programmer - Description
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT PROGRAMMING
32716
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT PROGRAMMING
0
PROGRAM OK
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT PROGRAMMING
0
PROGRAM OK
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR F
RECONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Description
Case 2 :
The issues of the tester operating software and the
ETCU are identical.
No reprogramming is required.
Press OK.
11A01.9
PRESS OK
TEST
PARAMETER
PROGRAM
TCU: XX
Parameter setting must be performed for each switch
between issue 11-1 and issue Y and when a new ETCU
is installed.
Press OK.
OK
ESC
TEST
PARAMETER
PROGRAM
OK
ESC
PRESS OK
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Description
11A01.10
F . ETCU modes
The tester indicates the status of the Autotronic ETCU.
This status, referred to as its mode, is identified by
means of a code (TCU off, 1, 2, etc.) which is
automatically displayed in the bottom left-hand corner
of the screen.
Incorrect parameters
Voltage > 16 V
TCU 9 or 10
TCU 11
Diagnostic
(Testing)
TCU 12
No program
TCU 1
SLEEP MODE
TCU OFF
Start the engine to exit
from mode TCU 12
Alarm mode
TCU 3 (6 sec.)
TCU 2
TCU 7
Engine stopped
Pressure OK
Work mode
TCU 6 (2 sec.)
TCU 4
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Description
11A01.11
G . Error messages
H . Multimeter function
Symbol
Al E100
E:1
E:2
E:3
E:4
E:5
E:6
E:7
E:8
E:9
E:10
E:102
Resistance
The earth reference is on connector C33.
(R = 0 0)
The screen display can be:
R = -1 S2 when measuring the battery negative terminal
for a low resistance on the line
R = 0 SZ when measuring earth continuity with
connector C33
R = +1 or OL for infinity or more than 30 Q
R = 1 to 30 Q for resistance between 1 and 30
Frequency
Value in hertz = 0 to 4,000 Hz
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ay
Tester-programmer - Reprogramming
ige
11A02.1
CONTENTS
A. Equipment required
B.
C.
Tester identification
D.
E.
Translating
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Reprogramming
A . Equipment required
1 tester.
1 PC/tester connecting cable, ref. 3712344 Ml.
1 mains power unit, 220 V- 12 V at 1 A (12.6 V min at
0.3 A).
1 PC IBM 386 or 286 Turbo compatible, serial port No
1 equipped with a 9-pin socket.
1 diskette containing the following files :
Disc B:\ or A:\ (depending on the PC)
TRADUCT EXE ../../95
FRANCAIS
BASE
TXT ../../95
TRADUCT TXT ../../95
NAMETEST TXT ../../95
TCU
HEX ../../95
TRANSFER EXE ../../95
TRANSFER TXT ../../95
TESTEUR HEX ../../95
GERMAN
SPANISH
NAMETEST EXE ../../95
C . Tester identification
This procedure consists in replacing the message
`SEGRE ELECTRONIQUE displayed on the tester when
it is switched on by the identification desired by the
user.
Start program NAMETEST.EXE on the PC in typing
NAMETEST and then, press the "ENTER" key.
Type you ID (20 characters maxi) ex : "SA.TRAC.OISE".
Switch off the tester and then switch it back on.
Your message is displayed instead of "SEGRE
ELECTRON IQU E".
Note : File NAMETEST.EXE is the program used to
change the tester identification.
File NAMETEST.TXT is the file containing the
messages for the NAMETEST program.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igr
Tester-programmer - Reprogramming
Procedure
ige
11A02.3
Error messages
The messages are listed in 'ERREUR.TXT". Use the
DOS function "TYPE" to read them.
ERROR 1 : problem on serie port of PC (COM1).
ERROR 2 to 7 : dialog problem
ERROR 8 : loading problem (PC microprocessor speed)
ERROR 9 : dialog problem
ERROR 10 : no answer from tester (reboot tester)
ERROR 11 and 12 : dialog problem
ERROR 13 and 14 : problem on files to transfer (check
disc)
ERROR 15 : dialog problem
ERROR 16 and 17 : problem of tester identification
ERROR 18 and 19 : too low tester supply
ERROR 20 : supplier test problem
If an error message appears, check connections, supply
stability, PC compatibility.
Switch the tester OFF, then ON to reboot and start
again : TRANFER.
If the problem appears again, contact Beauvais Service.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mi
Tester-programmer - Reprogramming
E . Translating
This procedure consists in creating a new file containing
the messages displayed on the tester
The new messages can be displayed in another
language.
Start the TRADUCT program on the PC, for example :
To translate into another language (ex : ITALIAN)
Type "TRADUCT ITALIAN"
A file "ITALIAN" will be created to store the italian
translation vou will enter.
If the file " ALIAN already exists, you will be asked if
you want modify it.
Then, a temporary file TEMP.XXX will be created.
The english text appears on the screen. Type the
translation line per line using 20 characters maxi for
each of them.
' AUTOTRONIC
' TEST
PARAMETER
PROGRAM
'
" CODE
' CODE OK ?
PROGRAM TCU "
PUT AUTOTRONIC OFF '
' PRESS CLUTCH PEDAL
WAIT
"
' WAIT PROGRAMMING "
PROGRAM OK!
DISCONNECT
' CONNECT "
POWER CONNECTOR F
OPER.SOFT ISSUES "
TESTER
PROGRAM IS NECESSARY'
PROGRAM TCU '
OPER.SOFT ISSUE OK'
NOT NECESSARY
CONFIRM PROGRAM ?
OPER.SOFT
' NOT
'
COMPATIBLE
' START ENGINE
' MONITORING
' TESTING
'
' DATATRONIC
"
'ENGINE RPM
"PTO 540
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Tester-programmer - Reprogramming
Tester language to translate (English version)
11A02.5
'PTO 1000
'
'FWD SPEED
'WHEEL SLIP "
'
'SLIP LIMIT
'AREA/HOUR '
'FUEL/HOUR "
'FUEL/AREA
'COST/AREA '
'FUEL USED "
'AREAWORKED'
"DISTANCE
'HRS WORKED'
'COUNTER '
'COMP.MODE"
'EXT.TEMP.
'TIME
'DATE
"SERVICE
'FUEL/COST
'COST/HOUR'
'METRIC/IMP'
'METRIC
"US IMPER.
'UK IMPER.
'WORKING WIDTH
'AREA WORKED
'DISTANCE
'FUEL USED
"HOURS WORKED
COUNTER
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mie
11801.1
CONTENTS
A.
Description
B.
Control panel
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
se
11801.2
A. Description
The electronic lift control system (Fig. 1) is made up of
the following components:
- a control panel (1),
- a digital computer (2),
- a position sensor (3),
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
11801.3
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
B. Control panel
Designation of controls
A. Height/depth setting
B. Function selector (draft, mixing, position)
C. Maximum lift limiter (setting of high position)
D. Setting of manual or automatic lowering speed and
locking position (padlock) or automatic control
E. Raising/neutral/lowering
- Raising or transport: the high position is defined
by adjusting knob C.
Issue 1
14r
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vAr
ine
11801.5
Description of controls
A. Height/depth setting potentiometer
This potentiometer A must be adjusted to set the depth
(or height) of the instrument once the function selector
B has been selected.
In position control mode, the potentiometer travel is
maximum.
The maximum high position is slightly higher when it is
obtained using external controls than when using the
potentiometer A.
The floating position can be obtained by setting the
potentiometer A to 9. In this case, the lowering warning
light remains on.
E. Raising/neutral/lowering switch
This switch allows work in the following three modes:
- Raising or transport position: the implement is raised
until the maximum position selected by
potentiometer C is reached.
- Neutral position: the implement is locked in its
current position. This setting must not be used
during the work phase.
Lowering orwork position: the instrument is lowered
until it reaches the position selected on the depth
potentiometer A and the function selector
potentiometer B.
Note: When restarting or after using the external
controls, switch E must be set to the lifting position
in order to activate the system.
F. Transport control selector push-button
This push-button must be pressed once in order to be
activated when switch E is in the transport position. In
this case, each time that switch E is set to the transport
position, the electronic computer energises the lift
valve solenoids in order to keep the implement stable
whatever the tractor speed.
The system is automatically disengaged when switch E
is in the work position.
Warning light J is illuminated when the system is active
in the transport position.
To deactivate this function, the lift control must be set
to the transport position and push-button F must be
pressed twice.
G - H. Arm raising and lowering warning lights
The warning lights come on at exactly the same time
that the solenoids are energised. They indicate that the
system is operating correctly.
Their status changes continually when the lift control is
used in draft control mode or in slip control mode.
I - J - K. Warning lights indicating corresponding
functions
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
i
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW
11B02.1
PT
CONTENTS
A. Description
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Noe
11802.2
IA"
SOMMAIRE
A. Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
Identification of connections
Item
Colour
Ways
White
B
C
Black
White
4
2
D
E
Black
Black
7
5
F
G
H
I
J
K
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
L
M
Yellow
Black
Grey
Grey
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Round
Black
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
37
55
Issue 1
Description
General power supply connector C14
CAN network
Autotronic high position
signal connector C35
Datatronic speed signals
Forward speed and engine
speed signals - connector C36
Lowering solenoid valve
Raising solenoid valve
Left-hand draft sensor
Right-hand draft sensor
Position sensor
External controls
External controls
External controls
External controls
External controls
External controls
Lift control panel connection
Computer connection
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
6100
SERIES TRACTORS
74gr
11802.3
L
0 3
0 2
0 I
1 3
2
1
3
32
3
JZ
4017
222
owl
- AWAV.
-1=1.
oirma.
14
13.
11
ti w
14/J
V.VAW
75 I
110v0
a...vm.
zt427
,1-1
SOMMAIRE
560
360
-,1VAVA--- 560 360
_ _f"ffiwn
K2 K3
CD@OCD
000iDO
00000D
0000@
0 Kul
34
I6 5
15
22
t".7 4- rat
75
"AVM
,11111111
r"X
X
75
202
WM.
Hi
O 2
co
44
27
29
07
43
52
LEM
0 3
e
26
46
11
28
25
48
51
50 31
55 19
53
18
54
36
37
12
16
23
2
42 24
03
22
04
42
17
49
30
32
13
np 9
_r
_1 1 8
L-1
O
O
O
0
0
C36
2115/14
134/3335
39
20
40
I 02 2
01
,z)
?pa
11
1=3p
47
0609
C
_114)
u,
@@@iggc9i0@g1Qtgl@gllEl@l2H;HN
Ell;YOUgi@INgi@UEDQIBtaUgicAN_
cicic;IrD:11;
1 C1c1;
11UU1OU[DcgclOcHTD
AUTI7TRIINIC 11
04
CI
03
03
- - - - -
75 A
L4_ _ _ _ _
02
05
3A
7.5 A
C14
15 A
+.2v 2
+12V 1
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
External controls
Three sets of external controls can be fitted. They are
connected to a set of resistors installed on the printed
circuit. There is a single line to the computer for the
raising and lowering signal.
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11B02.5
POSITION
SENSOR
DRAFT
SENSORS
EXTERNAL
CONTROLS
BATTERY
CONTROL
PANEL
STARTER
SWITCH
Raising /
lowering /
neutral switch
LIFT
CONTROL
COMPUTER
Engine speed
DATATRONIC
ALTERNATOR
CAN
RADAR
Slip control
LIFT CONTROL
VALVE
Issue 1
May 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigr
11803.1
11 803 Auto-diagnostic
COTE NTS
A. Operation
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11803.2
A . Operation
The electronic lift control calculator is able to detect
some faults on the harness or the components.
When a fault has been detected, the driver will be
informed by the flashing of the warning light I on the
ELC control panel.
Code
mor
Action
System reaction
Fault
1-1
Supply of solenoids
interrupted
No movement permitted
Interrupt supply.
Repair fault.
Reconnect supply to reset.
1-2
Idem
Idem
1-3
Idem
Idem
1-5
Idem
Idem
1-6
Idem
Idem
1-7
Idem
Idem
1-8
Idem
Idem
2-2
Console locked.
Non control active.
Repair fault.
Reset by putting Lift/
Lowering switch on lift.
2-3
Idem
Idem
2-4
Idem
2-7
Idem
Idem
3 -1
Idem
3-2
Idem
Idem
3 -4
Idem
3-6
Idem
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igry
Electronics - Electronic lift control
no'
11804.1
CONTENTS
A.
General
B.
Symbols (icons)
C.
Connections
D.
Procedure
E.
Monitoring
F.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. General
The tester
testeris used to trace failures in the event of faulty operation of the lift linkage whether it is recognised by the diagnostic
indicator light or not.
To carry out the test: START THE ENGINE.
The monitoring and position sensor adjustment functions are then accessible.
B . Symbols (icons)
As in the case of the Autotronic unit, the ELC functions are identified by the following icons:
111111L__22-_
4111
'a L
Lowering
speed
High
position
Draft
Position
Intermix
Depth
Relay
g r
Lifting
Lowering
Damper
Fault
Lighting
Wheel slip
Radar
D . Procedure
- Tracing a fault code
If more than one failure occurs at the same time, it may be
difficult to visually decode the auto-diagnostic indicator light I
on the console.
In these conditions, the MONITORING function can be
used to identify the code or codes generated by the indicator
light. The code is displayed in clear mode under the symbol
corresponding to the auto-diagnostic indicator light.
Example:
Code 22 - Fault
on position sensor
22
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11E304.3
AUTOTRONIC
Press OK.
DATATRONIC
ELECTRONIC LINKAGE
OK
VI
2.1
LINKAGE
1.0
OK
ESC
E . Monitoring
MONITORING
SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
Select MONITORING.
Press OK.
OK
ESC
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
(D)
(C)
(A)
(B)
irk
ct
87
240
248
105
(K)
(E)
(H)-(G)
(J)
(F)
01
4.
MEM
MI MN
Issue 1
ESC
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
11804.5
1 . Lowering speed potentiometer (D) (between 1 and 248, fault at 254) with an LED signalling the automatic
earthing function (K).
Graduation
Approximate
value
1
50
2
130
3
200
2. High potentiometer (C) (between 79 and 240, fault at 255). The high position potentiometer cannot give a lower
value than that on the position sensor. To test the whole range of values, set the lift control to the MAX. LOW
position.
Graduation
Approximate
value
1
119
2
169
3
216
3 . Intermix potentiometer (B) (pure effort at 1, pure position at 248 and fault at 254).
Graduation
Approximate
value
1
248
2
211
3
158
4
100
5
42
6
1
4 . Depth potentiometer (A) (between 11 and 249, fault at 255).
Graduation
Approximate
value
0
249
1
226
2
202
3
178
4
156
5
130
6
104
7
80
8
55
9
29
5 . Lifting / neutral / lowering switch (E). The three contactors shown under the icon correspond to the three
positions of the switch. According to the switch position, the icons change to reverse video (change of state) one
after the other.
6 . Lifting / lowering solenoid valve. Start the engine and operate switch E. The solenoid valve indicator lights
H - G on the tester change to reverse video (change of state) as soon as the lift control is activated either in lifting
or lowering mode.
The corresponding indicator lights are illuminated on the console as soon as the switch is placed to the lifting or
lowering position.
7 . Transport damper indicator light (J). This changes to reverse video on the screen when the damper button
is pressed and the Lifting / Lowering switch is in the high position.
8 . Damper control button (F). This changes to reverse video when the button is pressed.
9 . AUTO DIAGNOSTIC indicator light (I). The fault code detected by the auto-diagnostic system is shown under
this icon.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
m*'
11804.6
Analog inputs
From the console elements monitoring screen, press
to go to the Analog inputs screen.
1 . Value of right and left draft sensor
166 when sensor not fitted, fault 255.
2 . Value of position sensor
235 in high position.
3 . Value of battery voltage
ERR displayed for abnormal voltage.
4 . State of internal safety relay
This controls the 9.5 V voltage for the analog inputs.
If no 9.5 V is present (icon displayed in normal video
mode), all the analog input values (sensors,
potentiometers and states of control buttons) are
cleared as they no longer have any significant
meaning and the power stages (outputs to solenoid
valves) can no longer be operated.
External controls
From the analog input monitoring screen, press
V to display the External controls screen.
1 . Information + Engine running
Icon in reverse video if + engine running present.
2 . State of lifting and lowering external controls
The corresponding icon changes to reverse video
when the button is pressed.
3 . Presence + Lighting
Changes to reverse video mode when the parking
lights are on.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
mot
11804.7
Frequency inputs
From the external controls monitoring screen, press
900
ESC
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW'
11B04.8
MONITORING
SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
Press OK.
OK
ESC
ESC
Adjustment procedure
- Place the lift control in the high stop position with the
external controls.
- Position the sensor in contact with the cam.
- Lower the lift linkage by 3 to 5 cm.
- Adjust the sensor in order to obtain a value of 235 + 1
on the screen.
Q
235
Tighten
Loosen
OK
ADJUSTMENT IS CORRECT
Issue 1
OK
ESC
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ay
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.1
11 CO1 Description
CONTENTS
A.
Description
B.
C.
10
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.2
A . Description
General
The following information and procedure apply to the Autotronic 2 system featuring the new ETCU box
3618318M5 fitted on 6100 tractors.
AUTOTRONIC 2
Electronic transmission control box
Acts automatically on
Hare/Tortoise
range
change
Power take-off
(PTO)
Differential
Lock
4 WD
Dynashift
Reverse Shuttle
Speedshift
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.3
Tortoise/Hare or
Hare/Tortoise change
impossible
Hare range
prevented
POWER TAKE-OFF
Controlled gradual
engagement
Disengaged if PTO
clutch slips
1'
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.4
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
CD
Disengaged when
brakes are applied
Disengaged when
3-point linkage is
raised
- Diff.lock is disengaged
when either brake pedal
is depressed.
- Re-engages when brake
pedals are released.
- Diff.lock is disengaged
when lift-lower switch is
moved to lift position.
- Re-engages when switch
is returned to lower
position (warning light
goes out then comes back
on).
/4 WD engaged when
diff.lock switch is
operated
-Warning light comes on.
Disengaged if ground
speed exceeds 14 Kph
Disengaged if hydraulic
pressure drops
(17 bar nominal)
Engaged when
starting the tractor
Disengaged is
speed exceeds
14 Kph
Engaged whatever
tractor speed is
Engaged when
braking if speed
higher than 5 Kph
-To disengage 4 WD
after starting the
engine, press and
release brake pedal
then push on 4 WD
button (warning
light goes out).
- If tractor speed is
below 14 Kph and the
4 WD button is
pressed once : 4 WD
will be disengaged
when ground speed
exceeds 14 Kph, but
will be reengaged as
soon as ground
speed drops below
14 kph.
Issue 1
- If tractor is being
driven at more than
14 Kph and 4 WD has
been disen-gaged, it
can be re-engaged by
pressing the 4 WD
control button once.
February 1995
Engaged when
diff.lock is
engaged
Engaged if
hydraulic pressure
drops
)
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.5
DYNASHIFT
Progressivity
- Automatic shifting of
intermediate ranges
when lever is moved
directly from A to D.
Low hydraulic
pressure
Maximum engine
speed
Engine speed
drop
- Automatic shifting to D
range in case of low
hydraulic pressure.
- No shifting up if the
engine speed drops for
more than 12 %
between two ranges
(light flashing).
Low temperature
- Automatic shifting to C
then B if forward speed
is higher than 30 km/hr.
D light then four lights
flashing. To select D
range again, move lever
to C or B then back to D.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
SPEEDSHIFT
Low hydraulic
pressure
30 Kph speed
limit
REVERSE SHUTTLE
Security mode
Mechanical protection
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigir
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.7
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.7
14
c14
11
YY
12
13
t441
IT
v.c 0
TBA4
V.0 ---C
C4
TBA9
vr --c
7.5A
BLF
1 VF
VF TBA19
KC I
C32
TBA7
G C
TBAIE1
19
44
TB.AI5
C:31
20
GOMME
M a 11111(41111i
011MINO
.M 1MIL
11111 C37
unsumurowill"LL:IsurffarAmr
Ml
h1112
43 0.E.giwi
f)R
()
si*Wir
0 ea
C31
TBA21
TBA20
TILB2
TB.85
1114/
21
F8
Btx
42
23
e
24
A
F14
41
x,
40 (kmegi'm
26
27
C46 fqRU N
MN
N VI
TBAIO
V/
28
TBA24
O
IBA?
O
^SUL,.
^51-rt.,...
34 33 32 31
VI
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
C4
TB.C6
}AC
C4
TBA17
29
30
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
Speedshift
1 - Electronic Transmission Control unit
2 - Differential lock soneloid
4 - Hare/Tortoise solenoid
5 - Rear PTO soneloid
6 - 4WD soneloid
8 - Reverse gear soneloid
9 - Forward speed solenoid
10 - Battery
12 - Reverse shuttle piston sensor
13 - PTO switch 500/1000 Rev/min
14 - Starter motor
15 - PTO warning light 540 Rev/min
16 - PTO warning light 1000 Rev/min
17 - Hydraulic pressure warning light
18 - Hare warning light
19 - Differential lock warning light
20 - 4WD warning light
21 - Digital display PTO and forward speed
22 - Reverse gear warning light
23 - Forward speed warning light
24 - Buzzer - Way of motion
25 - Brake switch
26 - Safety switch - clutch
27 - Ignition and starter switch
29 - GSPTO warning light
30 - Economy PTO warning light
31 - Hydraulic pressure switch (17 bar)
32 - Engine speed sensor
33 - Forward speed sensor
34 - Rear PTO sensor
35 - 4WD switch
36 - Differential lock switch
37 - Solenoid - Rear PTO brake
38 - Rear PTO switch
39 - GSPTO switches
40 - Economy PTO switches
41 - Reverse shuttle switches
43 - Hare/Tortoise switch
44 - Speedshift warning light
45 - Speedshift control lever
46 - Speedshift warning light - Fast
47 - Speedshift warning light - Slow
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.8
C14
44
-c
12
10
niN
[15A
SA
C33
-0C
V.0
C41
)
C41
R N
OKA Cj WellEINIC
011.411-arMF.41111(
1111111111[
INrairs
0 it
eammtuusir
airsuarimr
VF
C37
'111111/
43
C33
N NC
A
C30
r
0
1
)
C30
INC
LT=
RIP
1
V.0
C3)5
VI
VF
RD
VI
tr.
36
35
34
33
"Sin,
32
31
TB.C6
C4
B
C4
29
-1-A.0
TBA17
(i)
Issue 1
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
February 1995
30
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C01.9
14
13
48
12
TBA4
4
"
TBA9 -
10
"<Th rTh
VS
VF
5A
15A
V.0
C33
VS
TBA19
17
_L
TBA7
BLS
18
19
TBA19
TBA15
20
RN
Rai*.
!
0 0
RP VI
ammullIMIN
21
111111111=111iiIIIMIIK111111/111WAIIMII
43
`411RI,
''''111111/
49
Taua
C37
22
C31-0--BLI
BLC
WV.;
-"cca) 24
lEA
25
V.0
VI
C35
C30
RD
N VI
TBAII
MN
46
TBA10
FI8
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
C
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
31
VI
C4
)C4
23
TB C6
+AC
TBAI7
4-
47
29
30
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
Abbreviations :
Example : TBA4 = pin 4 on connector A of dashboard
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
1110
11C01.10
Autotronic 2 - Description
114
11
YY
12
13
4
V.0 0
7.5.4
ito
TBA 4
132
VF 0
C30
VF
TIA19
J_
C41
0 BLF
44
137
BLF
16
17
BAT
G TC
C15
)C1
15
1
VF Tc 9
15A
V.0
>--0
10
0
VF
C4
8 18
TBA18
19
C33
C31
TBA15
20
0 Ro `
TBA21
TBA20
TILE
TB.B5
43
21
Jemb.B
F8
t 0 AF
TBA13
I-FTBA25
42
22
1ry
_ 23
24
4'
F14
41
40 0830wi
27
TBA11
TBA10
MN
C46
-G
F18
28
TBA24
C37>
TBA3
4-
* /
39
38
37
36
35
34 33 32 31
C4
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
TB.C6
A.0
TBA17
C4
VI
29
30
www.maskinisten.net
44i
11 C01.1
Speedshift
1 - Electronic Transmission Control unit
2 - Differential lock soneloid
4 - Hare/Tortoise solenoid
5 - Rear PTO soneloid
6 - 4WD soneloid
8 - Reverse gear soneloid
9 - Forward speed solenoid
10 - Battery
12 - Reverse shuttle piston sensor
13 - PTO switch 500/1000 Rev/min
14 - Starter motor
15 - PTO warning light 540 Rev/min
16 - PTO warning light 1000 Rev/min
17 - Hydraulic pressure warning light
18 - Hare warning light
19 - Differential lock warning light
20 - 4WD warning light
21 - Digital display PTO and forward speed
22 - Reverse gear warning light
23 - Forward speed warning light
24 - Buzzer - Way of motion
25 - Brake switch
26 - Safety switch - clutch
27 - Ignition and starter switch
29 - GSPTO warning light
30 - Economy PTO warning light
31 - Hydraulic pressure switch (17 bar)
32 - Engine speed sensor
33 - Forward speed sensor
34 - Rear PTO sensor
35 - 4WD switch
36 - Differential lock switch
37 - Solenoid - Rear PTO brake
38 - Rear PTO switch
39 - GSPTO switch
40 - Economy PTO switch
41 - Reverse shuttle lever
43 - Hare/Tortoise switch
44 - Speedshift warning light
45 - Speedshift control lever
46 - Speedshift warning light - Fast
47 - Speedshift warning light - Slow
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
110
Autotronic 2 - Description
13
2
44
12
4f
yj
15
VF
VF
TBA9
VF
16
10
15A
V.0
TBA19
VF
C33
ttc
TBA7
TBA18
C44"
A VF G
TBA15
C41
oi 20
RO
BLF
Q 17
18
19
TBA21
TBA20
TLB2
TLB6
IL
1111111MUS
asainuamr
21
43
22
--(
TRA11--"A
ao
r.
F8
23
@LC
n -BLY
o-
45
24
40
26
27
138
RO N
k VI
MN
VF N
THAW
118
S 46
6 47
Ca
Z".
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
TI.C6
31
+AC
4
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
Vl
TBA17
Q 29
e 30
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
11C0 1.
Abbreviations :
Example : TB.A4 = pin 4 on connector A of dashboard
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
Ile
11C01.9
SOMMAIRE
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Autotronic 2 - Description
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Description
48
12
11
1vc-0-1 e
TBA4
v.c
VF --0C4
TBA9
VF
15
1_
16
e 17
18
TBA19
VF
C15
TBA7
TBA18
09 T"
1
Il C4unit
19
C31
C31
411FII elMU!
IIIIMM-4MMIL414!
41111111MNI WININK
C31
TLA15 -
J
0
C.
1)
RD
20
VI
TBA21
TBA20
TLB2
TB.B6
ELI
1111111111111111101f
UMW
43
0 C(33 0
49
t--0 FS
inn
BLS
37
C30
) 0
C30) 0
22
TB22
23
ELF
24
_r<
RIP
C45
C11
C32
Si
411
V.0
vs
60"
VI
40
F11
c3>5-4
C30
0
C46
C30
38
RD
4-
VI
0 46
VS
47
F18
IN+
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
VI
CONTENTS
O TB.C6
C4
0 C4)
VI
+AC
TBA17
I
29
30
SOMMAIRE
11C01.12
www.maskinisten.net
11 CO2.1
CONTENTS
A. Testing procedure
B.
Defects analysis
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
A . Testing procedure
This procedure is for checking correct operation of the
electronic transmission control unit Autotronic 2 as well
as for solving very simple breakdown problems.
1 . Power supply
Engine stopped, ignition off, all warning lights OFF.
Declutch : The following warning lights should illuminate
almost immediately :
- hydraulic pressure,
then
- A, B, C, D lights,
at the end
- hydraulic pressure,
- 4WD,
- Hare/Tortoise,
- D range
- forward and backward lights
Re-engage : The warning lights should extinguish after
a few seconds.
This shows that :
- there is power supply to the Autotronic system,
- processor is operating,
- hydraulic pressure warning light, 4 WD light, Hare/
Tortoise, A, B, C, D range, forward and backward lights
are correctly wired,
- clutch switch is correct.
Note : To confirm power supply is correct, check
battery voltage and lines resistance.
Issue 2
b) If 2a correct :
Stop the engine.
After a few seconds the red pressure warning light,
the D range light, the 4 WD one, the Hare one if the
Hare range is engaged should re-illuminate before all
warning lights extinguish.
Note : It may be necessary to waft 4 or 5 minutes
for the warning light to re-illuminate if a hydraulic
accumulator is fitted (Dynashift or super-creeper
fitment).
This shows that :
-the hydraulic pressure switch is wired and operates
correctly (re-opening).
3 . Differential lock
Engine idling
4 WD light illuminated.
- Press differential lock button.
Differential lock light illuminates.
- Press differential lock button again.
Differential lock warning light extinguishes.
- Whilst moving along at 4 Kph, engage the differential
lock. The 4 WD will engage as well.
- Make a tight turn. You should see the rear tires skid
when the differential lock is engaged and feel a jerk as
you engage and disengage.
- The differential lock disengage itself above 14
- The differential lock disengage itself in braking.
- Raise and lower the lift. The differential lock warning
light should illuminate and extinguish.
4 . Brake switch
Engine idling
4 WD light illuminated.
Press differential lock button again.
Differential lock light illuminates.
Unlatch brake pedals. Apply light pressure to each
brake pedal in turn. The differential lock warning light
should go out as soon as each pedal has left the return
stop.
This shows that :
- the two brake switches are correct and well adjusted.
- the supply to the brake switches is correct.
Octoberl 996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
04
11CO2.5
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Initialisation procedure
- With the engine stopped and the ignition switched off
and the indicator lights controlled by the Autotronic
unit extinguished.
- Press the clutch pedal.
- Press the differential lock switch and hold it down
throughout the initialisation phase.
- Start the engine.
- Within 10 seconds of the low pressure light going out,
release the clutch pedal.
- Shift the gear lever to actuate the Hare/Tortoise switch
and hold it in that position.
+10 maxi
Travel after initialisation
mechanical
incident
mechanical
incident
27
138
17
148
13. Speedshift
Engine idling
- Check that the two lever positions correspond to the
working lights (C and D).
Tractor moving
- Check that the forward speed is increasing from C to
D and decreasing from D to C.
This shows that :
- the warning lights are correct.
- the lever is correctly wired and its supply is correct.
- the solenoid is operating.
- the forward speed sensor and the ETCU are operating.
Issue 2
Octoberl 996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO2.7
Function
Power
supply
Igni-
Engine
tion
on
running
No
No
Procedure
(1)
Hydraulic
pressure
(2)
No
No
Yes
No
Notes
No
No
No
Yes
D7 and earth, R = 0 LI
Differential
Lock
(3)
Light
No
Switch
Yes
No
Solenoid
Yes
Yes
Brake
switches
(4)
Yes
No
fuse F14
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Engine
tion
on
running
4 WD (5)
Light
No
No
Switch
Yes
No
Solenoid
Yes
Yes
Lift switch
(6)
No
No
Hare/
Tortoise
(7)
Light
No
No
Switch
Yes
No
Solenoid
Yes
Yes
(8)
Light
No
No
Switch
Yes
No
Solenoid
Yes
Yes
U = 0 V, PTO released
U = 12 V, PTO engaged
Low speed
engine
PTO light
No
No
Procedure
Notes
PTO
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Igni-
Engine
tion
on
running
No
No
Forward
speed
sensor
No
No
Engine
speed
sensor
No
No
Dynashift
(11)
Light
No
No
Lever
Yes
No
Speed
sensors
(9) (10)
PTO speed
sensor
Solenoid
Temperature
sensor
Reverse
shuttle
(12)
Light and
buzzer
Switch
Yes
Yes
Procedure
A
B
C
D
Al 9
0V
12 V
12 V
12 V
A20
0V
0V
12 V
12V
A
B
C
D
EV1
12 V
12 V
0V
OV
EV2
0V
12 V
12 V
OV
A21
0V
0V
0V
12 V
No
No
Between F2 and F3
- R < 10 k S2 if temperature > 0 C
- R > 10 k S2 if temperature < 0 C
No
No
Yes
No
Issue 2
11CO2.9
Notes
If the voltage is 0 V
in all positions, check
the power supply of
the lever (fuse F8 and
orange line)
EV1 : vertical solenoid
(ivory line)
EV2 : horizontal
solenoid (green line)
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO2.10
Function
Ignition
on
Solenoid
Yes
Engine
running
Yes
Procedure
Forward speed
Drive in reverse speed
Preselect the forward speed.
Disconnect the forward
solenoid and measure the
voltage between its two connector lines.
Reverse speed
Drive in forward speed
Preselect the reverse speed.
U = 0 V, clutch pedal released
Disconnect the reverse soleU = 12 V, as long as clutch pedal
noid and measure the voltage
between its two connector lines. is pressed
Yes
No
R = 4 k L2 in forward speed
R = 2,2 k 52 in reverse between
yellow and green wires
Speedshift
(13)
Light
No
No
Lever
Yes
No
Position
sensor
Notes
If the voltage is 0 V
in both positions,
check the power
supply of the lever
(orange line and F8
fuse)
Solenoid
Yes
Yes
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
no'
11CO3.1
CONTENTS
A.
Symbols (Icons)
B.
C.
D.
E.
"Monitoring" function
F.
"Testing" function
24
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A. Symbols (Icons)
Each function and the various components of the
Autotronic 2 system are identified by symbols, as
follows:
Functions
CO
BO
4 WD
Diff. Lock
PTO
Hare/Tortoise
Dynashift
;
Battery
/y)
Hydraulic
pressure
Clutch
Brakes
< -H
Slow
Speedshift
Fast
Speedshift
Lift
Engine
speed
Gear
lever
Temperature
Low
speed PTO
Forward
speed
Reverse
shuttle
Components
dim
MIIII
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'
no
11CO3.3
TEST
PARAMETER
PROGRAM
OK
7I
ESC
MONITORING
TESTING
OK
I7
ESC
Autotronic unit
(ETCU)
Faulty input(s)
J \
Input OK
Faulty output(s)
Inputs OK
Outputs OK
Reprogram
Parameter
MONITORING
TESTING
IV
OK
ESC
Problem persists
VOLT :
OHM : + 1
HERTZ :
Change
AUTOTRONIC unit
VOLT :
OHM : + 1
HERTZ :
ESC
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ar
Testing
See paragraph F, page 24.
The main test function should be used for troubleshooting. It is made up of two secondary functions:
- monitoring,
- testing.
Monitoring
1. Access conditions
- With the engine running and the hydraulic pressure
light out, operate all the Autotronic functions one by
one.
- Drive the tractor to check the safety systems
concerning forward speed.
2. Principle
Each screen display shows the status of the input and
output signals read or transmitted by the TCU.
The symbol for a switch is black when contact is closed.
The symbol for an indicator light or solenoid is black
when that component is supplied with 12 V by the TCU.
Sensors for engine speed, forward speed and PTO
speed indicate the values measured by the TCU:
- engine speed in rpm,
- forward speed in 0.1 kph,
- PTO speed in rpm (behind the clutch, not the speed
of the implement).
Apart from power supply problems, there are three
types of operating fault, as follows:
1. Faulty input: The TCU does not receive the input
signal and, therefore, the outputs remain unchanged.
2. Faulty output: The TCU transmits a correct output
signal but the corresponding component of the tractor
(indicator light or solenoid) does not react. Carry out
testing on the outputs.
3. Faulty TCU: The TCU reads the right inputs but does
not supply power to the right outputs.
It is also possible that an internal connection may be
broken (resulting in correct output on the tester but
absence of current on the TCU output terminal).
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A22
11CO3.5
A16
D7
A9
.p
Meaning of symbols
Example : A16
A = connector A on ETCU
16 = pin 16
NMI
TCU
ESC
Symbol
A22
Supply voltage
D5
Engine speed
Al 6
Clutch switch
D7
A9
This initial screen shows all the input signals required for the ETCU to switch to WORK mode. If these signals
are incorrect, there is no point in continuing the test procedure.
INSTRUCTION
ON TESTER
ON TRACTOR
4WD light on
Pressure light off
Hare light on and speed range
solenoid powered
4WD light on
Pressure light off
Hare light on and speed range
solenoid operating
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Operating faults
1. Battery: The tester does not check the Autotronic power supply. This operation must be carried out separately
before connecting the tester. The screen shows the voltage supplied from the alternator (ignition switched on)
and read by the ETCU on terminal A22 of the harness.
2. Clutch switch : Measure the resistance between terminal A16 of the tractor harness and the earth terminal :
Correct value R = 0 to 1.5 S2 : pedal pressed down, switch closed
Operating fault
If R = infinity : pedal released, switch open. Check line continuity and connection on the starter motor.
3. Low hydraulic pressure switch : Measure the resistance between terminal D7 of the tractor harness and the
earth terminal:
Correct value R = 0 S2 : switch is closed (engine running, pressure OK)
Operating fault
If R = infinity : switch is open (engine stopped, accumulator discharged, no pressure)
Check switch directly. Check resistance of green wire and earth connection (black wire).
4. Engine speed sensor signal : Measure the resistance between D5 and D6 of the tractor harness :
Correct value R = 450 52 10
If R = correct, adjust the sensor and use the frequency measurement to check that the sensor is working.
See 9101.14 (6100) and 9F01.9 or 9R01.6 (8100).
If R = 0 or infinity, check the continuity of lines D5 and D6.
5. TCU mode : The TCU switches from mode TCU 4 to TCU 6 and then 7 if there is a problem with engine speed,
and from mode TCU 5 to 2 if there is a switch problem.
TCU 1
: problem with software
: low pressure problem, see switch, earth wire
TCU 5 - 2
: engine signal problem, see engine speed sensor, adjustment, wires
TCU 6 - 7
TCU 9 or 10 : incorrect parameters or no parameters
TCU 11
: battery voltage too high
: TCU is in testing mode. Engine signal is required to exit from this mode.
TCU 12
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.7
R
15A
C2
14
10
27
J Clk
26
i
4
C44
F12
R
C33
C31
-------1
1234567
7654321
17
B
7654321
D
1234567
C:11=11=1:3C1C3
C32
VF
M C38
Wire colour
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
O = Orange
R = Red
V = Green
C30
VF
VF
343.31
32
M
Issue 1
C = Light
F = Dark
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
NW-
11CO3.8
Hare/Tortoise range
Symbol
Description
Cl
Switch
C4
Solenoid - Light
A9
D3
Forward speed
INSTRUCTION
ON TESTER
ON TRACTOR
Speed in kph = 0
Range switch C1 on while
holding lever in position
Hare
Hare light C4 on
Range solenoid C4 on
Tortoise
Hare light C4 off
Range solenoid C4 off
Pressure light A9 off
Hare
Hare light on
Range solenoid powered
Tortoise
Hare light on
Range solenoid non powered
Speed = + 10 kph
No change
Operating faults
1. Range switch : Check the voltage on terminal Cl of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the switch is closed (pressed)
V = 0 volt when the switch is open (released)
If not, check the switch power supply (fuse, etc.), the switch and line continuity.
2. Forward speed signal : Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between D3 and D4 of the tractor harness:
Correct value R = 450
If R = correct ensure that the sensor is operating by measuring the frequency and
checking its setting, see 6801.9 (6100) or 6E01.7 (8100).
If R = 0 or infinity, check the continuity of lines D3 and D4.
3. Range lights and solenoid : Perform testing.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.9
15A
10
C33
43
41=3
C31
1234567
C37
BLF
0E
iLt
BLC
C32
B
111.7_14,6
D
1234567
c:cco=o=
N VI
33
tED
Wire colour
B = White
BL = Blue
G = Grey
J = Yellow
N = Black
R = Red
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
4WD
Symbol
Description
B1
4WD switch
A5
C6
Solenoid
A17
Brake switches
A9
D3
Forward speed
INSTRUCTION
Press the 4 WD button on
instrument panel, press the brake
pedals in turn
ON TESTER
Brake switch A17 on while
pressing pedals
V = 0 kph
Pressure light A9 off
4WD switch B1 on while pressing
button
4WD light A5 goes out
V = 0 kph
Pressure light A9 off
A signal is transmitted by the
forward speed sensor
The 4WD solenoid C6 comes on
V = more than 0 kph
ON TRACTOR
4WD light stays on
4WD solenoid not power-supplied
Pressure light off
Operating faults
1. 4WD switch : Check the voltage on terminal B1 of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the switch is closed (pressed)
V -= 0 volt when the switch is open (released)
If not, check the switch power supply (fuse, etc.), the switch and line continuity.
2. Brake switches : Check the voltage on terminal All of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the pedal is pressed and the switch is closed
V = 0 volt when the pedal is released and the switch is open
If not, check the power supply to the brake switches (fuse, etc.), the switches and line continuity.
Note : If the brake switches are open, it is impossible to disengage the 4WD transmission.
3. Forward speed signal : Measure the resistance between D3 and D4 on the tractor harness :
See fault 2, page 8.
4. 4WD light and solenoid : Perform testing.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
BLF
C31
1.34567
7654321
0 E
C35
ni122.61
1234567
VF
-'
25130
2120
0
0
2i 19
BLF
A:
,n o
.1;
1,10
BLF
11CO3.11
15Q2n
14V
0
../
J
C32
R
C37
BLF
C301
VI
36,6
gb 33
Wire colour
B = White
BL = Blue
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
R = Red
V = Green
VI = Violet
35
C
F
Issue 1
= Light
= Dark
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Differential lock
Symbol
Description
B2
Switch
C2
A17
Brake switch
B4
Lift switch
A9
D3
Forward speed
INSTRUCTION
Press the Diff.Lock once.
Lift switch on the down
position
ON TESTER
Diff.Lock switch B2 on while
pressing the button
Diff.Lock light C2 comes on
Diff.Lock solenoid C2 comes on
Pressure light A9 off
V = 0 kph
Brake switch All comes on
Diff.Lock light C2 goes out
Diff.Lock solenoid C2 goes out
V = 0 kph
Pressure light A9 off
Brake switch All comes off
Diff.Lock light C2 comes on
Diff.Lock solenoid C2 comes on
Pressure light A9 off
V = 0 kph
ON TRACTOR
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6100
ale
SERIES TRACTORS
1;r
Autotronic 2 - Checking with tester
11CO3.13
Operating faults
1. Diff.Lock switch : Check the voltage on terminal B2 of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the switch is closed (pressed)
V = 0 volt when the switch is open (released)
If not, check the switch power supply (fuse, etc.), the switch and line continuity.
2. Brake switches : Check the voltage on terminal All of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the pedal is pressed and the switch closed
V = 0 volt when the pedal is released and the switch open
If not, check the power supply to the brake switches (fuse, etc.), the switch and the continuity of switches and lines.
Note: If the brake switches are open, it is impossible to disengage the 4WD transmission.
3. Lift switch : Check the voltage on terminal B4 of the tractor harness
15A
10
27
Ilia
F11
BLF
C33
J
C31
BLF
Wire colour
B = White
VF
C32
R
C37
BLF
C30(
VI
33
BL = Blue
G = Grey
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
O = Orange
R = Red
V = Green
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
36a a 35
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
PTO
C5
A10
B6
Symbol
B7
Description
fl'
1
L
s
B6
PTO switch
Al 0
C5
Solenoid
B7
A9
DI
PTO speed
D5
Engine speed
A9
TCU - -
INSTRUCTION
Engage the PTO
ON TESTER
PTO switch B6 comes on
PTO light A10 comes on
PTO solenoid C5 comes on
PTO speed sensor operating
PTO speed is displayed
PTO speed = engine speed *
Low speed PTO B7 switch is off
PTO switch B6 stays on
PTO light A10 flashes
PTO solenoid C5 goes out
Engine speed is displayed
PTO speed = 0 immediately
Low speed PTO switch B7 is off
D5
D1
ESC
ON TRACTOR
* The PTO speed read on the tester is not the speed on the output shaft but the speed calculated on output
from the PTO clutch.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.15
Operating faults
1. PTO switch : Check the voltage on terminal B6 of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the switch is closed (PTO engaged)
V = 0 volt when the switch is open (PTO stopped)
If not, check the switch power supply (fuses, etc.), the switch and line continuity.
2. Low speed PTO switch : Check the voltage on terminal B7 of the tractor harness
V = 12 volts when the PTO is engaged and the switch is closed
V = 0 volt when the PTO is stopped and the switch is open
If not, check the switch power supply (fuses, etc.), the switch and line continuity.
3. Engine speed signal : Measure the resistance between D5 and D6 of the tractor harness
See fault 4 p. 6.
4. PTO speed sensor signal : Measure the resistance between D1 and D2 of the tractor harness.
Correct value R = 450 f2
If R = correct ensure that the sensor is operating by measuring the frequency and checking its setting (see
11 B04p8).
If R = 0 or infinity, check the continuity of lines D1 and D2.
If the engine speed and PTO speed are different, this indicates a bad parameter or clutch slippage.
5. PTO light and solenoid : Perform testing.
27
F12
C31
VC
C35
N
1 5 16 30
s.t 3
C4
F
VC
E
VF
Wire colour
C
13
VC
9 C42
C32
A = Aluminium
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
R = Red
Ro = Pink
V = Green
VI = Violet
C37
C = Light
F = Dark
VI
VI
39 1550 2000
M
Ro
=1-011=
==.41=3
32
34
40 38
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.16
Description
A18
B2
Diff.Lock switch
Cl
Hare/Tortoise switch
Al 6
Clutch switch
D3
A7
A14
A8
A23
Al 5
INSTRUCTION
ON TESTER
ON TRACTOR
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
in0
olli
C2
15A
14
10
12
aub
8
26 ek
3 COAlk
27
MC
44
;1
11CO3.17
BLF
) C44
F11
F12
MC
_\[b
_99
N
43
BLC
cD
kiaz
C
13
1A2Do
BLF
1
0E
IBLF
C3
II
BLF
C35
Vjr-ICIIM
1234567
Li
C5'_
BLF
44
4;\
'
VF
C11
C37
41
C32
BLF
C45
C30
J
VI
N
36
tr;
a 35
NJ"
33
Wire colour
A = Aluminium
B = White
BL = Blue
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
O = Orange
R = Red
V = Green
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Operating faults
1. Reverse shuttle lever (swith) : Ignition on, check the voltage on pins of the 3 way-connector C11 located at
the rear of the instrument panel.
White wire : forward = 12 V
reverse = 12 V
Brown wire : forward = 12 V
reverse = 0 V
Green wire : forward = 0 V
reverse = 12 V
If these values are not obtained, check the switch power supply (fuse, etc...) the switch and the line continuity.
2. Diff.Lock switch
See p. 13
3. Hare/Tortoise switch
See p. 8
4. Clutch switch
See p. 6
5. Forward speed sensor
See p. 8
6. Reverse shuttle piston sensor
If the value A15 displayed on the tester = 0 in reverse or forward check :
- voltage on green wire F1, about 10 volts
If value of Al 5 does not change check :
- voltage on red wire varies
If not, check the sensor power supply, the sensor and the line continuity.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.19
Dynashift
F3
A9
Description
Symbol
Al 9
A20
A21
Al
A2
A3
A4
C3
C7
A9
F3
D3
D5
INSTRUCTION
A4
DO.
CO
BO
)
C7 M=0
A3
C3
DO
C0
I BO
AO
A21
we=
im
A20
A19
mil=
DO.
CO
BO
ti
al=
I INN EMI
A2
Al
D5
D3
TCU - -
ON TESTER
ESC
ON TRACTOR
Select ratio A
Light A on
Solenoid 1 power-supplied
Solenoid 2 not power-supplied
Select ratio B
Switch A19 on
Switch A20 off
Switch A21 off
Light A2 on
Solenoid C7 on
Solenoid C3 on
Light B on
Solenoid 1 power-supplied
Solenoid 2 power-supplied
Select ratio C
Switch A19 on
Switch A20 on
Switch A21 off
Light A3 on
Solenoid C7 off
Solenoid C3 on
Light C on
Solenoid 1 not power-supplied
Solenoid 2 power-supplied
Select ratio D
Switch A19 on
Switch A20 on
Switch A21 on
Light A4 on
Solenoid C7 off
Solenoid C3 off
Light D on
Solenoid 1 not power-supplied
Solenoid 2 not power-supplied
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
11CO3.20
Operating faults
1. Dynashift switch
Check the voltage on terminals A19, A20 and A21
A19
A20
A21
Ratio A
Ratio B
12 V
Ratio C
12 V
12 V
Ratio D
12V
12V
12V
IF NOT : Check the power supply to the lever switch C5 (orange wire from relay: 12 V with engine running)
and check lever output lines.
Black
Brown
Red
Ratio A
Ratio B
12V
Ratio C
12 V
12 V
Ratio D
12V
12V
12V
2. Clutch switch : Measure the resistance between terminal A16 of the tractor harness and the earth
R = 0 to 1.5 SI when the pedal is pressed and the switch is closed
R = infinity when the pedal is released and the switch closed. Check line continuity and connection to the
starter motor.
3. Engine speed sensor signal: Measure the resistance between D5 and D6 of the tractor harness :
See page 6
4. Forward speed signal : Measure the resistance between D3 and D4 of the tractor harness :
See page 8
5. Temperature sensor
If lights A and D are flashing, this indicates LOW temperature or open circuit.
Check the resistance between F2 and F3 of the harness:
R = infinity = lines broken
R less than 10 kS2 = correct if temperature higher than 0C
R more than 10 k.S2 and temperature higher than 0C,
check resistance of lines
change sensor
R = 0 = short-circuit
6. DYNASHIFT lights and solenoids : Perform testing.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.21
F11,
F8
15A
C2
14
10
26
-I:1: 1111
C31
C41
C33
N J
c6
C39
76543211
130
21
2Q
20
0
42
C5
R
M
211130
'Dynashift D
C f-%
r
BO
O
D
7654321
=1=
0
123
4567
1 50
X40
28
0
-1_
C30
32
33
VI
Wire colour
G = Grey
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
0 = Orange
R = Red
V = Green
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.22
Speedshift
Symbol
Description
A21
Switch
A3
A4
C3
Solenoid
A9
D3
Forward speed
D5
Engine speed
INSTRUCTION
ON TESTER
ON TRACTOR
V = 0 kph
Speedshift switch A21 on when
button pressed
Speedshift 30 kph
Hi light A4 on with Speedshift
solenoid C3 on
Speedshift 30 kph
Hi light on with Speedshift
solenoid power-supplied
Speedshift 40 kph
Hi light A4 on with Speedshift
solenoid C3 off
Speedshift 40 kph
Hi light on with Speedshift
solenoid not power-supplied
Operating faults
1. Speedshift switch
Check the voltage at terminal A21
V = 12 V when the switch is closed
V = 0 V when the switch is open
If not, check the switch power supply, the switch and the resistance of the line connected to the ETCU
2. Speedshift light and solenoid : Perform testing.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
RIO
11CO3.23
Pv
F11
R
15A
C2
14
-41ID=
10
26
27
C31
C41
I I
VF
VF
C33
J
7654321
C5
25130 \e
214
45
l'ogo
0E
"riso
171)
16Ck=
o
7654321
.....
15, a
123tilL1 1
10
47 46
32
33
Wire colour
J = Yellow
M = Brown
N = Black
O = Orange
R = Red
V = Green
VI = Violet
C = Light
F = Dark
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
F . "Testing" function
D5
1. Access conditions
With the engine stopped, hydraulic pressure light on,
and ignition switched on.
Press the clutch pedal to hold the TCU in alarm mode.
- "OFF" is displayed under symbol D5 indicating that the
engine is stopped.
- "OFF" is displayed under symbol A9 indicating that
there is no hydraulic pressure.
- "ON" is displayed under symbol A22 indicating that the
ignition is switched on. The supply voltage (11.9 V) is
also displayed.
2. Principle
The tester forces operation of all Autotronic outputs
one by one. It analyses the current draw to detect
unconnected or short-circuited components. The component symbol (solenoid or light) on the tester goes
black when the output is power-supplied. As soon as an
anomaly is detected, "ERR" is displayed under the
symbol for the faulty output.
Important : The tester cannot be used to check :
- LEDs owing to their low current draw,
- PTO and 4 WD solenoids for purely electronic
reasons. Question marks are displayed indicating
that the voltage must be checked directly on the
solenoid.
Access to the function "Testing" using the keyboard.
A22
A9
g4t
119
OFF
ON
OFF
PRESS OK
TCU 12
ESC
If these values are correct, the TCU switches to "Diagnostic" mode (TCU 12). Press OK to go on to the test
procedure. Use the arrows to go on to the next screen.
Screen 2: Hare/Tortoise
On tester
On tractor
Solenoid is energised
Measure resistance
between earth and
output C4
Correct value = 10 12 2
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ne
11CO3.25
Screen 3 : 4WD
On tractor
On tester
Solenoid is normally
energised
Measure resistance
between earth and output C6
Normal value = 10 0 2
Screen 4 : PTO
On tractor
On tester
PTO switch changes status
B6
A10
Mi
C5
Ton
=NNE
NMI NM
(IP
Solenoid is energised
ON
Switch status does not change Check switch input
Measure resistance
between earth and output C5
Normal value = 10 L2 2
TCU 12
ESC
ESC
On tractor
Measure resistance
between earth and output C2
Correct value = 5.9 CI as
the light and solenoid are
connected in parallel
If C32 is disconnected
and ERR is displayed,
there is a problem on light
To differentiate between
problem on light or solenoid,
disconnect C32
C2
"\--/-
XE)''
..
TCU 12
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
on tractor
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11CO3.27
Screen 7 : Dynashift
On tester
On tractor
Light A is illuminated on
instrument panel
Light B is illuminated on
instrument panel
Light C is illuminated on
instrument panel
Light D is illuminated on
instrument panel
Solenoid is energised
Solenoid is energised
Screen 8 : Speedshift
On tester
On tractor
Solenoid is energised
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigir
Autotronic 2 - Parameters
11C04.1
11 CO4 Parameters
CONTENTS
A. Screens
B.
Key to parameters
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Parameters
A. Screens
Select PARAMETER.
Press the clutch pedal to activate the electronic transmission control unit (ETCU). The tester checks that the
ETCU is at issue Y. If it is, the parameter screen is
displayed.
The ETCU will then be locked in this mode. Indicator
lights will remain in the same state (on or off) as when
the tester started this procedure.
TESTER :
AUTOTRONIC : ?
PRESS CLUTCH PEDAL
TCU OFF
CODE
OLD : 022111010000
NEW
ESC
OK
CODE
OLD :022111010000
NEW : 022112010000
ESC
OK
CODE
OLD :022111010000
ERR :020112020000
NEW : 032112
0,9
Issue 1
February 1995
OK
ESC
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Parameters
11C04.3
B. Key to parameters
8187036
= Tractor serial number
022111010000 = Parameter code
AABCDEFGHXXX
Note : The three last digits are 000
Parameter code
CD
Parameter exemple
Code AA
Code B
Code C
Code D
Code E
Code F
Code G
Code H
Code
I
Code J
Code K
Issue 2
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Parameters
11C04.4
Code AA : Tractor model
MODEL
Open centre
Non modified flow
hydraulic pump
up to S/N D125026
CODE AA
Open centre
Increased flow
hydraulic pump
from S/N D125027
6100
Closed
centre
00
19
25
02
20
26
6180
03
21
27
05
12
06
13
07
14
08
15
8140 - 8150
09
16
10
17
11
18
23
24
Code B
Front axle
Code C
Hare/Tortoise
1 = 2 WD
0 = Without synchromesh
2 = 4 WD
1 = With synchromesh
3 = 4 WD with memory"
from F167026 (c)
Code F : Speedshift
Code D
Gearbox type
Code E
Speed limit
1 = 4 x 2 (without AB)
2 = 4 x 4 (with AB) (a)
Code G : Dynashift
1=
2=
3=
4=
0 = without Speedshift
1 = Control button on gear lever
2 = Control by lever
0 = without Dynashift
1 = Control by lever
2 = Control by button on the
gear lever
Issue 2
30 kph
40 kph
33 kph (Japan)
40 kph for
Heavy Duty
reinforced gerabox
0.= Mechanical
1 = Hydro-electrical with preselected reverse by button (b)
2 = Hydro-electrival with preselected reverse by lever (b)
December 1997
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Reprogramming
11C05.1
CONTENTS
A.
B.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Reprogramming
PROGRAM TCU
OPER. SOFT. ISSUE OK
PROGRAM
NOT NECESSARY
CONFIRM PROGRAM?
ESC
OK
PROGRAM TCU
START ENGINE
PRESS OK
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
RECONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
ESC
OK
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT
ESC
OK
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT PROGRAMMING
32766
OK
Issue 1
February 1995
ESC
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Autotronic 2 - Reprogramming
The displayed value switches from 32766 to 0. Once
reprogramming has been completed, the indicator
lights A, B, C and D (or Speedshift Hi and Lo) come on.
If a problem occurs during reprogramming, the tester
indicates that problem and only indicator light A or B
comes on.
Check the power supply and connectors.
Disconnect the ETCU and start again.
The program is now loaded in the ETCU.
Disconnect connector F of the ETCU to reset.
Press OK. Reconnect. Press OK.
Al
11C05.3
PROGRAM TCU
WAIT PROGRAMMING
0
PROGRAM OK
DISCONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
CONNECT CONNECTOR F
PRESS OK
OK
ESC
III
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
St
11C05.4
Autotronic 2 - Reprogramming
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
Autotronic 2 - Reprogramming
11C05.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Datatronic - Description
11D01.1
11 DO1 Description
CONTENTS
A.
General
B.
C.
Symbols
D.
E.
Other functions
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Datatronic - Description
A . General
Issue 1
Data display
1 - Screen divided into two parts.
2-3 - Selection keys for upper and lower display.
4-5 - Red led indicating the display selected.
Selection of functions
6 - Keys used to change stored data
7 - Working width
8 - Reset
9 - Screen contrast
10 - Memory on/off
11 - Working position
12 - Wheel slip control
13 - Slip control indicator
14 - Selection of the 22 functions of the menu or changing of
the characters after selection of one of the keys 2 or 3.
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
-Ar
nit
Datatronic - Description
11D01.3
C. Symbols
C5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
age
Datatronic - Description
-- FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
SLIP LIMIT
0 AREA/HOUR
FUEL/HOUR
FUEL/AREA
COST/AREA
FUEL USED
AREA WORKED
DISTANCE
HRS WORKED
COUNTER
COMP. MODE
- - EXT. TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
METRIC/IMP
COST/HOUR
UNITS
Issue 1
41.8 A HA
132.3 ir L
6.03H
123.74, KM
2,51H M
5 >999<
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Datatronic - Description
11D01.5
1 SEEDER
41.80 HA
132.3 k L
6.00H
123.74 KM
2.5
M
5 >999<
ON 1 2 3 4
41.80 HA
132.31i' L
6.0eH
123.74 KM
2.5 M
5 >999<
ON 1 2 3t1
4 PLOUGH.
O
41.80 HA
132.3 i' L
6.0H
123.74 KM
2.5 M
5 >999<
1234
li
MEMORY OFF
41.80 HA
132.3 iT L
6.00t'.
123.7 KM
2.5 -1 M
5 >999<
ow 1 2 3 4
Fig. 6
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
11D01.6
1000
980
RP/M
1550
,
)e)
e 6 c'D
4PLOUGH-
1 SEEDER.
41.8 V, HA
132.3 L
6.00H
123.74, KM
2.5 I I M
5 >999<
ON 1 2 3
1000
980
0
RP/M
1850
d) ,66, 15
Fig. 7
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Datatronic - Description
11D01.7
_4 PLOUGH .
RP/N1
ENGINE RPM
PTO 540
PTO 1000
FWD SPEED
1850
lr
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/ HOUR
FUEL/ AREA
DUREE
COMPTEUR
COMPARER
TFMPFRATURE
FUEL USED
AREA WORKED
DISTANCE
0 HRS WORKED
LILLIN7Ba__
G
r7171-:-'177,-;.401011L
EXT. TEMP.
TIME
DATE
SERVICE
METRIC/IMP
COST/HOUR
UNITS
reTtiMM1111111111
PTO 540
PTO 1000
FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
COST/HOUR
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/ HOUR
FUEL/ AREA
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ate
Datatronic - Description
ENGINE RPM
PTO
PTO 1000
FWD SPEED
WHEEL SLIP
COST/HOUR
AREA/HOUR
FUEL/ HOUR
11.yiketo,
E . Other functions
Auxiliary functions
Clock setting (hours, minutes, seconds) (fig. 13):
Press key 2 or 3: the list of functions is displayed.
Select
then press 2 or 3 again; the display
appears in the selected window and LED 4 or 5 is lit.
Press one of the keys 6 corresponding to the figures to
modify, then turn the knob 14 to modify these figures
one by one.
Proceed in the same way to update the parameters
Date, Month and Year.
Egg
(5(5(6 ,5.6
Fig 11
Screen contrast (fig. 13)
You can modify the screen contrast at any time by
proceeding as follows:
Press key 9 until both LEDs 4 and 5 come on; turn knob
14 to lighten or darken the screen.
Press key 9 again or any other key to return to normal
operation.
TIME
0
FUEL USED
AREA WORKED
DISTANCE
HRS WORKED
COUNTER
COMP. MODE
a!
DATE
SERVICE
METRIC/IMP
COST/HOUR
UNITS
Fig. 12
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Aye
Datatronic - Description
11D01.9
4 PLOUGH
41.8 yi, HA
132.3 L
6.00H
123.7i4 KM
2.5k i
5 >999<
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
SOMMAIRE
CONTENTS
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6100
SERIES TRACTORS
lkAr
0
11D02.1
SOMMAIRE
A.
General
B.
Symbols (icons)
C.
Connections
D.
Functions
E.
Operating procedure
Issue 1
October1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
A . General
C . Connections
B . Symbols (icons)
The specific Datatronic functions or components are
identified by the following symbols:
Radar
IN
Flowmeter
Issue 1
Connector
OUT
Flowmeter
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11D02.3
D . Functions
Parameter
In order to supply correct data, the Datatronic unit must
be parameterised with all the specifications of the
tractor it is installed on.
The parameters (three-figure codes) can only be
transmitted via the tester.
Frequencies
With the Datatronic option, a communication link can
be established between an implement and the tractor
by means of the 16-way connector located in the cab.
As the applications are variable and numerous, a wide
signal range is provided for on this connector's output:
- Engine frequency
- Radar frequency
- PTO frequency
- Forward speed sensor frequency (theoretical speed)
These signals are generated by two outputs on the
Datatronic unit:
- Pin 1 (connection No. 1): Engine frequency or Radar
frequency
- PPin 2 (connection No. 2): PTO frequency or Forward
speed sensor frequency.
The tester allows the two outputs, Pin 1 and Pin 2, to be
configured by selecting the desired frequencies and
adjusting the value of the signals according to the
requirements of the implement.
Test
This allows the values calculated by the Datatronic to be
checked for the actual speed and instantaneous fuel
consumption. For this purpose, the values of radar and
theoretical forward speeds and the outward and return
fuel flow rates.
Translation
This allows the menu on the tractor computer to be
displayed in the tester language.
Issue 1
October1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
E . Operating procedure
Switch on for connection No. 4.
For the connection with harnesses 3714779M1 and
33715767M1, power supply is direct.
AUTOTRONIC
DATATRONIC
ELECTRONIC LINKAGE
OK
D950700
DATATRONIC : D950202
OK
ESC
Parameter
The tester offers the following choice: parameter, test,
translation.
Select Parameter.
Press OK.
PARAMETER
TEST
TRANSLATION
OK
Issue 1
October 1996
Ai
ESC
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
OUTPUT FREQUENCIES
vl
ESC
CODE
OLD : 210
NEW :
0-9
When the code has been entered, the tester checks its
structure.
If the code is not correct, the tester displays an error
message (see Section 11 A01).
If the structure is correct, the tester asks for confirmation of the code and the message Code correct is
displayed.
Press OK.
11D02.5
PARAMETER
OK
no'
OK
ESC
CODE
OLD : 210
NEW : 210
CODE CORRECT
0-9
OK
ESC
OK
ESC
Issue 1
October1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11D02.6
Parameter coding
The parameter code is made up of three figures. The first two figures indicate the tractor model and are identical to those for
Autotronic II parameters. The latter can easily be identified by means of the label bonded onto the fuse box. The list of parameters
corresponding to the tractor model (code AA) is also included in section 11 C04. Take care to check the serial number.
The third figure corresponds to the Dual Control option which is now managed by Datatronic, so it is necessary to specify
whether this option is installed or not.
If the Dual Control option is installed, enter 1.
If the Dual Control option is not installed, enter 0.
For information, the table below specifies the programmed values for a rated engine speed of 2,200 rpm.
Code
Nbr signals
/ engine rev.
Nbr signals
/ 10 km/h
Radar signals
/ 10 km/h
PTO
540/750 rpm
PTO
1,000 rpm
00
73
108
273
103
56
01
73
111
273
02
73
106
273
103
56
03
73
115
273
103
56
04
73
114
273
103
56
05
89
125
273
107
61
06
89
142
273
107
61
07
89
125
273
107
61
08
89
138
273
107
61
09
89
136
273
107
61
10
89
146
273
107
61
11
89
146
273
107
61
12
89
125
273
99
78
13
89
142
273
99
78
14
89
125
273
99
78
15
89
138
273
99
78
16
89
136
273
99
78
17
89
146
273
99
78
18
89
146
273
99
78
19
77
108
273
103
56
20
77
106
273
103
56
21
77
115
273
103
56
22
77
114
273
103
56
23
89
146
273
107
61
24
89
146
273
99
78
Issue 1
October 1996
Outward
fuel
Return
fuel
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
'
11D02.7
Output frequencies
Use the keyboard to return to the Parameter screen.
PARAMETER
This screen is used to select either parameterisation or
output frequencies.
Choose Parameter.
Press OK.
TEST
TRANSLATION
OK
ESC
1 - PTO frequency
2 - Theoretical forward speed frequency
3 - Engine frequency
4 - Radar frequency
Issue 1
October1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Caution:
If one of the frequencies has been selected but the
specified value of the coefficient is not correct, the
Ai icon is displayed to indicate that the value
cannot be accepted.
Clear the incorrect value by pressing OK.
Enter the correct value and press OK.
To quit: press ESC.
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
11D02.9
PARAMETER
TEST
TRANSLATION
1. Radar frequency
2 . Theoretical forward speed frequency
3 . Flowmeter frequency: input flow rate
4 . Flowmeter frequency: return flow rate
a . Pin No. on 29-way connector
b . Speed displayed on tractor computer
c . Fuel consumption per hour displayed on the tractor
computer
OK
ESC
iv
1
a
4
2
4
273
E>
E>
125
a 7
a
IN
8
OUT
ESC
1
Display
When the tractor is travelling at less than 1 km/h, the
actual speed is zero (radar precision) and only the
theoretical speed is displayed.
When the tractor is travelling at more than 1 km/h, the
actual speed is displayed with allowance for effective
wheel slip.
If both speeds are greater than 20 km/h and there is a
difference of 10% between them, it is the theoretical
speed that is displayed directly (incorrect wheel
diameter or driving in puddle).
The display of flow rates varies according to the effective consumption of the engine (position of accelerator,
load applied, etc.). Display c on the extreme right-hand
side is equal to the difference between the input and
the output.
This must remain true in all cases. Otherwise, it means
that there is a problem either on the flowmeter (internal
fouling, fault on electrical connections) or the
parameterisation is wrong.
Issue 1
October1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Translation
The tester offers the following choice: parameterisation, test or translation.
Select translation.
Press OK.
PARAMETER
TEST
TRANSLATION
OK
The translation of the whole text displayed on the
Datatronic screen is being transferred from the tester to
the Datatronic unit.
The language used is the same as that used by the
tester.
ESC
WAIT PROGRAMMING
PARAMETER
TEST
TRANSLATION
OK
ESC
Issue 1
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ise
12 . CAB
Contents
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
12A01.1
CONTENTS
A.
Description
B.
C.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
12A01.2
0 0
0
k I /
\ 10
15 /
13
20
25
4.1
U U
-00 000000
f
a
weatutis
kos
P8-diiii
"v
O
0 -
00
Oo
00
00
00
00
it
0 0
O
Fig. 1
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
vigir
12A01.3
A . Description (Fig. 1)
1. Starter switch - 4 positions
1 - Stop
2 - On normal position for running the engine, but
which also allows for the electrical equipment to be
used when the engine is not running.
3 - Heat
4 - Start
tion)
7. Tachometer/hourmeter
The tachometer shows the engine speed in
hundreds of revolutions per minute.The hourmeter
shows the total number of working hours.
8. Fuel gauge
9. Temperature Gauge
The green zone shows the limits for the normal
operating temperature. Stop the engine if the needle
moves into the red zone.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Imo
12A01.4
Cab
Instrument panel
6. Not used
7. Transmission oil filter warning light(red).
If this warning light stays on at normal operating
temperature, immediately change the filter element.
If the light continues to illuminate, identify the cause
of the failure :
- Hydraulic (see section 9)
- Electric (see section 10 A01)
lAr
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
12A01.5
1. PTO speed
The digital display shows the speed of the PTO
selected (540 or 1000 RPM) measured by the PTO
sensor when the small in-cab switch (Fig. 3) is on the
position related to the PTO used and when the
corresponding warning light is on.
The calculator is programmed to the tractor PTO
specifications
2. Forward speed
The digital display shows the travel speed measured
by the forward speed sensor or the speed measured
by the radar (when fitted).
The calculator is programmed according to the
average rolling circumference of the wheels per
model for a standard tyre combination.
3. Programming
The calculator is programmed by means of eight
micro-swithces numbered from 1 to 8 and located on
the electronic card inside the dashboard, they are
accessible from the back of the latter (Fig. 4).
The micro-switches can be :
- open (off = 0 (number way))
- closed to earth (on = 1)
The micro-switches No 1 to 5 correspond to the
model and are used for the forward speed programming (see chart 5, column (1)).
Note : When the tyre combination is not standard,
it is possibleto modifythe standard programming
to reduce the margin between the theoritical
travel speed shown and the real travel speed (see
4 and 5).
The micro-switches No 6 and 7 correspond to the
PTO : 00 = PTO for all 6100.
The micro-switch No 8 correspond to the choice
between miles or kilometers :
- 0 = Mph
- 1 = Kph
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
12A01.6
Models
(3)
To increase the
speed shown
(2)
To decrease the
speed shown
(1)
Standard tyre
programming
1
3 4 5
6110-6120-6130-6140
1 0 0
110.3
0 1
6150-6160-6170
0 1
1 0
105.4
6180-6190
0 0
0 1
115.5
2 3
105.4
0 1
115.5
100.6
110.3
1 1
110.3
0 1
121
N = Number of pulses/sec. from the sensor (in Hertz) for 10 Kph (6.24 Mph)
ON
fi ElDPEPEI
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 4
Issue 2
October 1996
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Ine
12801.1
CONTENTS
A.
General
B.
Schematic diagram
C.
Technical characteristics
D.
Safety instructions
E.
General maintenance
F.
G.
Wiring diagram
10
H.
Service tool
10
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Cab
Air conditioning
A. General
Suitable control of the internal environment of the cab of
an agricultural implement requires:
- that the temperature and humidity in the cab should
be within a range that is compatible with human
comfort,
- the supply of fresh filtered air to keep the cab under
pressure and to prevent the ingress of impurities,
- the de-icing of windows to ensure visibility in all
directions.
Moreover, the distribution of air should be such that no
difference in temperature can be detected within the
cab, especially over the body surface of the driver.
In addition, the air conditioning system must be
designed to withstand mechanical stresses caused by
the numerous impacts and vibrating stresses
associated with applications in the context of
agricultural work.
Finally, it is of critical importance that the system should
operate satisfactorily in the muddy and dusty conditions
associated with agricultural work. The equipment must
also be capable of operating in positions corresponding
to an angle of tilt that may reach 16 from the horizontal.
The cooling principle
There is no known method of producing cold: only the
absorption of heat is possible. Air conditioning is a
process by which heat is taken out of the air.
Temperature is measured by the quantity of heat in a
given substance. Like water, which always runs from a
high point to a low point, heat always runs from a hot
body to a cold body. Consequently, in order to condition
the air or absorb heat from the air in a cab, the warm air
must be placed in contact with a cold surface.
It is a physical property of liquids that they boil or
evaporate at a specific temperature when at a given
pressure.
In the vaporising process which takes place at a
constant temperature, the liquid absorbs a considerable
amount of heat. One example is that, at normal
atmospheric pressure, water boils or vaporises at 100C
(212F). A considerable quantity of heat can be absorbed
by the water but its temperature will not rise. The same
principle applies if heat is removed: steam returns to the
liquid state or liquids become solid. When pressure is
controlled in a closed circuit, a liquid can be maintained
at low pressure and with a low boiling point. During
vaporisation, the liquid absorbs heat from its
environment.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
17k
12801.3
B. Schematic diagram
Points on
circuit
State of
fluid
Pressure
Temperature
Remarks
COMPRESSOR 11)
Compressor
vapour
Switches
from
low to high
Switches
from low
to high
Compressor
outlet
condenser inlet
vapour
High
High
vapour +
liquid
High
Switches
from high
to medium
Condenser outlet
Receiver-drier
Expansion
Valve inlet
liquid
High
Medium
Expansion
valve
liquid +
vapour
(?.. 20%)
Switches
from
high to low
Switches
from medium
to low
Expansion
Valve outlet
Evaporator inlet
liquid +
vapour
Low
Low
liquid +
vapour
Low
Low
vapour
Low
Low
t\
Q
4
Condenser
PRESSURE
REDUCING VALVE (9)
0
0
Evaporator
4.
Evaporator
outlet
Compressor
inlet
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
me
12B01.4
*
Fig. 1
List of parts
(1) Compressor with electromagnetic clutch
(2) High-pressure pipe (compressor to condenser)
(3) Condenser
(4) High pressure pipe (condenser to receiver-drier)
(5) Receiver-drier
(6) High pressure pipe (receiver-drier to quick
coupler)
(7) Quick couplers
(8) High pressure pipe (quick coupler to expansion
valve)
(9) Expansion valve
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
12B01.5
C . Technical characteristics
1. General
Compressor
- Make
- Type
- No of cylinders
- Oil capacity
- Drive belt
Tension
Deflection
- Weight
Sanden
SD-7H15
7
190 cc (6.69 fl oz)
108 - 122 Nm (80 - 90 lbf ft)
12 -15 mm (1/2 - 5/8)
7.5 kg (16.5 Ib)
- Voltage
- Current
- Air gap
12 V
3.6 - 4.2 amps
0.4 - 0.8 mm (0.016 - 0.031 in)
Torque specifications
- Refrigerant type
R-134a
- Capacity
1.7 kg (3.75 Ib)
- Operating pressure and temperatures
Ambient temperature at 30 - 40 C (86 - 104 F) at sea level
- Low side pressure
0.3 - 0.65 bar (4.3 - 9.4 lbd in2)
- High pressure side
'12 - 18.5 bar (174 - 268 lbf in2)
Temperature control
- Range
- Differential
1 - 20 C (34 - 68 F)
4 C (7 F)
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
2. Components
Compressor and electromagnetic clutch
Compressor
The compressor, its clutch and the pulley constitute a
removable assembly.
This assembly compresses the low-pressure gaseous
refrigerant to high pressure and ensures circulation of
the refrigerant through the system.
Electromagnetic clutch
This allows the compressor to be engaged and
disengaged according to the evaporator temperature.
The coupling consists of two main components: the
stationary induction coil (permanent induction field) and
the rotor.
The induction coil is fitted directly on the compressor.
The grooved pulley is fitted on the tapered end of the
crankshaft.
The current transmitted by the temperature control
switch generates a magnetic field and the rotor disk is
magnetically attracted against the pulley. The
compressor runs. When the current is switched off, the
rotor is demagnetized and the mechanical coupling is
thus disengaged.
If parts are replaced : evaporator, condenser, receiverdrier, compressor or expansion valve, the circuit must
be drained, taking the precautions specified in the next
section and performing the operations in the correct
order.
Condenser
The condenser receives the gaseous refrigerant under
high pressure and at hign temperature from the
compressor and transforms it into pre-cooled liquid in
the high-pressure state. It is designed to withstand
variations in the temperature of the hot, gaseous
refrigerant and cold outside air. When the refrigerant is
cooled, the gas becomes liquid. This cooling is obtained
by passing a stream of cool air (according to the
vehicle's speed and the capacity of the motor fan). The
temperatures of the refrigerant in the condenser vary
between 49C and 77C for pressures of between
10.5 kg/cm2 and 21 kg/cm2.
If the condenser has to be replaced:
- Avoid damaging the cooling fins in order to ensure the
appliance's maximum efficiency.
Issue 1
Receiver-drier
The receiver-drier is an important component of the air
conditioning system. It is supplied with liquid
refrigerant from the condenser and removes any
humidity and foreign bodies which may have entered
the system.
The receptacle is used for temporary storage of the
refrigerant, according to the requirements of the
expansion valve.
The circulation of refrigerant in the circuit can be
checked on the warning light located above this
reservoir.
This part also acts as a filter (similarto an engine oil filter)
and must be replaced at least every 1,000 hours or
every three years, or when any servicing action
requires recharging the circuit.
When installing or replacing the receiver-drier :
- Check the correct connection on pipes on the IN side
to the condenser.
- Remove the rubber protective covers from the
couplings at the last moment in order to avoid the
entry of any dampness.
- All the seals must be replaced after disassembly and
the new seals must be lubricated when fitted. These
are special seals.
Expansion valve
This valve, located on the evaporator inlet, controls the
quantity of refrigerant entering the evaporator and
reduces the pressure of the refrigerant. It automatically
governs the flow of refrigerant to the evaporator
according to the amount of heat.
It reacts according to the temperature of its sensitive
element and to the pressure of the liquid.
In order to avoid any excessive pressure drop in the
evaporator, the valve is equipped with a compensating
system with a bulb which takes into account the
temperature of the gas on outlet from the evaporator.
This bulb is also connected to the valve diaphragm.
If the valve is replaced:
- Always lightly lubricate the couplings with oil for
refrigerant.
- Check that the needle operates correctly before fitting
by spraying liquid refrigerant onto the bulb and checking
the movement of the needle.
- Check that the valve is correctly connected.
- Handle the capillary tubes with care.
- When fixing the heat-sensitive element (the bulb)
onto the pipe, clean the pipe to ensure good contact.
Secure the bulb onto the pipe with the clip provided
and insulate with insulating fabric.
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Cab
Air conditioning
Evaporator
The purpose of the evaporator, located behind the
turbine fans, is to cool and dehumidify the ambient air.
In the evaporator, the liquid refrigerant which is at low
pressure and low temperature after passing through
the expansion valve, boils and starts evaporating
immediately.
This process absorbs the heat from the air sucked in
from the cab.
Motor fan
A permanent magnet type motor drives two turbine
fans each of which is protected by an air nozzle unit. The
assembly is fitted on an insulated support bracket. A
resister system connected to the main switch allows
the motor to run at three speeds.
Thermostat
The thermostat controls the operation of the
compressor by means of its electromagnetic clutch.
This is a capillary type thermostat which controls an
electrical switch.
It has an adjustable range so that a preset temperature
in the cab to be selected.
The capillary tube measures the temperature in the
evaporator and controls the operation of the switch by
the expansion of its gas.
12801.7
Quick couplers
The quick couplers are installed on the high and low
pressure circuits, on the L.h.s. of the tractor in front of
the cab, to enable the tractor to be split without having
to discharge the system. They facilitate separation
between the engine and transmission and cab removal.
During these operations, seal the couplers using
the plug kit 3376935M91 (see H).
Service ports
The service ports located on the high and low pressure
pipes on the back of the compressor are of quick male
coupler type.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
nit
12E301.8
D. Safety instructions
It is very important to work in a clean environment in
order to prevent the ingress of any dirt into the system.
Carefully clean couplings and, then, lightly lubricate
them with compressor oil before making the
connections.
Do not blow compressed air into the pipes to remove
any particles which might be there: use only refrigerant
for that purpose.
Do not remove pipe protective coverings until the last
moment. Cut hoses using a knife: never use a saw.
Carefully plug pipes when they are stored.
The oil contained in the air conditioning circuit is a
refrigerating oil. It is miscible with refrigerant.
Precautions to be taken
An air conditioning unit can be a dangerous piece of
equipment which may be compared to a high-pressure
steam boiler. The pressure of the refrigerant is always
greater than at its normal boiling point. If a rupture
occurs on a pipe, the refrigerant will evaporate or boil
extremely quickly.
The forces generated by expansion can be very
dangerous. A refrigeration technician must always
work with care to prevent any uncontrolled escape of
refrigerant. R134a refrigerant is non-flammable, nontoxic (except when in contact with an open flame) and
non-corrosive (except in contact with water).
Great care must be taken when handling R134a
refrigerant. It can freeze the skin or the eyes on direct
contact.
In contact with an open flame or at high
temperature, it decomposes to produce phosgene
gas which is deadly poisonous.
Never handle refrigerant without wearing safety
goggles and gloves.
Never attempt to drain a system by loosening a
coupling. Slow draining without any danger can only be
carried out using an evacuating/charging station
dedicated to R134a refrigerant (see section 12C01).
Never drain the system in a room where there is a
flame. The same precautions must be taken when
checking for leaks.
When it is necessary to retighten a coupling, use two
wrenches so as to avoid deformations which may
cause leaks.
Never weld or clean with steam near a filled system as
this may result in excess pressure and result in leaks.
Issue 1
E . General maintenance
Very important: Before switching on the air
conditioning system, check that windows and
doors are properly closed. The interior of the cab
must be kept as clean as possible. If, for any reason,
the cab cannot be fully closed, the air recycling
system must be switched off. If these
recommendations are not complied with, the
evaporator may be clogged and this will stop the air
conditioning system and may damage the
compressor.
To ensure that the system operates correctly, the filter
located at the back of the cab, the condenser, the fans
and the evaporator must be periodically checked. Any
clogging results in increased high and low pressure and
reduces the cooling efficiency. The tension of the
driving belt and its alignment must be checked.
Check the condition of the pipes carrying condensation
water from the evaporator. Any accumulation of water
in the tray may cause the evaporator to ice up and stop
the refrigerant circulating, so reducing the system's
efficiency.
To keep the system in good condition, it is advisable to
run the system for a few minutes each week in order to
lubricate all the components, as the oil in the
compressor is miscible with refrigerant.
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
14r
Electrical system
NW'
12B01.9
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ine
12801.10
G . Wiring diagram
List of parts
(1) 4-way fan switch
(2) Air conditioning thermostat
(3) Pressure switch on HP circuit protecting the
system by cutting out power supply to the clutch
when high pressure is too low or too high (2 bar or
27 bar).
(4) Electromagnetic clutch
(5) Motor fan
Colour of wires
B/N : Blue and black
J/N : Yellow and black
M : Brown
N
: Black
O
: Orange
R
: Red
Vi
: Violet
H . Service tool
(3376935M91 - Plug kit for quick couplers on high
and low pressure circuits
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
6100
vgr
0
SERIES TRACTORS
12C01.1
CONTENTS
Recommendation
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Service tools
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
1 2C01 .2
Cab
Recommendation
All the operations described in this section must be
carried out using imperatively a service equipment
(evacuatin/charging station, refrigerant recovery
station, refrigerant leak detector,...) dedicated for
R134a refrigerant (see H).
Issue 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
00
1411_,
111
:
111,:irlitilmi
.7
:
;14
03,
117
f gly
ir ill
)
)
--
64
11
11
alim110111111110$1111::
rtlIM
Fig. 2
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
Cab
12C01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ase
12C01.4
Cab
1. Instructions for filling the charging cylinder from the refrigerant gas bottle (Fig. 5)
Connect the refrigerant bottle to the bottom of the
charging cylinder and tip the bottle upside down. Open
the taps. When the pressures are equal in the bottle and
in the charging cylinder, bleed gas from the charging
cylinder through the top tap until the quantity of
refrigerant required for the system is obtained.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
!Ay
12C01.5
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
E . Service tools
Description
Portable evacuatin/charging
station
Specification
Vacuum pump : 1 cfm 2 stage with anti-oil
migration
Charging cylinder of 2200 g (5 Ib) capacity
Hoses 1.8 m (72 in) with R134a couplers
Supply : 220/240 V 50 Hz
Options :
Compressor oil injection
Part number
311DAB8QC01
311CAP8QC01
311DAB8QCO1S (a)
311CAP8QCO1S (b)
311DAB8QCB1 (a)
311DAB8QCB1S
311CAP8QCB1 (b)
311CAP8QCB1S
17621 / PAG
17651 / PAG
16500
13204
12008
Issue 1
(a)
(b)
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
FT
Cab
Failures - Compressor
ne
12D01.1
B.
C.
Compressor
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
ale
12D01.2
Issue 1
4TPT
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
12D01.3
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE
www.maskinisten.net
C. Compressor
Setting the clutch drive plate clearance
Check the clearance with feeler gauges. The clearance should
be 0.4 to 0.8 mm (Fig. 1).
If the clearance is not the same all the way round, lift slightly
and tap gently where the difference is greatest.
Issue 1
February 1995
CONTENTS
SOMMAIRE